Soils underpin all nature-based systems and are therefore vital for Scotland’s communities and economy. From food security to transport disruption through events such as landslides, the climate resilience value of investing in healthy soils is recognised by the Climate Change Committee as a priority adaptation area for Scotland.
There are many risks threatening Scottish soils across different soil types and land covers. However, unlike air and water, there is no single overarching soil policy providing security and governance for Scottish soils. Soils are spread across multiple policy divisions, which results in a lack of cohesive leadership in tackling threats to soils.
The aim of this route map is to consolidate the challenges of managing soil systems to develop an overarching strategy for delivering improved soil security across Scottish landscapes.
Key points
There is increasing awareness of the important role soils play for our communities, economy and environment in terms of their ability to contribute to climate regulation, flood resilience, food security, support forestry and assist biodiversity. This is reflected in recent policy updates which have outlined objectives that directly relate to improvements in soil health and/or security, such as:
This route map acknowledges the challenges of addressing soil security in a policy context due to the absence of an overarching soil-specific policy. Currently actions to support soils sit across different policies, which focus on different environmental challenges at different scales. Nevertheless, this route map outlines opportunities to gain value and effectiveness through better coordination of existing activities and policy delivery.
Next steps
Objectives
This route map recommends six objectives for Scotland to achieve our vision of ‘thriving soils for Scotland’s communities, economy and environment’:
Lead – Inspire and collaborate to deliver the vision for Scottish soils
Protect – Prevent further damage to soils
Restore – Repair damaged soils
Enhance – Strengthen soils for the future
Evidence – Data, knowledge and wisdom relating to Scottish soils
Mobilise – Communicate, engage and participate towards thriving soils in Scotland
For further information, including recommendations, please read the report.
If you require the report in an alternative format, such as a Word document, please contact info@climatexchange.org.uk or 0131 651 4783.
Degraded peatlands are one of the largest sources of greenhouse gas emissions in Scotland. The Scottish Government has a budget of £250m to spend towards peatland restoration efforts through the Peatland ACTION (PA) programme up to 2030.
This research explored the evidence for peatland restoration costs in Scotland and examined emerging trends. It also investigated opportunities and challenges for contractors delivering peatland restoration services.
The researchers undertook a literature review, cost data analysis and contractor interviews.
Findings
Observed peatland restoration costs per hectare vary significantly. Factors affecting cost include site characteristics, funding availability and environmental designation status.
Approximately half of the variation in unit costs between sites could not be explained by the statistical analysis.
There is some evidence that larger projects have lower unit costs.
Supply of restoration services might be strengthened and value for money in peatland restoration increased through consideration of the following:
Include contingency costings as part of the tendering process, to address contractors’ cost risks.
Commit to long-term funding of a pipeline of restoration projects.
Ensure prompt payment upon project completion with provision for at least part payment if final inspection is delayed.
Simplify tendering procedures to stimulate supplier interest in peatland restoration work.
Continue with training support plus opportunities for knowledge exchange between funders and contractors.
For further details, please read the report.
If you require the report in an alternative format, such as a Word document, please contact info@climatexchange.org.uk or 0131 651 4783.
Degraded peatlands are one of the largest sources of greenhouse gas emissions in Scotland. The Scottish Government has a budget of £250m to spend towards peatland restoration efforts through the Peatland ACTION (PA) programme up to 2030.
This research explored the evidence for peatland restoration costs in Scotland and examined emerging trends. It also investigated opportunities and challenges for contractors delivering peatland restoration services. We reviewed existing literature and analysed cost data compiled by SRUC from the PA programme projects supported by NatureScot funding between 2018 and 2023. We also carried out interviews with contractors. Data from other PA delivery partners post 2021 was not examined in this project phase due to time constraints.
Key findings
Observed peatland restoration costs per hectare vary significantly. This reflects a range of influencing factors, including:
project-specific factors (e.g. site characteristics, project length)
contractor-specific factors (e.g. firm size and history)
site location, baseline condition and environmental designation status.
Approximately half of the variation in unit costs between sites could not be explained by the statistical analysis, often due to noise in the data, for example:
Differences in data recording on restoration processes, project characteristics and costs across projects within the study period
Wider economic factors such as regional variations in labour and material costs, poor transport networks and local competition for scarce resources (see the recent SRUC Rural and Islands Insights report for evidence of this at a local scale)
Limited local competition due to barriers to entry to the market.
There is some evidence for economies of scale i.e. larger projects have lower unit costs. The extent of such economies of scales is difficult to determine due to other differences across projects.
Statistically speaking, costs of restoration have not changed over time. The absence of such an observed time trend in restoration unit costs may simplify the use of unit costs as predicted by the model to future years.
Interview data highlighted the impact of other factors, confirming the influence of complexities and uncertainties, both real and perceived, in the tendering process. These include:
perceived uncertainty in long-term commitment to government support for peatland restoration
challenging tendering processes
environmental and market conditions that add risk to a business engaged in restoration.
This is largely independent of site characteristics but impairs value for money directly by increasing the overhead costs of tendering, and indirectly by constraining the pool of willing contractors.
Improving operational delivery of peatland restoration
Estimates for restoration costs from our analysis could be useful for costings of large-scale policy programmes; the spatial approach to estimating variation in unit costs allows extrapolation at larger scale, although further work is needed to understand complex issues.
Further research into the extent to which economies of scale are present would be helpful, as would steps to improve confidence in the accuracy of reported costs and associated site characteristics.
Regional differences imply that uniform national benchmarking rates might be inappropriate, with large residual uncertainty of unit costs potentially increasing the risk of falsely rejecting projects that may deliver restoration cost-effectively.
Using standardised costs to assess projects is also problematic because a large part of variation in costs remains unexplained. Either of the options below can improve this situation.
Give greater attention in the tendering process, in particular how that may be improved on both the demand and supply side. This would draw out true context-specific costs in a competitive market.
Seek greater transparency around individual cost elements for an individual project bid, including overhead charges and profit margins e.g. open-book tendering with agreed percentage markups.
Supply of restoration services might be strengthened and value for money in peatland restoration increased through consideration of the following:
Include contingency costings as part of the tendering process, to address contractors’ cost risks regarding e.g. inflation spikes in key inputs (e.g. fuel) or unforeseen site complexities.
Commit to long-term funding of a pipeline of restoration projects. This will provide reassurance to existing and potential contractors that their investment in staff and machinery is merited.
Ensure prompt payment upon project completion with provision for at least part payment when final inspection is delayed due, for example, to weather conditions.
Simplify tendering procedures to stimulate supplier interest in peatland restoration work through rationalisation of information required, improved guidance and support for those tendering the work to provide better feedback.
Continue with (well received) training support plus opportunities for mutual knowledge exchange between funders and contractors. A specific area for training is in data collection for contractors.
Strengthening future analysis
Challenges and limitations of the analysis presented in this report could be addressed by:
Exploring potential systemic differences across Peatland ACTION delivery partners by comparing the results derived from the NatureScot Peatland ACTION database with estimates generated by, for example the Cairngorms National Park and Forestry and Land Scotland.
Confirming that the process of recording spatial location and recording of restoration area based on site outlines is standardised and consistently allows linking area and location with records of restoration costs and activities over time. Verification of reported area estimates through digitization in GIS can reveal important discrepancies. Re-recording of samples of outlines for restored areas, known as restoration footprint, on the ground should be considered for comparison.
Glossary / Abbreviations table
Abbreviations
CCP
Climate Change Plan
CEDA
Centre for Environmental Data Analysis
CEH
Centre for Ecology & Hydrology
CNPA
Cairngorms National Park Authority
FLS
Forestry and Land Scotland
GHG
Greenhouse Gas
GIS
Geographic Information System
JHI
The James Hutton Institute
LULUCF
Land Use, Land Use Change and Forestry
NNR
National Nature Reserves
NSA
National Scenic Areas
OS
Ordnance Survey
PA
Peatland ACTION
PCS
Public Contracts Scotland
SAC
Special Areas of Conservation
SEPA
Scottish Environment Protection Agency
SG
Scottish Government
SPA
Special Protection Area
SRUC
Scotland’s Rural College
SSE
SSE plc (formerly Scottish and Southern Energy plc) is a multinational energy company
SSSI
Site(s) of Special Scientific Interest
Glossary
Bidding
Process thorough which contractors respond to the tender by offering a budget and scale of activities they are capable of delivering within the defined scope of the project.
Complexity
Aggregate account of extent and effort required to restore a particular site. A combination of site’s location, topographic features, accessibility, peatland condition and land cover that determine the overall scales of restoration operations and thus represents a proxy for the resources (costs) required.
Contractor
Private company directly engaged in restoration activities.
Cost Database
Also: SRUC (peatland restoration) cost database; Peat restoration cost database collated by SRUC capturing main activities and costs during restoration collected as part of the NatureScot administered delivery of the Peatland ACTION Programme.
Cost-Effectiveness
A ratio of unit costs of restoration and a metric used for measurement of restoration success such as area restored or GHG abated. High cost-effectiveness means low cost for high level of benefit delivered and thus is a common way to measure value for money.
Degraded Peatland
A peatland is considered degraded if it is a source, rather than a sink of GHGs. This is due to a combination of peat draining and surface damage due to use, extraction or propagation of plant species that hinder the natural process of growth of peat moss (sphagnum).
Feasibility study
Process of determining whether it is practically possible to deliver sufficient levels of improvement in quality of a particular stretch of degraded peatland. Required prerequisite for any implementation activities.
Heterogeneity
Account of patchiness/variability of land cover on a particular peatland site. It is measured as a total length of outline of individual land cover features, i.e. water bodies, patches of forest or grasslands. Land cover heterogeneity is assumed to be linked with high site complexity from the perspective of peatland restoration.
Maintenance
Any work required on a site post-restoration such as repairs to installed features.
Monitoring
Regular assessment of a post-restoration site to collect information on the current status of peatland recovery and any evidence of success of implemented measures. Includes inspection of installed features and sampling of peat condition.
NatureScot
Previously Scottish Natural Heritage; public body responsible for advising Scottish Ministers on all matters relating to the natural heritage.
Peatland Code
Voluntary standard for UK peatland projects wishing to market the climate benefit of restoration.
Peatland Condition
Classification of current state of degraded peatlands. Classes consist of a combination of drainage status and surface cover i.e. drained grassland. Peat condition classes are used to calculate annual emission from degraded peatlands.
Peatland Restoration
A set of activities required to undertake to return a degraded peatland to its (near) natural state.
Peatland
Land is classified as peatland if within the measured boundary the peat soil profile is at least 50cm deep.
Remoteness
Remoteness of a site is an aggregate measure of its distance from population centres, access infrastructure and topographic features such as elevation.
Restoration Cost
For the purpose of this analysis, the costs of restoring a particular site represent all the labour, machinery, fuel, equipment, material and other resources used during the measure implementation phase.
Restoration measures
Individual activities undertaken on a restoration site during the project implementation phase such as installation of peat dams, bunding, moss planting or shrub removal.
Restoration Project
A complete set of activities funded within a single grant allocation. Each restoration project can consist of restoration of a single or several sites. The implementation of restoration activities can be undertaken in several subsequent or overlapping phases.
Restoration Site
A discrete patch of land on which the restoration activities take place. The area defined as a restoration site is thus equal to the area restored after the project implementation phase is concluded.
Rewetting
A collection of activities aimed at restoring the natural water content of required peatland. One of the key steps to reduce excess emissions from degraded peatlands.
Tendering
Process of publishing a call for contractors to apply for a delivery of a specific peatland restoration project and subsequently choosing a winning bid based on the set of defined criteria.
Background
A high proportion of Scottish peatlands are in a degraded state and the Scottish Government has been setting ambitious targets for peatland restoration[1]. These reflect various overlapping policy objectives, notably reductions in greenhouse gas emissions (GHG) but also biodiversity enhancement and water management. Primarily via the Peatland ACTION (PA) programme supported by Scottish Government and administered by Scottish Natural Heritage (now NatureScot), Forestry and Land Scotland, and the National Park authorities, in excess of 52,000 hectares have been restored since 2012.
In February 2020, the Scottish Government announced an increase in investment in peatland restoration of more than £250 million over 10 years, aiming to support the restoration of 250,000 hectares of degraded peat by 2030, as part of the Scottish Government’s Climate Change Plan for net zero. In the Update of the Climate Change Plan, the restoration target is upheld, and it is emphasised that “[t]o deliver on the 2032 emissions reduction envelope annual peatland restoration needs to be far higher than the current 20,000 hectare annual target”.[2]
Scottish Government funding for peatland restoration is managed via the Peatland ACTION (PA) programme. This has five delivery partners: NatureScot, Forestry and Land Scotland, Cairngorms National Park Authority, Loch Lomond and The Trossachs National Park Authority and Scottish Water. This research examined only NatureScot projects. Harmonising data from all delivery partners was an initial ambition but considered out of scope within the time and budget available in the project. Nevertheless, cost data collated from NatureScot PA administered projects has wide coverage, geographically and in terms of restoration activities and accounts for c.70% of PA restoration.
Over 10,000 ha of Scottish peatlands were restored under PA in 2023/24, an increase in annual restoration area of 40% compared to the previous year. Despite this increase, meeting the policy ambition for peatland restoration will require significant upscaling of restoration efforts over coming years at times of continued pressure on public budgets. Value-for-money and scale of policy ambition imply a need for targeting restoration efforts where it is most cost effective, taking single (GHG emission reduction) or multiple social and environmental outcomes into account. Determining such cost-effective pathways, requires an in-depth understanding of the costs that currently underpin peatland restoration in Scotland. However, whilst variation in restoration costs across different projects are reported (Glenk et al., 2022), the causes of such variation have yet to be investigated systematically. Furthermore, despite the key role that contractors have in peatland restoration delivery (and therefore associated costs), their perceptions of the tendering and restoration process has not yet been sufficiently studied.
This report examines variation of costs of implementing restoration,[3] factors affecting contractors ability and willingness to engage in restoration, and explores barriers to scaling restoration efforts related to costs and the supply of restoration services by contractors.
The project had three main aims:
1. Which factors affect restoration costs? (Section 4)
We take a broad perspective to offer an overview that considers environmental and site conditions, factors affecting bidding of contractors and actual restoration work. The synthesis is based on a rapid review of literature discussing bidding behaviour and cost of implementing nature restoration, combined with the joint expertise of the research team. Where possible, we discuss interactions between factors and how they have been evolving over time.
2.Which factors explain variation in restoration cost? (Section 5)
We provide a data driven quantification of relationships between restoration cost and environmental and site characteristics. The analysis draws on cost data collected via the NatureScot PA funded programme[4], which is matched with spatial information on environmental and site characteristics for statistical analysis. This provides insight into any systematic variation of restoration cost to support restoration budgeting and planning.
3. What are the opportunities and challenges for contractors in engaging with restoration? (Section 6)
We draw on interviews with contractors of restoration services selected to represent a mix of size and geographical spread. Interview notes and transcripts were reviewed to provide perspectives on prospects and difficulties faced by contractors as crucial actors for scaling of restoration efforts.
Factors affecting restoration – an overview
A brief synthesis of related literature
To identify factors affecting restoration cost, we screened relevant literature related to costs of ecosystem restoration and nature-based solutions[5]; and the factors affecting bidding behaviour of contractors.
Cost of conservation efforts, including ecosystem restoration
There is consensus in conservation literature that costs should play an important role for conservation planning, management and evaluation; they affect ‘value for money’ considerations. The efficiency of conservation spending is enhanced if funding is allocated based on considerations of cost-effectiveness, i.e., the benefit achieved relative to cost (e.g., Babcock et al., 1997; Naidoo et al., 2006; Perhans et al., 2008; Burkhalter et al., 2016; Rodewald et al., 2019; Field and Elphick, 2019). How benefits are measured is of relevance, too: counting benefits simply in terms of area or number of conservation units is associated with less efficient allocation of resources compared to measures that better reflected actual intended outcomes (e.g., biodiversity) (Engert and Laurance., 2019).
The efficiency gains of considering costs depend on the accuracy of cost predictions. This requires the development of cost projections that reflect the (spatial) variability in cost of conservation action (Burkhalter et al., 2016; Van Deynze et al., 2022), also allowing the identification of potential economies of scale (Cho et al., 2017; Armsworth et al., 2018).
Ecosystem restoration projects of all types are generally considered to be high cost, often requiring significant up-front capital investment (Sewell et al., 2016). However, costs of restoration vary greatly across contexts and locations (de Groot et al., 2013; Sewell et al., 2016; Van Deynze et al., 2022). Factors quoted to influence cost variation include the baseline level of ecosystem degradation, local infrastructure availability, type and scale of restoration, population pressure and density, the legal framework, existing land use and tenure arrangements, land value, labour costs and method of measurement (Sewell et al. 2016,). We found studies referring to complexity of restoration works, managing and protecting safe access to sites, access to labour and supplies, and other project characteristics including land cover, slope, elevation, number of sites in a project and distance between sites (Van Deynze et al., 2022).
More specific peatland restoration cost estimates for the UK and Scotland also show great variability. For example, costs per hectare vary greatly by restoration technique used (Artz et al 2018; Okumah et al., 2019; Glenk et al., 2020, 2021, 2022). A previous CXC study (Artz et al., 2019) investigated physical limitations to access to restoration sites. They focused on several factors – physical infrastructure (road network), snow days, rainfall, elevation, peat condition, drainage status and a NatureScot remoteness index. Further, Aitkenhead et al., (2021), in their mapping of peatland emission categories, provided evidence for strong regional variation in peatland conditions and levels of degradation. In an outline of a national peatland monitoring strategy, Artz et al. (2023) proposed features such as bare peat extent, topographic and hydrological connectivity, soil erosion levels, microclimatic proxies water table stabilisation such as rainfall or windspeed and changes to vegetation cover among others, as essential dimensions to monitor the potential success of restoration efforts. Previously, Artz et al., (2019) had also identified strong geographic divide in peatland conditions across Scotland and that high site fragmentation levels introduce substantial error into the estimation process.
Other studies confirm the relevance of factors including altitude and distance from roads (remoteness) (Okumah et al., 2019), and site condition (Glenk et al., 2020, 2021, 2022), pre-restoration site use and land-cover.
The conservation and restoration literature emphasises the importance of reporting cost elements (e.g. fixed & variable, capital, labour cost) instead of simply total cost (Cook et al., 2017; Artz et al., 2018). Knowledge of cost elements, ideally collected in a standardised way (Iacona et al., 2018; Artz et al., 2018), facilitates the transfer of cost estimates across sites and contexts, enhances their potential to enter decision support tools, and improves understanding of the relationship between cost and conservation outcome as spending increases or decreases (Cook et al., 2017). Lack of standardising how costs are accounted for adds to an already large variation in reported cost across projects (Sewell et al., 2016; Glenk et al., 2020).
Synthesis of papers investigating contractors’ decisions to bid
Peatland restoration is primarily undertaken by private-sector contractors who are invited to tender competitively for work. However, little research appears to have been undertaken specifically in relation to peatland contractors’ business models and factors influencing their decisions to bid for restoration projects. Nonetheless, some possible insights are offered by findings for other land-based sectors (e.g. forestry, landscaping, and civil engineering).[6] Although the analogies are not perfect, they are sufficient to identify relevant types of issues.
Common factors identified in this broader literature fall into various risk categories: client-related, project-related, contractor-related, and other (Cohan, 2018; Oo et al., 2022; Olatunji et al., 2023). The latter relate to background market conditions and government policies which apply across all contractors and projects, for example, wage and price inflation or regulatory obligations. All other things being equal, uncertainty about relative costs and/or future regulatory requirements dampen contractors’ willingness to bid for projects and/or increase quoted bid prices (Oo et al., 2022; Binshakir et al., 2023; Olatunji et al., 2023).
Client-related factors include financial and organisational reputation plus willingness to foster longer-term relationships. For example, promptness in paying, openness of administrative processes, and degree of mutual trust. All other things being equal, a reliable client with simple(r) bidding processes and a willingness to share project information plus commit to a pipeline of work is more likely to receive bids, and at lower prices (Spencer, 1989; Oo et al., 2022; Binshakir et al., 2023; Olatunji et al., 2023).
Project-related factors essentially relate to the size and complexity of projects (and hence overlap with the site-specific factors noted above). For example, larger projects generally benefit from economies of scale and simpler projects have less risk of encountering unforeseen problems. Hence, all other things being equal, simpler and larger projects are more likely to attract bids, and at lower unit prices (Oo et al., 2022; Binshakir et al., 2023; Johansson et al., 2023; Kronholm et al., 2023; Olatunji et al., 2023).
Contractor-related factors relate to the capabilities and confidence of individual firms. For example, prior experience with similar projects, availability of relevant staff and machinery, and sufficient cash-flow. All other things being equal, a contractor is more likely to bid for a given project if they are familiar with the type of work required and either already have the necessary staff and machinery or are sufficiently confident to invest in additional capacity (e.g. perceive a good chance of follow-on work). Confidence to bid may also reflect the anticipated degree of competition from other contractors and perceived fairness of (client-related) bidding processes. For example, the likelihood of a rival bid by a competitor being viewed as strong and/or favoured may discourage bidding (Cohan, 2018; Spencer, 1989; Oo et al., 2022; Binshakir et al., 2023; Johansson et al., 2023; Kronholm et al., 2023; Olatunji et al., 2023).
Implications for costs
Given that all factors identified above are likely to vary across different projects, clients (e.g. funding bodies), contractors and time-periods, it would be expected that observed unit costs (e.g. per ha) will display significant variation. This is confirmed by previous analysis of peatland restoration costs across Scotland (Okumah et al., 2019; Glenk et al., 2020, 2021, 2022). For example, Glenk et al. (2022) report overall median costs of £1025/ha across 158 completed projects but with a standard deviation of £4328/ha, and also show that medians for different types of projects vary between £939/ha and £1778/ha.
Reported costs for other types of ecosystem restoration also show significant (>40%) variation. This is largely attributed to differences in project scales and complexity, including administrative processes, but also to a lack of standardisation in cost reporting. Econometric analysis of the determinants of cost variation typically struggle to explain all such variation (King and Bohlen, 1995; Keating et al., 2015; Knight et al., 2021; Van Deynze et al., 2022).
The findings from the available literature are consistent with anecdotal evidence gleaned previously by members of the research team and of the Steering Group. As such, it is possible to hypothesise the types of factors likely to affect peatland restoration costs, to guide (but not dictate) issues to explore through statistical analysis of secondary data and through discussions with contractors.
We identified a wide overview of potential factors affecting restoration costs across sites and at a given point in time (Appendix Table A4.2). There are potential relationships between factors and restoration costs, for example, costs per hectare are likely to fall as project size increases and overhead cost elements can be spread more thinly. However, costs per hectare are likely to increase with severity of baseline degradation (e.g. proportion of site with eroded or bare peat) as the restoration effort required increases. Similarly, more remote sites and sites with more complex mosaics of features may also be relatively more expensive per hectare.
The issue is complex and factors may confound each other. For example, economies of scale effects may not be immediately apparent if larger sites also happen to be more remote and/or more degraded.
The statistical analysis relied on the cost data already collated by researchers of SRUC into a suitable database from PA NatureScot data, although inconsistencies in reporting over projects and the study period (2018-2023) presented challenges. Specific metrics for characterising projects may include various biophysical indicators (e.g. area, location, topography) as well as baseline condition and access conditions affecting which type and density of restoration techniques is cost-effective.
We understand that PA delivery partners differ in their approach to profiling projects for tendering with potential implications for a full analysis of reported cost. For example, the Cairngorms National Park Authority (CNPA) has a model to translate complexity into labour and machinery days necessary for restoration, providing options for adjustments of typical rates in the process. This approach makes intuitive sense given that many site-specific factors affecting cost are related to complexity (Appendix Table A4.2). However, pre-characterization of complexity of restoration via aerial photography is time consuming and may be challenging to apply at scale. This may change in the future, for example employing machine learning mapping tools to assess drainage and erosion features that provide indication for restoration complexity (Macfarlane et al., 2024).
In addition, background changes over time may affect all projects, including advances in restoration techniques (Appendix Table A4.3). For example, inflation increasing the costs of key inputs (e.g. fuel) but also, potentially, innovation and experience reducing unit costs. Dynamics of supply and demand for restoration services may affect unit cost of restoration and also change over time. For example, contractors of restoration services may become more experienced and thus efficient over time. However, whether this impacts on unit costs depends, among other things, also on the level of competition that contractors face.
In addition to the statistical analysis of reported cost data, more qualitative insights can be gained through interviews with contractors undertaking restoration activities on-the-ground. This offers an opportunity to confirm the relevance of factors identified for statistical analysis. It also offers an opportunity to explore other factors not included in the cost database.
For example, contractors’ willingness to bid and quoted prices for particular projects may be affected by their capacity and experience (e.g. number of diggers, work on similar sites previously), but also by alternative income-generating opportunities (e.g. other civil-engineering work). Moreover, it may also be affected by (perceived) complexity and fairness of tendering processes, including the (perceived) likelihood of bidding successfully (i.e., whether tendering is worth the effort).
Such issues can be explored through discussion with contractors using semi-structured interviews. Whilst a range of different types of contractors (e.g. varying by size, location and experience) can be interviewed, results should not be treated as statistically representative but rather as illustrative cases of the types of factors influencing contractors’ engagement with peatland restoration.
Conclusion
Peatland restoration costs are influenced by a range of factors, including:
project-specific factors (e.g., site characteristics, project length),
contractor-specific factors (e.g. firm size and history), and
These factors vary across different projects, clients (e.g. funding bodies), contractors and time periods, leading to great variation in observed unit (e.g. per ha) costs. Lack of standardising how costs are accounted for further adds to this already large variation in reported cost across projects. Systematic analysis of the factors to identify variation and evidence collected directly from contractors are needed to gain in-depth understanding.
Explaining variation in restoration cost
In this section we use information entailed in the SRUC cost database, which is compiled from NatureScot Peatland ACTION grant application and final reporting forms (see Section 5.1). We combine data in the SRUC cost database with publicly available spatial data to determine how geography, climate, peat condition, land use and site designation (SSSI etc.) are associated with restoration costs. The main output of the work reported in this section is a statistical model which attempts to explain variation in the restoration cost per hectare across completed projects.
The model results can be used to understand systematic relationships between restoration costs and site characteristics (e.g. access, topography, land use) that vary spatially. Findings may provide answers to questions such as ‘typically, is restoring peatland under grassland or forested land more or less expensive?’; or ‘is there a trend for restoration to be more expensive in one region compared to another?’. Answers to such questions may provide insights on how peatland restoration in Scotland could be delivered more cost-effectively. The model may also be used for to derive estimates of costs associated with expanding restoration across Scotland, for example as part of a cost-benefit analysis. We also highlight gaps in knowledge and highlight areas for review and further research that could make this type of analysis more accurate.
Methodological approach: cost data analysis
The SRUC cost database (see Glenk et al., 2022 for an overview) contains detailed information on project costs and activities, and in its most recent form originates from 289 final project report forms of NatureScot PA administered restoration projects covering a period from April 2016 to March 2023. Due to issues with unreliable historic data contained in the forms (see 5.2.4), only 229 of the 289 final observations for a period between April 2017 to March 2023 were complete and sufficiently reliable to be used in the analysis. Full details of the methodology, including limitations of the SRUC database, are given in Appendix A5.
Cost of restoration of a particular peatland site is here defined as the sum of all expenses within the project implementation phase. This includes all the measure-related costs (labour, material, fuel, equipment/machinery), mobilisation costs, project management and monitoring costs (within implementation phase) and other necessary work not directly attributable to restoration measures, such as changes to access infrastructure, site boundaries/fences, location-specific biodiversity protection measures or livestock/wildlife management/exclusion. Cost estimates exclude costs associated with feasibility studies, bidding and grant application process, any pre-restoration site-specific expenses, post-restoration monitoring and maintenance or loss of income due to limited use of the site post-restoration. These non-implementation costs are excluded because they are not part of the contractor tendering process and relate to a different set of activities. In addition, many sites do not yet have a lengthy period of reporting of post-implementation costs.
A statistical model to infer the cost per hectare of a site in the SRUC cost database based on 37 explanatory variables was developed to determine which variables significantly impact on cost. Spatial variables were extracted from several maps based on the location of the restoration project under the assumption that the sites were perfect circles of an area equal to that reported in the SRUC cost database. Spatial variables used to infer cost include rainfall, peat condition, peat depth, pooled-biogeographical-zones. Various configurations of the model were tested (i.e., different explanatory variables, different units of measurement), but the model presented is the best in terms of statistical test performance (see Appendix A5 for more details). A full list of variables used in the model can be seen in the Appendix Table A5.1. and a more detailed description of the data extraction and statistical model can be found in Appendix A5.
Figure 5.1 displays the geographical distribution of projects considered in the analysis across what we refer to as ‘restoration zones’ (Appendix Table A5.4). It is important to note that Figure 5.1 is not a representative map of PA restoration activity. The eight restoration zones were created by pooling the original 21 ‘biogeographical zones’ for the ease of interpretation. The original biogeographical zones, also referred to as ‘Natural Heritage Zones’ represent discrete regions based on similarities in topography, climate and the composition of biological community. Sites within a restoration zone are expected to have similar environmental and geographical features and thus a similar foundation for peatland restoration.
Figure 5.1: Number of sites per restoration zone. FC) Flow Country; AR) Argyll; CH) Central Highlands; NH) Northern Highlands; EC) East Coast; IS) Isles (Shetland, Orkney, Hebrides except for Argyll); CB) Central Belt; SW) Southwest.
Results of cost data analysis
Descriptive data overview
After removing entries with obvious reporting errors (totalling 60 entries), the average cost per hectare (2020-£/ha) of restoration is £1,550/ha. However, there is a large variation in unit cost. To illustrate this: the unit cost at the 5th percentile is £191/ha, while the unit cost at the 95th percentile is £4,483/ha, Appendix Table A5.6.
Therefore, using an overall average cost per hectare to estimate costs of future restoration projects is not advised and further information about the site is required to infer variation in cost per hectare. The average restoration cost per hectare in each restoration zone shows that, all else equal, restoration in the Flow Country was least costly while restoration in the Central Belt was most expensive (Figure 5.2).
On average, 22% of sites were classified as ‘Near Natural Bog’ in the UK LULUCF Inventory (Appendix Table A5.5), and the largest area of restored peatland was classified as ‘Near Natural Bog’ at 32% of the area restored, for the sites considered in this study (Appendix Table A5.5). However, according to information provided by the NatureScot Peatland ACTION team only 3.8% of restored peat bog is near natural bog. It is likely that the ‘circle method’ (Appendix Figure A5.1) for calculating the area of restored peatland and/or the inaccuracy of the peat condition map used in the inventory may cause errors in our calculations.
Size class
Interval (ha)
Average cost (2020£/ha)
1
[0-10]
2375.773
2
[10-25]
1478.852
3
[25-40]
1,344.1
4
[40-85]
1,487.4
5
[85-578]
933.5
Table 5.2: Sites categorised into area classes of equal number of observations (N=46 and N=45 for Size class 5) and their average restoration cost per hectare.
To analyse the relationship between site area on costs per hectare, the sites were distributed equally to size-classes based on spatial area. The average unit costs for sites in the smallest area category were approximately three times as high as the ones in the largest area category, Table 5.2, pointing to the possibility of economies of scale (see Appendix A5.3 for an explanation and illustrative example related to peatland restoration).
These averages, however, need to be interpreted with caution due to the nature of calculation of costs per hectare (total site costs divided by total site area) and confounding factors, i.e., other factors co-vary (in our data) with size. The suggestion that decreased unit cost associated with larger site size in the data is due entirely to economies of scale could therefore be misleading. For example, a high proportion of larger sites are grassland sites rather than bare peat sites, meaning that their lower per ha costs may partly reflect their scale but may also partly reflect the relative ease of restoring grassland rather than restoring bare peat.
This was evident in the cost database, where we find that the largest sites (N=6 representing 17% of the restored area; site area >380ha) had none of the complex restoration activities such as mulching, stabilisation, felling and sphagnum transplanting (one notion of site-complexity). Therefore, it was difficult to determine if a large site was cheaper per hectare due to economies of scale, or because it required less complex restoration activities; both explanations are likely responsible for the observed decrease in cost per hectare with increased site area.
Figure 5.2: Average restoration cost per hectare for each restoration zone. Zones: FC) Flow Country; AR) Argyll; CH) Central Highlands; NH) Northern Highlands; EC) East Coast; IS) Isles (Shetland, Orkney, Hebrides except for Argyll); CB) Central Belt; SW) Southwest.
Statistical model results: drivers of spatial variation in cost per hectare
The results provide a good overview of the spatial drivers of restoration cost but may mask any interactions between variables. The statistical model (log-linear) helps us unpick all the variables that are driving cost for a site and determine features that are making sites more or less expensive (Appendix Table A5.7). The model explained 52.0% of the variation in cost per hectare amongst the 229 sites used in this study. After accounting for the number of variables (37) used in the model relative to the number observations (Adjusted R-squared), the explained variation was 42.4%, which compares favourably to other studies (Van Deynze et al., 2022). The unexplained part is attributed partly to noise in the reported data (e.g. errors in forms and in data entry) and to unobserved influences on costs – both of which reflect some of the limitations of the data collection process. However, it should be noted that it is unrealistic to expect 100% explanatory power on any statistical model: neither is the underlying relationship between different factors often known sufficiently to specify it perfectly in modelling terms nor are all possible data available to populate a perfect model.
Figure 5.3 displays all the variables considered as having an influence on cost per hectare, and the amount that they are predicted by the statistical model to change costs per hectare[7]. Variables right of the red dashed line increase costs and those left of the dashed line decrease costs. Here we discuss variables which we are almost certain (‘significantly’) to affect cost per hectare according to the available data, i.e. those in green in Figure 5.3 as well as variables we initially expected to drive unit cost.
Year of funding
We expected that cost per hectare would vary across time (Appendix Table A4.3). However, the year in which the funding was granted is not statistically significantly explaining variation in costs. Since the costs are deflated, the data suggests that peatland restoration costs have changed over time in line with inflation. However, mostdata points were unreliable before 2017 and the reliability of data increased after 2019, which leaves only a six-year time period to be investigated here. This then limits conclusions in regards of time trends.
Nevertheless, those interested in time trends may inspect a descriptive analysis of area of restoration sites, restoration measures, land cover and regions over time for the study time period (2018-2023, Appendix 5.4).
Regions
For the pooled biogeographical zones, the lowest restoration unit costs, once all other factors such as forestry land use are controlled for, are reported for the Flow Country (which is used as a reference point in the statistical model and hence does not show up in Figure 5.3). Costs per hectare are significantly greater for sites in all other regions. Note that this applies after controlling for all other factors considered in the model. The restoration zones with the greatest restoration costs per hectare are:
The Isles: On average, log-cost per hectare is 2.1 times greater to restore a site in this region than in Flow Country. The high costs may reflect a mix of greater costs (e.g. fuel and haulage costs) on islands. Furthermore, the limited supply of contractor services on specific islands and their need to travel long distances and potentially transport the heavy machinery by ferry are potentially important factors.
Argyll: On average, log-cost per hectare is 1.4 times greater than for the Flow Country. The complexity of terrain and remoteness to some extent overlaps with The Isles, and thus similar challenges might be expected.
Central & Northern Highlands: log-cost per hectare restored is 1.3 times higher than in the Flow Country. The hilly terrain adds complexity due to more difficult access and environmental conditions in which the restoration needs to take place.
The availability of contractors in different restoration zones may also explain the regional differences (see Section 6 and factors related to demand and supply of contractors in Appendix Table A4.3.) [8].
Peatland condition classification
The proportion of peatland in certain condition categories affects restoration costs. In general, sites with lots of peat classified as ‘grassland’ are cheaper to restore, Figure 5.3. We hypothesize that this is because the land is more homogenous and because the grass is protecting the underlying peat from erosion. Therefore, it is more likely that the restoration activities required will be cheaper, such as drain blocking. It may also be that grassland areas have more favourable access conditions that reduce costs.
In contrast, sites with large proportions classified as ‘eroded bog’ increase the restoration cost. This is likely due to the complexity and raised cost of restoration activities to restore eroded bogs, e.g., hag reprofiling and sphagnum moss transplants. The proportion of the site with peat classified as ‘forest’ has the greatest positive effect on cost per hectare amongst Inventory peatland condition categories. We expect that this is due to the cost of felling, and the associated removal of stumps and possibly mulching, before restoration activities can begin. This finding is in line with earlier analysis presented in Glenk et al., (2022).
Site designation
Each site designation is self-reported and model results can be interpreted as the effect of a particular reported site designation, keeping all other designations the same. If a site reports SSSI designation, the log-costs per hectare are 80% higher than without it, Figure 5.3. This could be tied to careful operation on-site and risk of downtime through presence of important wildlife. The national scenic area (NSA) designation has the opposite effect on costs. If a site falls into this category, the log-costs per hectare are 69% lower. This effect might be the result of better access to scenic areas and overall better pre-restoration site conditions and management. Further work is required to understand the influence of this factor.
Site use
Like site designation, site use is a self-reported category, and each site could have several reported uses. The model results for each site use are interpreted as the effect of a particular reported site use, keeping all other reported site uses the same. Forestry reported as a site use dramatically increases restoration costs per hectare. On a hectare basis, sites that are used for grazing are cheaper to restore than those that are not used for this purpose, Figure 5.3. This is in line with ‘forest’ and ‘grassland’ peat condition categories discussed above (5.2.2.3). Although the effect is less certain (i.e., not significant), costs per hectare of sites self-reported as ‘field sports’ (i.e., shooting grouse) tend to be lower. We expect this is due to the good access on such sites.
Average rainfall
In general, sites with a greater average yearly rainfall rate are associated with lower cost per hectare. This could be due to various reasons, such as comparatively higher water tables that might imply healthier peatland and thus less complex restoration activities.
Figure 5.3: Factors and how they affect the costs of restoration.
Statistical model results: summary
The statistical model allows us to explain c.52% of the variation on per hectare peatland restoration costs.
Site location within restoration zones and specific categories of peat condition, site use and site designation are significant predictors of variation of costs per hectare of peatland restoration.
Of these factors, the geographical area that the site is in is the largest driver of cost per hectare with significantly greater values on the Isles, and significantly lower values for the Flow Country, after accounting for other factors.
Forestry, both as a site use and a peat condition category, has a strong effect on overall costs due to complexity of activities related to forest removal[9].
High levels of peatland erosion are linked with greater per hectare restoration costs.
Presence of floodplains/surface water on site, NSA designation and grazing, or peat covered by grassland all significantly reduce site restoration costs per hectare.
On average, larger sites have lower unit costs (£/ha) than smaller sites. We attribute this to a combination of economies of scale and a tendency for larger sites to be associated with relatively less complex and thus cheaper restoration activities.
Main limitations of the analysis
While the explanatory power of our analysis lies within expectations for this type of study, it is important to note sources of ‘noise’ and data uncertainty. Apart from potential issues with data entry and collation into the SRUC cost database, a major source of uncertainty is related to large variation in detail and rigour of reporting of the restoration process via application and reporting forms. Several reports are missing crucial details making them invalid for further analysis. It is important to point out that such issues primarily arise for older sites in the SRUC cost database, and that reporting forms have been adapted several times over the study period to accommodate insights as the PA program evolved within NatureScot.
Each PA project that has been granted funding by NatureScot can be identified via a grant reference number. Thus, the sites that have been restored within the same restoration grant share the same reference number. However, throughout the duration of restoration, the definitions of sites often change, in part reflecting adjustments to initial restoration plans made throughout a project. Differences concern both the number of sites within a grant, and the area of identified sites can both increase or decrease based on what is currently considered feasible/priority. Therefore, the information detailed in project application forms can only be compared to final forms if these changes were sufficiently documented. Likewise, it was sometimes not possible to link past restoration grants to more recent grants on a specific area of peat. We recommend using the same grant reference codes for additional funding or encoding previous grant codes into new grant reference codes so that previous funding can easily be traced back to new funding for the same overall restoration area.
Inconsistencies of grant reference numbers and site IDs between the SRUC cost database and PA spatial data meant that it was impossible to easily link spatial site outlines to the cost data base. Consequently, we manually “triangulated” matches between sites in the SRUC cost database and sites in the spatial data for restoration from NatureScot PA, which was both time consuming and without guarantee of being free of error.
Due to unavailability of geospatial data for all sites in the SRUC cost database considered for analysis, we assumed that each site was a circle of the reported restoration area around a central point which reduces accuracy. According to NatureScot, spatial data has now a site ID field and the final report document has also this site ID field with cost associated, which should facilitate similar analysis of variation in restoration cost per hectare in the future. Furthermore, moving to digital reporting so that spatial information and cost data can be entered into the same data portal may reduce errors in site identification and matching of cost and spatial data. Due to a lack of a standardised methodology for the calculation of a total area of a restoration site, over time of study (2018-2023) and across restoration sites in the SRUC cost database, the account of area restored provided in the reporting form can be only treated as approximate.
Sites for which the reported areas were missing, unclear or otherwise impossible to work with were removed from the analysis. The format in which the type, unit and (unit or total) cost of restoration measures is reported also varies as reporting forms were updated over the years; and depended on preferences and reporting efforts invested by grantees. For example, the installation of wave dams has been reported either as the total number of individual dams, the total length of all the drains that were dammed, or the total area covered by the specific type of dams. Wave dams also feature only in later editions of application and reporting forms. Such issues with reporting complicate measure-specific analysis of restoration cost. For example, differences in units in which measures are reported make judgment on measure intensity in a restoration site challenging if not impossible. A more technical description of the limitations in the analysis can be found in the Appendix A5.1.5. An account of challenges regarding information used for collating an earlier version of the SRUC cost database is also included in Glenk et al. (2022).
Conclusions
For costings of large-scale policy programmes, and in the absence of more robust alternatives, our model might be used to provide upper and lower bounds for restoration costs. The use of mostly spatially explicit variables in the statistical model facilitates extrapolation at larger scale. Accepting important caveats regarding the analysis (related e.g. to consistency of recording of cost within SRUC cost database and the proximate approach to deriving spatial variables from reported area), information on variation in unit cost could be combined with spatially explicit restoration pathways to derive baseline estimates of expected costs of large-scale policy implementation and related uncertainty. Such estimates could for example be combined with benefit estimates of peatland restoration in a cost-benefit analysis.
Statistically speaking, costs of restoration have not changed over time. The absence of such an observed time trend in restoration unit costs may simplify the use of unit costs as predicted by the model to future years.
Prior to extrapolation of unit cost estimates for large scale policy appraisal, further research is needed to assess the extent to which economies of scale are present. This could be combined with further efforts to improve confidence in the accuracy of reported costs and associated site characteristics.
Because of the great degree of variation and the relatively large degree of unexplained variation in unit costs, the statistical model should not be used for appraisal of individual projects (as opposed to large scale policy programmes). However, there are potential implications of the unexplained variability for the practice of using standardised costs to assessing projects and benchmarking. Given the large degree of unexplained variability, greater flexibility in appraisals of cost should be offered. In this regard, for example, our model points to a need for accommodating for larger costs on the Isles.
There has been great progress in harmonising cost and area reporting for projects, especially since 2019. Based on challenges in linking the SRUC cost database with spatial data on NatureScot Peatland ACTION administered projects for the study period, a review of the methodology for recording of the following data may prove useful. This recognises that much of the points below may already be in hand:
Costs: clear, separate categories for measure-related expenses and project management; costs identifiable at a site level and over time.
Site outlines: precise recording of site location and dimensions. Guidance for recording outlines and areas (e.g. distance buffers around areas where restoration measures are implemented) to record area impacted by restoration has been developed. It might be worth to review that guidance is implemented consistently and enforced for all projects by Peatland ACTION delivery partners.
Applied measures: unified accounting of units (i.e. length vs. number of dams).
Common and unified project and site identification: ensure that the system in place allows tracking of sites throughout project lifetime and beyond.
Also, compare the statistical results derived from NatureScot Peatland ACTION projects within the SRUC cost database to the estimates generated for projects administered by other delivery partners.
For example, CNPA uses a bottom-up approach that classifies peatland restoration needs and associated costs by complexity mapping based on aerial photography. A more detailed analysis of costs of delivery by Forestry and Land Scotland could provide additional insights into the economics of forest to bog restoration.
Verify reported area estimates in spatial data provided by NatureScot Peatland ACTION. Re-recording of site outlines (area restored/restoration footprint) on the ground should be considered and could be incentivised and/or organised via Peatland ACTION officers.
Opportunities and challenges for contractors delivering peatland restoration services
The rapid literature review (see 4.1.2) points to a knowledge gap about service providers implementing nature-based solutions. Our research partly addresses this gap with a focus on contractors of peatland restoration and their views and perceptions regarding business models, factors influencing decisions to tender and costing within tenders, and barriers and opportunities to scale business operations in the peatland restoration domain.
Methodological approach: contractor views
Eight interviews were conducted with contractors providing peatland restoration services in Scotland, primarily funded through NatureScot as the PA delivery partner (Table 6.1). Here, we define contractors as the company or individual enacting the peatland restoration. Details of the approach are given in Appendix B6, including the interview protocol (Table B6.2).
Interview notes and transcripts were reviewed to identify commonalities and points of difference in contractor perspectives of the tender process and wider factors affecting the industry. Findings are presented here around nine main themes: factors affecting tendering, alterations to tendering, costs, importance of business diversity to create resilience, consistency of funding and workflow, geographical area of work, recruitment and skills, training and increasing the restoration area.
Participants
Size
Medium
Large
Small
Medium
Small
Large
Medium
New Entrant
Region
Main-land National
Main-land National
Main-land NE
Main-land NW
Island
Main-land National
Main-land NW
Main-land NE
Number of Operators
9
28
5
8
5
No data
8
1
Number of Machines
9
25
11
9
6
No data
6
2
Table 6.1: Study participant overview. To maintain anonymity, we remove identifiers and randomise order of appearance in this table
Results of interview analysis
Factors affecting tendering
A wide range of considerations affecting the decision to tender were mentioned by participants, including
Ease of tendering, which determined whether contractors would tender or not. This applied mainly to smaller contractors
Current workload
Capacity, although this is increased by machinery hire or sub-contracting
The accessibility of site
Whether the operations matched their machinery portfolio
One large contractor does their own formal value for money assessment to decide whether it is worth tendering
Experience of the tendering process was commonly raised as an important factor affecting the decision to tender, in line with findings from the literature (Section 4.1.2). Contractors further highlighted a number of issues with the tendering process that were leading to frustration and could pose a barrier to expanding the industry. Decision makers in administrations involved in implementing peatland restoration have some control over shaping the tendering process, thus offering potential for operational adjustments.
Transparency of the process: Contractors highlighted a need for substantiated and clear feedback.
Timeframes: knowing what is happening when and sufficiently in advance.
Content of tenders was too involved.
Public contracts tendering was perceived by smaller contractors as onerous and not always concomitant to the scale of project.
Tendering is a non-productive aspect of a business that does not favour micro and small businesses. Several contractors perceived that the complexity of tendering is a barrier to smaller contractors entering the industry.
The time spent on tendering ranged from one to five days. Most contractors indicated that they spent several days working on each tender highlighting that tendering is a significant cost to be absorbed by businesses. Where contractors were very keen on a project, they would visit the site, therefore increasing their investment in, and commitment to, the site.
Tendering success was highly variable with smaller contractors often doing jobs not requiring a full tender process. Several contractors reported low success rates with a perception of time being wasted. One large contractor reported that their success rate was around one third. Two further (well experienced) contractors related that they had not won any “Peatland ACTION” work in the last year although they did work for SSE and FLS and had won PA contracts in the past. Contrastingly, one island-based contractor related that their success rate was near 100%. For those reporting low levels of success, this was understandably leading to frustration.
“Do I want to put good money and time toward chasing peatland action work? Right now we will dabble where we think it’s appropriate, but I’d rather put time and effort into chasing work that will actually go somewhere.” (A4)
Contractors generally regarded the tendering process as overly complex and inefficient, requiring a level of information which could be out of proportion to the value of contracts. A particular problem raised was a lack of standardisation in both the information requested and the format required between different organisations, which increased the amount of time required to respond to each. Even those contractors who had built capacity in tendering through dedicated staff perceived that the tendering process was unnecessarily complex; one highlighted that lack of standardisation was a problem as it increased the risk that key information would be missed; another considered that complexity was a barrier to smaller contractors wishing to enter the industry . Adding to frustration around low tendering success, some contractors perceived that there was insufficient feedback provided on why tenders had been unsuccessful. While feedback on relative pricing was provided, other factors used to discriminate between tenders were rarely communicated.
“You don’t even get feedback that you can work off because everybody just goes, [the winning bidder’s] technical submission was better, and you go well, what was better about it? And they go, I’ll need to get back to you. It’s not like there’s a matrix and they go well, here’s where the other person’s scored higher.” (A5)
A perceived lack of transparency in how tenders were awarded was a key concern for one contractor in particular who considered that tendering had become “closed book” and that “it seems to be a small handful of main players who will all the contracts”. Providing an example of where a contract had been awarded to a company closely connected to the commissioning organisation they also voiced concern that contracts appeared to be being awarded without being listed on Public Contracts Scotland (PCS).[10] These points were raised as breaches in what they considered should be a fair and transparent process to ensure fair allocation of public funds.
Contractors further related that the planning and timeframes for tenders were too often uncertain, which could lead to a “feast or famine” outcome. It was further highlighted that the current funding year had been particularly unusual.
“Due to the way in which projects are being assessed and funded by Scottish Government and Peatland Action, there has been a glut of tenders recently, so I’ve probably done in the space of two months, probably submitted about 24 jobs. And you know never in the history of my working life [have I] ever seen anything quite like it, you know, in terms of a glut of workload, of a single thing.” (A8)
Some contractors also indicated that they had begun bidding strategically to account for the risk that projects ultimately would not go ahead due to funding constraints. One larger contractor related that they ran their own value for money assessment to determine whether it was worth tendering. Another mid-sized contractor similarly indicated that they were starting to consider expected cost per hectare as a factor in their decision to bid for work.
Contractor views on alterations to tendering
Framework agreements were discussed as a potential means to reduce the volume of information in tender submissions. Although easier for the commissioning organisation as they only deal with one contractor, it was considered that the approach favours contractors who have the resources to tender well. One participant raised concern that this would lead to the dominance of larger contractors, leaving the smaller, less lucrative and active part of the contract to be subcontracted to smaller contractors. Although the framework provides a simplified approach, they considered that work could be done at lower cost by directly contracting smaller contractors.
A common view amongst contractors was that restoration work should support the local economy.
“I think it’s only right if the Lewis people get the Lewis work and the Skye people get the Skye work providing they’re doing it at competitive rates” (A7)
Linked to this, one mid-sized contractor questioned whether smaller contracts could be tendered on a different basis, and offered to local contractors first as a means of developing local capacity.
“I know when we were starting up these small jobs were great for us and we even picked up a lot of like ten, twenty grand AECS schemes and they were brilliant for us and they helped us get our feet and learning how to tender for bigger work.” (A4)
A similar view was given by a larger contractor who questioned whether it may be possible to differentiate tenders and make it easier for smaller contractors to bid for the smaller jobs and allow the larger contractors to take larger jobs.
Wishing to highlight a positive example, one contractor pointed to Bidwells as an example of an efficient tender process that was easy to understand and provided a good mapping system. Another contractor similarly praised Bidwells’ efforts to streamline the tender process by maintaining key contractor information on file, reducing the volume of information that must be submitted with each tender.
Risk factors and costs
The key risk factors affecting cost quoted by participants were:
Difficulty and distance of site access: distance and accessibility affect costs in terms of additional travel time, machinery breakages and increased risk.
Winter risk, flooding and snow restrict access to sites, potentially stranding machines or requiring premature mobilisation from sites.
Activities: damming and ditch blocking were assessed as relatively straightforward to estimate, whereas hag- reprofiling was considered to be more variable.
Contractors further referred to rising costs of machinery, and wages as future drivers of costs.
Importance of business diversity to create resilience
To survive in what potentially is an uncertain environment of peatland restoration and funding, most businesses had a reasonably diversified business model, not relying too heavily on peatland restoration. Two contractors indicated that they were quite specialised, with peatland restoration accounting for more than 80% of their turnover. In some cases, they reviewed their exposure to risk and considered reducing reliance on peatland restoration. Reducing the exposure to risk from peatland contracts included working with utilities, civil engineering (dualling of the A9), estate access, hydro-schemes, footpaths, fencing, dykeing and tree planting. Many of these alternatives are easier to implement, provide more certain longer-term work, reduced risk, with less travelling and reduced ongoing costs.
Consistency of funding and workflow
Consistency of commitment to funding was important for all the contractors. Prior blips in funding reduced confidence in the industry and ultimately the amount of time committed to peatland restoration. Planning, timelines and long-term contracts could all be improved to provide a more continuous flow of work. Multiyear funding was appreciated but it was felt this needed to be more co-ordinated to create a rolling programme of work for both large and small sites.
Although progress has been made in some areas with more summer restoration, the summer gap and down time reduces the amount of restoration completed. Some contractors considered the summer gap as positive, as it gave operators a break and change of scene to alleviate the monotony of peatland restoration.
Improving the diversity of funding was considered a good idea to reduce reliance on Government funding. If Government funding was to be reduced in the future it was suggested to apply gradual tapering rather than the sudden drop that many contractors experienced when the renewable obligation was suddenly stopped for windfarm construction.
Although a few years away, an early indication of the Scottish Governments long term strategy for funding restoration post 2030 would be appreciated to signal long-term commitment to the sector.
Geographical area of work
Most contractors were willing to travel, with some Scotland based contractors working in Ireland and England. The reasons for the travel were partially to diversify the business and provide new experiences for the business and operators. Most businesses preferred to work in their local area, but inevitably not all operatives could find housing near the business base and had to travel anyway. In some cases, contractors may drive up to an hour from their home base, followed by another ½ hour transiting to the sites via an access track. Finding suitable accommodation for staff is an issue in some cases.
Recruitment and skills
Contractors highlighted the importance of rural skills for working on peatlands efficiently. A key requirement voiced by contractors was the ability to ‘read the landscape and the conditions’. Technical skills in operating diggers and machinery were important, but not as critical as knowing how to move the machine on soft ground which was harder to come by and essential to avoid accidents and bogging. Ideal candidates for recruitment were those with hill experience; “farm kids” (A1) or “ex shepherds, stalkers and gamekeepers [who have] been on the hill most of their lives” (A3).
Fortunately, in terms of operator skills it was considered that due to the video gaming industry there were plenty of competent young people who could quickly learn how to operate diggers, and this aspect is not a problem for the businesses. The key issue requiring training was once on site and reading the landscape, which requires time and perseverance.
Retention of staff, particularly younger members present problems with staff leaving for less repetitive jobs or easier working conditions in civil engineering. Businesses try to combat this by offering variability of work and location, or through benefits such as a four- day week.
It was acknowledged that a wider range of skills is now requested of operators, principally mapping and GIS skills. In the case of smaller businesses this presented problems adding to workloads and need for upskilling. One large contractor questioned whether placing additional demands on operators was the most effective way to monitor work, believing that measurement could be undertaken more efficiently by a dedicated third party. Other (typically mid-sized and larger) contractors indicated that they had invested in IT and mapping capabilities.
Peatland ACTION funded training and apprenticeships were being used and appreciated.
Increasing and using restoration capacity
In circumstances where contractors perceived there to be a funding cut, they were not considering increasing their capacity. It was accepted that over time the amount of available work would increase. Using current capacity more efficiently was the approach being taken. Most contractors did not see evidence of additional work coming forward.[11] The issue for increasing the area restored was not related to capacity.
Current capacity is underutilised due to:
Uncertainty of funding, leading to contractors looking for other work to reduce risk.
Poor work stream planning that leads to uncertainty and reduces contractor ability to plan and expand operations.
A hiatus in contract confirmation after end of March which leads to bunching of contracts, reducing capability to complete within a given timescale.
Summer working with long daylight would utilise the current capacity to restore substantially more hectares. Breeding birds are the main factor reducing or stopping restoration through the summer. Generally, restrictions on estates regards stalking seasons is now less of a problem as it is understood that by good planning both operations can coexist.
Some contractors were aware that the Peatland Code and collection of information was delaying contracts and made planning more difficult.
Conclusions
Combining the results from the data analysis and the interviews, we can draw the following conclusions on the questions posed by this research.
The interviews with contractors offer insight into the industry’s views and perceptions regarding the tendering process and further engagement with peatland restoration as a business opportunity. Below is a synthesis of findings and options that may help address identified issues.
Confidence in future funding is critical for contractors working in the industry. Unexpected reductions in funding reduce contractor confidence and may deter investment. Therefore, funding should ideally be consistent within years, based on a long-term commitment to peatland restoration post 2030 that reflects the importance of restoration to address the twin climate and biodiversity crises. Interest and trust between funder and contractors may also be strengthened if information on how peatland restoration is funded post 2030 involved contractors at a very early stage.
The tender process and its transparency were factors that concerned all contractors. Current tendering processes were considered to favour larger contractors with specific staff to respond to tenders. The amount of information required, whether the information was used and the ability to receive meaningful feedback were all factors affecting contractors’ willingness to tender. A review of tenders and information required and how that is achieved would encourage a wider range of contractors to engage and tender. Such a review may focus on simplification and proportionality. Consideration might be given to whether basic tendering information could be submitted on an annual (rather than project) basis to stop repetition of effort. A review might also include guidelines for providing substantiated post tender feedback, as several respondents were unclear on how to improve future tenders. Improved feedback could lead to less contractor comeback and a greater willingness to tender.
Underlying the contractor conversations was that they seek to provide good value for money whilst making a profit in a highly variable environment. All the contractors interviewed valued their reputation and wanted to produce quality restoration. Clearly, tendering requires a balance between bureaucracy and accountability. However, a degree of pragmatism is necessary in light of the urgency for action to counter the twin climate and biodiversity crises. Consequently, the amount of information required as part of the tendering process should ideally be concomitant to the scale of work.
Access to sites was seen as a key factor influencing the decision to tender (and also the cost of restoration). Poor and long-distance access increases both costs and risk. The purchase of specialised machinery to carry crews to the work site is required and the additional transit time reduces the length of the working day. In addition, poor and rough access results in machinery breakage and costly down time. To improve access conditions, in future any access granted under planning permission could allow for neighbours to use the access for the purposes of land management. There are cases of adjacent road standard tracks to sites that could not be used as they were on neighbouring land. Further considerations might include improving affordable rural housing to increase rural workers and reduce unsustainable travelling.
Concerns were raised about consistency of funding and projects across the year. Peatland restoration generally has a short window of operation in the autumn, winter and early spring. This is further shortened due to heavy snow. Historical and current precedents of cuts in funding have made contractors very wary. Contractors suggested that diversified funding may help this situation. In response to this, options to assist contractors should be explored to identify and pursue diversified funding sources to reduce risk and increase contractor confidence.
One opportunity to diversify funding sources lies in improved coordination of environmental projects. Currently there appears little or no coordination of environmental projects. With coordination, peatland restoration contracts could seamlessly run into river restoration contracts. Likewise, Scottish Water have many long-term infrastructure projects that could fill gaps in contractor work. Thus, a more continuous flow of conservation work could be achieved through improved planning and coordination of work across the land-based sector to better integrate peatland restoration contracts with, for example, river restoration and Scottish Water projects.
Anecdotal evidence suggests that birds are less disturbed by consistent on-site presence than is recorded in scientific literature. A review of bird disturbance policy based on scientific evidence may thus help reducing down time and reducing uncertainty when tendering. To further reduce perceived uncertainty for contractors, low altitude contracts might be retained to cover periods of long-lasting snow.
To stimulate investment, there is potential for interest free government backed loans for startups/early growth businesses. Consistency of projects would enable more assured payback of finance. In this regard, it might be worth to explore suitability of existing schemes and further opportunities to ease access to interest free government backed loans for startups/early growth.
Training and apprenticeships for delivery of restoration works are of high value to individuals and businesses interested in entering the market, and should continue to be financially supported.
Conclusions
The research findings presented in this report reflect a rapid synthesis of the literature and our research team’s own expertise plus statistical analysis of cost data compiled from NatureScot administered Peatland ACTION (PA) projects and qualitive interviews with peatland restoration contractors. We have identified a multitude of factors affecting peatland restoration costs and contractors’ decisions to tender for restoration work.
Whilst information on peatland restoration costs is available for NatureScot projects funded through the PA programme, the causes of apparent variation in costs have not yet been analysed systematically. Our statistical model, combining cost data with project site characteristics, is able to explain c.52% of observed variation. This is in-line with attempts to model cost variation in analogous sectors (e.g. other ecosystem restoration, landscaping).
Our analysis does not identify a time trend, but highlights that there are regional differences in cost, with higher costs to be expected for the Isles. Site features indicating greater complexity of restoration action, such as forest land cover and high levels of erosion, are associated with greater restoration cost. While restoration cost per hectare decreases as size of restored sites increases, our data does not allow us to fully and causally attribute this effect to economies of scale alone. This requires further investigation.
Overall, our analysis points to a need to recognise that there is large degree of unexplained variation in unit costs while unit costs vary considerably across sites in our data. This has implications for the relevance of standardisation in assessing projects and developing benchmarking of costings. For example, regional differences imply that uniform national rates might be inappropriate, while large residual uncertainty regarding unit costs would increase the risk of falsely rejecting projects that in fact deliver restoration cost-effectively.
However, although unexplained variation in costs may reflect genuine unobserved causes, our analysis was also hampered by several potential data imperfections. For example, the precise shape and size of individual projects is subject to some uncertainty, which may lead to errors in characterising sites. Equally, across the study period (2018-2023), categorisation of different types of cost is not necessarily consistent across all projects nor are different phases of the same project necessarily recorded consistently across different funding periods. Efforts to improve data quality have already been instigated. Nevertheless, it might be worth to clarify inconsistencies in older data, and confirm that harmonised data collection (site specific data on activities, cost, location, area, consistently recorded over time) is in place to improve the accuracy of future analysis.
Contractors are service providers who implement restoration work on the ground. The quality of their work is therefore key to restoration success. Despite their important role in the restoration process, there is a paucity of literature on motivations and barriers to contractors to tender for and enter ecosystem restoration work (including peatland restoration), and on factors that affect costs and long-term viability of restoration work to businesses. We interviewed contractors of different size and varying geographical range of operation. We identify recommendations that will affect cost and quality of delivery and thus enhance value for money of peatland restoration delivery in Scotland.
Specifically, we point to a need for a streamlined tendering process that is simplified and proportionate to scale of work, and that provides meaningful post-tender feedback. Fostering reliable and strong relationships with contractors is important, as is mitigation of short-term (e.g. mitigating risk of interruptions to work) and longer-term (e.g. related to funding situation) business risks. Cash flow availability might be improved through more efficient processing of payments to contractors, although delays may be caused by agents and not the funding institutions (PA delivery partners). Business risk may also be reduced through offering opportunities to diversify funding sources, for example via improved planning and coordination of work across the land-based sector. Training opportunities are appreciated, but barriers to entering peatland restoration as a service provider would benefit from enhanced support for start-up, both in terms of e.g. interest free capital provision and tailored advisory support.
All of the above aspects affect costs and quality and thus value for money of peatland restoration delivery. A revision of the modus to deliver peatland restoration using public funds across Scotland should be embedded in a long-term commitment to peatland restoration post 2030 to attract investment and offer business perspective. Such a commitment to consistency of funding is needed to reflect the importance of peatland restoration to a world experiencing twin climate and biodiversity crises.
Acknowledgements
We like to thank the study participants for offering their time and valuable insights. We also thank the members of the project steering group for input throughout the project. Further, we would like to acknowledge the Peatland ACTION Data & Evidence team and the Peatland ACTION Funding team at NatureScot for their active support of this work. The collation and preparation of peatland restoration cost data for use in the analysis presented in Section 5 of this report was support of the Scottish Government, as part of the Environment, Natural Resources and Agriculture (ENRA) Strategic Research Programme 2022-2027, project JHI-D3-2 CentrePeat; and the project Wet Horizons (Horizon Europe GAP-101056848).
References
AECOM. 2024a. Spon’s Civil Engineering and Highway Works Price Book 2024. CRC Press.
AECOM. 2024b. Spon’s External Works and Landscape Price Book 2024. CRC Press.
Aitkenhead, M., Castellazzi, M., McKeen, M., Hare, M., Artz, R., & Reed, M. (2021). Peatland restoration and potential emissions savings on agricultural land: an evidence assessment. The James Hutton Institute.
Armsworth, P. R., Jackson, H. B., Cho, S. H., Clark, M., Fargione, J. E., Iacona, G. D., & Sutton, N. A. (2018). Is conservation right to go big? Protected area size and conservation return-on-investment. Biological Conservation, 225, 229-236.
Artz, R., Faccioli, M., Roberts, M. & Anderson, R. (2018) Peatland restoration – a comparative analysis of the costs and merits of different restoration methods. Climate Exchange Report.
Artz, R., Ball, J., Gimona, A., Blake, D., McBride, A., & Heritage, S. N. (2019). Access to Peatland for Restoration–physical limitations. ClimateXChange Report, 8pp.
Artz, R., Johnson, S., Bruneau, P., Britton, A. J., Mitchell, R. J., Ross, L., … & Poggio, L. (2019). The potential for modelling peatland habitat condition in Scotland using long-term MODIS data. Science of the Total Environment, 660, 429-442.
Artz, R., Coyle, M., Donaldson-Selby, G., Cooksley, S., Gimona, A., Pakeman, R., & Hare, M. (2023). Scoping a national peatland monitoring framework.
Benjaminsson, F., Kronholm, T. and Erlandsson, E., (2019). A framework for characterizing business models applied by forestry service contractors. Scandinavian Journal of Forest Research, 34(8), pp.779-788.
Binshakir, O., AlGhanim, L., Fathaq, A., Al Harith, A.M., Ahmed, S. and El-Sayegh, S., (2023)(. Factors Affecting the Bidding Decision in Sustainable Construction. Sustainability, 15(19), p.14225.
Cho, S.-H., Kim, T., Larson, E.R., Armsworth, P.R., (2017). Economies of scale in forestland acquisition costs for nature conservation. Forest Policy Econ. 75, 73–82
Burkhalter, J. C., Lockwood, J. L., Maslo, B., Fenn, K. H., & Leu, K. (2016). Effects of cost metric on cost‐effectiveness of protected‐area network design in urban landscapes. Conservation Biology, 30(2), 403-412.
Babcock, B. A., Lakshminarayan, P. G., Wu, J., & Zilberman, D. (1997). Targeting tools for the purchase of environmental amenities. Land economics, 325-339.
Cohan, S., (2018). Business Principles for Landscape Contracting. Routledge.
Cook, C. N., Pullin, A. S., Sutherland, W. J., Stewart, G. B., & Carrasco, L. R. (2017). Considering cost alongside the effectiveness of management in evidence-based conservation: A systematic reporting protocol. Biological Conservation, 209, 508-516.
Engert, J.E., Laurance, S.G.W. (2023). Economics and optics influence funding for ecological restoration in a nation-wide program. Environmental Research Letters 18 (5), 054020.
Field, C.R., Elphick, C.S., (2019). Quantifying the return on investment of social and ecological data for conservation planning. Environmental Research Letters 14, 124081. IOP Publishing.
Glenk, K. Novo, P., Roberts, M., Sposato, M., Martin-Ortega, J., Shirkhorshidi, M., Potts, J. (2020). The costs of peatland restoration. Analysis of an evolving database based on the Peatland Action Programme in Scotland. SEFARI report
Glenk, K., Sposato, M., Novo, P., Martin-Ortega, J., Shirkhorshidi, M. (2021). The costs of peatland restoration – March 2021 update on database based on the Peatland Action Programme in Scotland. SEFARI report.
Glenk, K., Sposato, M., Novo, P., Martin-Ortega, J., Roberts, M., Gurd, J., Shirkhorshidi, M. (2022). The costs of peatland restoration revisited. March 2022 update on database based on the Peatland Action Programme in Scotland. SEFARI report.
de Groot, R., Blignaut, J., van der Ploeg, S., Aronson, J., Elmqvist, T., & Farley, J. (2013). Benefits of Investing in Ecosystem Restoration. Conservation Biology, 1286-1293
Iacona, G. D., Sutherland, W. J., Mappin, B., Adams, V. M., Armsworth, P. R., Coleshaw, T., & Possingham, H. P. (2018). Standardized reporting of the costs of management interventions for biodiversity conservation. Conservation Biology, 32(5), 979-988.
Johansson, M., Erlandsson, E., Kronholm, T. and Lindroos, O., (2023). The need for flexibility in forest harvesting services–a case study on contractors’ workflow variations. International Journal of Forest Engineering, 34(1), pp.13-25.
Keating, K., Pettit, A. and Rose, S. (2015). Cost estimation for habitat creation -summary of evidence. Environment Agency.
King, D. and Bohlen, C., (1995). The cost of wetland creation and restoration. Final report (No. DOE/MT/92006-9). Maryland University., Solomons, MD (United States).
Knight, M.L. and Overbeck, G.E., (2021). How much does it cost to restore a grassland? Restoration Ecology, 29(8), p.e13463.
Kronholm, T., Larsson, I. and Erlandsson, E., (2021). Characterization of forestry contractors’ business models and profitability in Northern Sweden. Scandinavian Journal of Forest Research, 36(6), pp.491-501.
Macfarlane, F., Robb, C., Coull, M., Mckeen, M., Wardell-Johnson, D., Miller, D., Parker, T., Artz, R., Matthews, K., Aitkenhead, M., (2024). A deep learning approach for high-resolution mapping of Scottish peatland degradation. European Journal of Soil Science, 75, 10.1111/ejss.13538.
Minasny, B., Adetsu, D. V., Aitkenhead, M., Artz, R. R., Baggaley, N., Barthelmes, A., … & Zak, D., (2024). Mapping and monitoring peatland conditions from global to field scale. Biogeochemistry, 167(4), 383-425.
Naidoo, R., Balmford, A., Ferraro, P. J., Polasky, S., Ricketts, T. H., & Rouget, M. (2006). Integrating economic costs into conservation planning. Trends in ecology & evolution, 21(12), 681-687.
Okumah, M., Walker, C., Martin-Ortega, J., Ferré, M., Glenk, K. & Novo, P. (2019). How much does peatland restoration cost? Insights from the UK. University of Leeds – SRUC Report.
Olatunji, O.A., Ramanayaka, C.D.E., Rotimi, F.E. and Rotimi, J.O.B., (2023). Analysis of contractors’ administrative characteristics in bid decision factors. Engineering, Construction and Architectural Management, 30(6), pp.2420-2435.
Oo, B.L., Lim, T.H.B. and Runeson, G., (2022). Critical factors affecting contractors’ decision to bid: a global perspective. Buildings, 12(3), p.379.
Perhans, K., Kindstrand, C., Boman, M., Djupström, L.B., Gustafsson, L., Mattsson, L., Schroeder, L.M., Weslien, J., Wikberg, S., (2008). Conservation goals and the relative importance of costs and benefits in reserve selection. Conservation Biology, 22, 1331–1339
Rodewald, A. D., Strimas-Mackey, M., Schuster, R., & Arcese, P. (2019). Tradeoffs in the value of biodiversity feature and cost data in conservation prioritization. Scientific reports, 9(1), 15921.
Sewell, A., Bouma, J., and van der Esch, S (2016) Investigating the challenges and opportunities for scaling up Ecosystem Restoration, The Hague: PBL Netherlands Environmental Assessment Agency
Spencer, J.A., (1989). Relationship between landscape architects and landscape contractors: real vs. ideal. The University of Arizona.
Van Deynze, B., Fonner, R., Feist, B. E., Jardine, S. L., & Holland, D. S., (2022). What influences spatial variability in restoration costs? Econometric cost models for inference and prediction in restoration planning. Biological Conservation, 274, 109710.
Zentner, J., Glaspy, J. and Schenk, D., (2003). Wetland and riparian woodland restoration costs. Ecological Restoration, 21(3), pp.166-173.
Appendices
Appendix A4 Factors affecting restoration – review and synthesis
Web search terms concerning cost-effectiveness of peatland restoration
(“restoration” OR ”nature-based solution*”) AND (“cost-effectiveness” OR “cost*”)
Web of Science Search 1: broad peatland terms, contactor terms narrowed
Peatland Terms
TS = (peat OR peatland OR bog OR restoration OR rewetting OR “ecosystem restoration” OR “nature- based” OR “nature based”) AND
Contractor Terms
TS = (contractor OR supplier OR worker OR workforce) AND NOT
AND NOT (Non- OECD Countries)
TS = (“Afghanistan” OR “Albania” OR “Algeria” OR “American Samoa” OR “Angola” OR “Argentina” OR “Armenia” OR “Azerbaijan” OR “Bangladesh” OR “Barbados” OR “Belarus” OR “Belize” OR “Benin” Or “Bhutan” OR “Bolivia” OR “Bosnia and Herzegovina” OR “Botswana” OR “Brazil” OR “Bulgaria” OR “Burkina Faso” OR “Burundi” OR “Cambodia” OR “Cameroon” OR “Cape Verde” OR “Central African Republic” OR “Chad” OR “Chile” OR “China” OR “Colombia” OR “Comoros Congo” OR “Democratic Republic Congo” OR “Republic Costa Rica” OR “Côte d’Ivoire” OR “Croatia” OR “Cuba” OR “Czech Republic” OR “Djibouti Dominica” OR “Dominican Republic” OR “Ecuador” OR “Egypt” OR “Arab Republic” OR “El Salvador” OR “Equatorial Guinea” OR “Eritrea” OR “Estonia” OR “Ethiopia” OR “Fiji” OR “Gabon” OR “Gambia” OR “Georgia” OR “Ghana” OR “Grenada” OR “Guatemala” OR “Guinea” OR “Guinea-Bissau” OR “Guyana” OR “Haiti” OR “Honduras” OR “Hungary” OR “India” OR “Indonesia” OR “Iran” OR “Islamic Republic” OR “Iraq” OR “Jamaica” OR “Jordan” OR “Kazakhstan” OR “Kenya” OR “Kiribati” OR “Korea Democratic Republic” OR “Kyrgyz Republic” OR “Lao PDR” OR “Latvia” OR “Lebanon” OR “Lesotho” OR “Liberia” OR “Libya” OR “Lithuania” OR “Macedonia FYR” OR “Madagascar” OR “Malawi” OR “Malaysia” OR “Maldives” OR “Mali” OR “Marshall Islands” OR “Mauritania” OR “Mauritius” OR “Mayotte” OR “Mexico” OR “Micronesia” OR “Moldova” OR “Mongolia” OR “Morocco” OR “Mozambique” OR “Myanmar” OR “Namibia” OR “Nepal” OR “Nicaragua” OR “Niger” OR “Nigeria” OR “Mariana Islands” OR “Oman” OR “Pakistan” OR “Palau” OR “Panama” OR “Papua New Guinea” OR “Paraguay” OR “Peru” OR “Philippines” OR “Poland” OR “Romania” OR Russia* OR “Rwanda” OR “Samoa” OR “Sao Tome and Principe” OR “Senegal” OR “Serbia” OR “Montenegro” OR “Seychelles” OR “Sierra Leone” OR “Slovak Republic” OR “Solomon Islands” OR “Somalia” OR “South Africa” OR “Sri Lanka” OR “St. Kitts and Nevis” OR “St. Lucia” OR “St. Vincent and the Grenadines” OR “Sudan” OR “Suriname” OR “Swaziland” OR “Syrian Arab” OR “Republic Tajikistan” OR “Tanzania” OR “Thailand” OR “Timor-Leste” OR “Togo” OR “Tonga” OR “Trinidad and Tobago” OR “Tunisia” OR “Turkey” OR “Turkmenistan” OR “Uganda” OR “Ukraine” OR “Uruguay” OR “Uzbekistan” OR “Vanuatu” OR “Venezuela” OR “Vietnam” OR “West Bank” OR “Gaza” OR “Yemen” OR “Republic Zambia” OR “Zimbabwe”)
Web of Science Search 2: broad contractor terms, peatland terms narrowed
Peatland Terms
TS = (peat OR peatland OR bog OR rewetting) AND
Contractor Terms
TS = (contractor OR supplier OR worker OR workforce OR skill* OR labour OR training) AND NOT
AND NOT (Non- OECD Countries)
TS = (“Afghanistan” OR “Albania” OR “Algeria” OR “American Samoa” OR “Angola” OR “Argentina” OR “Armenia” OR “Azerbaijan” OR “Bangladesh” OR “Barbados” OR “Belarus” OR “Belize” OR “Benin” Or “Bhutan” OR “Bolivia” OR “Bosnia and Herzegovina” OR “Botswana” OR “Brazil” OR “Bulgaria” OR “Burkina Faso” OR “Burundi” OR “Cambodia” OR “Cameroon” OR “Cape Verde” OR “Central African Republic” OR “Chad” OR “Chile” OR “China” OR “Colombia” OR “Comoros Congo” OR “Democratic Republic Congo” OR “Republic Costa Rica” OR “Côte d’Ivoire” OR “Croatia” OR “Cuba” OR “Czech Republic” OR “Djibouti Dominica” OR “Dominican Republic” OR “Ecuador” OR “Egypt” OR “Arab Republic” OR “El Salvador” OR “Equatorial Guinea” OR “Eritrea” OR “Estonia” OR “Ethiopia” OR “Fiji” OR “Gabon” OR “Gambia” OR “Georgia” OR “Ghana” OR “Grenada” OR “Guatemala” OR “Guinea” OR “Guinea-Bissau” OR “Guyana” OR “Haiti” OR “Honduras” OR “Hungary” OR “India” OR “Indonesia” OR “Iran” OR “Islamic Republic” OR “Iraq” OR “Jamaica” OR “Jordan” OR “Kazakhstan” OR “Kenya” OR “Kiribati” OR “Korea Democratic Republic” OR “Kyrgyz Republic” OR “Lao PDR” OR “Latvia” OR “Lebanon” OR “Lesotho” OR “Liberia” OR “Libya” OR “Lithuania” OR “Macedonia FYR” OR “Madagascar” OR “Malawi” OR “Malaysia” OR “Maldives” OR “Mali” OR “Marshall Islands” OR “Mauritania” OR “Mauritius” OR “Mayotte” OR “Mexico” OR “Micronesia” OR “Moldova” OR “Mongolia” OR “Morocco” OR “Mozambique” OR “Myanmar” OR “Namibia” OR “Nepal” OR “Nicaragua” OR “Niger” OR “Nigeria” OR “Mariana Islands” OR “Oman” OR “Pakistan” OR “Palau” OR “Panama” OR “Papua New Guinea” OR “Paraguay” OR “Peru” OR “Philippines” OR “Poland” OR “Romania” OR Russia* OR “Rwanda” OR “Samoa” OR “Sao Tome and Principe” OR “Senegal” OR “Serbia” OR “Montenegro” OR “Seychelles” OR “Sierra Leone” OR “Slovak Republic” OR “Solomon Islands” OR “Somalia” OR “South Africa” OR “Sri Lanka” OR “St. Kitts and Nevis” OR “St. Lucia” OR “St. Vincent and the Grenadines” OR “Sudan” OR “Suriname” OR “Swaziland” OR “Syrian Arab” OR “Republic Tajikistan” OR “Tanzania” OR “Thailand” OR “Timor-Leste” OR “Togo” OR “Tonga” OR “Trinidad and Tobago” OR “Tunisia” OR “Turkey” OR “Turkmenistan” OR “Uganda” OR “Ukraine” OR “Uruguay” OR “Uzbekistan” OR “Vanuatu” OR “Venezuela” OR “Vietnam” OR “West Bank” OR “Gaza” OR “Yemen” OR “Republic Zambia” OR “Zimbabwe”)
Table A4.1: Web of Science Search Terms. Results were supplemented by forward and backward tracing of citations plus the research team’s prior knowledge of relevant references.
#
Factors
Description
Tendering process
1
Client
Type of client, payment attitude, history and reputation may impact cost and whether to bid for job
2
Ease of procurement process
Information availability and data recording requirements and length of process may impact cost and whether to bid for job
3
Expected competition
Depending on degree of (expected) competition and overall availability of (peatland or other substitute) work; can affect decision to opt out of tendering
4
Additional benefits to contractor
For example advertisement through open day, enhancing reputation and bringing in additional work through networking; may impact cost and willingness to tender
5
Amount of other (substitute) work available
May affect keenness to tender but also how challenges regarding scheduling and timing of work are costed
General project characteristics
5
Project duration
Longer project durations offer income stability and are thus considered better; increased flexibility in allocating work may reduce cost
6
Scale of project
Larger projects offer greater, more reliable work and opportunities for reducing mobilisation costs if have machines and operators available
7
Type and size of land ownership (including crofts and common grazing)
Small land ownership may be associated with more costly implementation that are not easy to mitigate (e.g. access and need for taking apportionment to enable restoration on commons). However, usually if such projects advance to tender stage, most problems have been sorted out Larger land ownership (e.g. estates) may initially offer opportunities for restoring some land at no or low opportunity cost (in terms of income forgone). Depending on type of business and business objectives, scaling of restoration within large land ownerships may be associated with increasing opportunity costs. This may, however, not affect costs of implementing restoration action.
8
Current land use on peatland to be restored and surrounding holding
Restoration costs can be affected if land use is in conflict with peatland restoration and thus there is a need for mitigation (e.g. keeping grazing activity at minimum). In some cases (e.g. grouse shooting) mitigation depends on timing of work
9
Stocking density of deer and livestock in area
Similar to #8, mitigation through keeping grazing at minimum may come at extra cost. Regarding livestock, this also depends on need for fencing and the availability of existing facilities to keep livestock off restoring land
Site location dependent factors
facilities
10
Need for overnight accommodation
Could instantly make tendering unviable if, for example, restoration is planned for an island location with an available onsite contractor; else can be mitigated easily in most cases and factored into higher costs
11
Distance from operator base
This may affect daily travel costs, and mobilisation cost; can be mitigated by longer daily hours (e.g. 10hr working days) though this may have cost implications (as #10 above)
12
Need for on-site welfare facilities
Costed in and usually quite consistent between contractors
access conditions
13
Challenges to access through presence of utilities, powerlines gas pipes and cables
More difficult access due to presence of utilities, powerlines gas pipes and cables can be associated with higher cost. However, typically not a problem, can be easily mitigated
14
Challenges to access through geographical location of site
If a site is very narrow, steep and/or cut off by watercourses, this complicates access; more difficult access can be associated with higher cost.
15
Challenges to access through site condition
Access to work location on a site, in terms of the length of the daily drive in to the work location, can be affected by overall site condition; more difficult access can be associated with higher cost
16
Site wetness
Special case of #15. If sites are very wet, this may imply a need for bog mats or more specialised LGP machines, adding to costs
17
Potential flooding due to fords
Adds to risk of operation and may be added to tender cost
18
Challenges to access due to adverse weather conditions (snow, storm)
Adds to risk of operation and may be added to tender cost as contingency; length of snow free period may affect timing of operations and affect cost depending on availability of other work
19
Presence of (ground nesting) breeding birds and protected species
May delay implementation and complicate scheduling of work; could be added to tender as contingency
20
Challenges to access due to prevailing weather conditions
Depending on the conditions of a site, a contingency can be added to tender/costs to account for prevailing weather conditions (e.g. very wet conditions)
21
Site use by public (e.g. for recreation)
May affect access but typically not a problem
22
Archaeological Restrictions
May affect access but typically not a problem if considered at feasibility study or project approval stage
23
Concerns about security of site
Additional costs for security and potential loss
24
Health and Safety risk of bogging
This could be considered an added risk with contingency added to tender. However, it is in practice not considered a problem
25
Restrictions on Access: Stalking/Shooting
Similar to #8. Could affect timing of work and cost depending on availability of other work
26
Site designations
Could affect access cost but typically not a problem as agreements regarding site designations are usually sorted before tender
site characteristics
27
Altitude
High altitude sites tend to be less easily accessible. This can affect cost, through impact on general accessibility, daily travel costs (see #11), mobilisation costs, but also #18: length of snow free periods
28
Slope
Restoration of sites on steep slopes may affect cost through additional time for restoration in challenging terrain
29
Exposure
May be linked to #18 (adverse weather conditions) and #20 (prevailing weather conditions)
Site peatland condition factors
30
Complexity – Degree of erosion
May affect cost through additional time for restoration in challenging terrain; bare peat areas may require stabilisation which can be very time consuming
31
Complexity – Density of drains and gullies
May affect cost through additional time for restoration for greater densities of drains and gullies
32
Complexity – Depth of hags
Relates to #30; may affect cost through additional time for restoration in challenging terrain
33
Availability of sphagnum for reseeding
Relates to #30; and the availability of sphagnum areas that can be used for reseeding (available on site or need to import to site); easier accessibility of sphagnum for reseeding is associated with relatively lower cost
34
Complexity – Slope and hydrological connectivity – required density of dams
Relates to #28 and #31; greater slopes may require a greater density of dams. Can affect cost through increased need for material (dams) and/or work/time to install dams
35
Vegetation cover – forest
Vegetation cover may have to be removed; for forests this implies harvesting of stands, and possibly removal of stumps and brush. Removal may come at a net cost. Biomass may be mulched which may add to costs
36
Vegetation cover – shrubs
Similar to #35; depends on height/thickness/density of shrub; mulching may add costs
Table A4.2: Potential factors affecting cost per hectare of peatland restoration across sites and at a given point in time.
#
Factor
Description
1
Inflation e.g. rising wages and fuel prices
Inflation increases nominal cost over time, that is, prices for goods and services paid in a market over time. However, theoretically inflation should per se not affect real costs over time if nominal prices are adjusted for inflation. In practice, companies might add a mark up to, for example, account for risks associated with inflation. Moreover, adjustments to costs and to funding are not necessarily simultaneous nor made on the same basis, meaning that they can become misaligned. Identifying the correct rate of adjustment may be challenging. Appropriate indices may be price indices for labour and energy use in agriculture and forestry, rather than more generic consumer price indices.
2
Technological Innovation: new technologies
Innovation can lead to solutions that allow providing the same service at lower cost, or more of a service for a given budget. In the case of peatland restoration, there have been improvements over time through learning-by-doing and research into materials and approaches. e.g. construction of dams, reprofiling techniques, revegetation methods
3
Overall contractor skills and experience
Peatland restoration undertaken with the aid of heavy machinery differs markedly in the requirements for the machine operators compared to other jobs involving earth movement. Typical digger/excavator jobs involve excavation and harmonisation across a certain area with little restrictions to force applied when operating the machine. Restoration requires careful adjustments using bucket movements in all directions. It can be expected that skills and expertise gained by operators enable them to work a larger area in a given time. Such efficiency gains may be expected to reduce unit costs of restoration; however, expertise may equally attract a price premium especially if competition for skilled workers is high.
4
Conditions in related market spaces e.g. dualling of A9
Related markets offer opportunities for supplementing or substituting work on restoration projects. Work in related sectors, such as road construction or renewable energy site construction, vary across time and space and may thus affect the opportunity cost of contractors to tender for restoration with implications for cost.
5
Overall demand for peatland restoration
Increasing demand for restoration will, all else equal, increase costs, at least in the short run. However, an expected long-run increase in demand (via committed public budgets and/or private finance) may encourage an expanded supply of contracting services and exert downward pressure on costs.
6
Overall contractor capacity i.e. competition
The number of existing contractors actively tendering for the same jobs in restoration (and related markets) affects competition, with an expectation of greater competition driving costs down, all else equal.
Table A4.3: Factors affecting cost per hectare of peatland restoration over time
Appendix A5 Explaining variation in restoration costs
Appendix A5.1 Methodological approach (detailed) including data preparation and assumptions
Appendix A5.1.1 Factors included in analysis and spatial data sources
The analysis builds on the evidence review in Section 4 and previous work on understanding variation in site-specific restoration costs. For this study, the publicly available spatial data identified as potential predictors of variation in peatland restoration costs come from several sources listed in Appendix Table A5.1.
It is necessary to know location and dimensions (shape) of restored sites to be able to assign spatially explicit data to them. However, due to difficulty to reliably match many of the cost database sites with their Peatland ACTION polygon counterparts (5.2.4 ‘Main Limitations’), the site shape needed to be assumed. As all the sites selected for this analysis reported a UK National Grid location, representing a centroid for each site, and a restored site area (in hectares) was reported, we assumed that all sites were a circle of “restored area” centred at the grid location. This circle was then overlayed with the relevant spatial data and the data extracted. For example, to add the average number of ‘snow days’ expected on a site, we overlay the site circles on the HADUK grid of climate observations and extract the average snow days associated with the site. See Appendix A5.1.4 ‘Merging cost database with external data’ for full details of the methodology.
Appendix A5.1.2 Data modifications
For peatland conditions, land cover classes and biogeographical zones the variables taken from the original data sources were pooled into more general categories to increase the model’s ease of interpretation. For example, all land cover classes associated with forest were classified as one ‘forest’ category in the model, see Appendix table A5.2-A5.4 for more details.
For the costs to be comparable across all the sites, the total cost figure per site was divided by the total site area to arrive at a cost per hectare estimate. The costs have been deflated to 2020 levels using consumer price index (CPI) values from the Office of National Statistics.
Appendix A5.1.3 Multi-linear regression
We developed a multi-linear model which estimates cost per hectare of the final restored area, C, based on the spatial variables described in Table A5.1. The distribution of Cost was right-skewed due to the existence of some notably expensive sites (see Figure A5.2). In such cases it is recommended to transform the dependent variable, for example by taking its natural logarithm. We thus develop a model to predict the natural logarithm of cost per hectare C of the restoration project:
where the variables are continuous, for example ‘Average annual rainfall’ and the variables are dummy variables that take a value of one (else zero) if a condition applies, e.g. if Site Region ‘Argyll’ is associated with the site. Appendix Table A5.1 shows the list of continuous variables and dummy variables considered as well as their sources. Note that not all of the variables were included in the final statistical model (Table A5.7). Since the ‘Biogeographical zones’ are unique and cover every site (every site is in exactly one zone), we can remove one of these dummy variables from the regression and not lose any information. We choose to remove the ‘Flow Country’ and thus analysis of these results is relative to the cost of restoring sites in the Flow Country. Many prospective variables to be used in the log-linear model were likely to co-vary. To ensure there was acceptable levels of multi co-linearity in the variables used in the regression we ensured the variance inflation factors for each variable were less than 5, see Appendix Table A5.8 for the variance inflation factors of the variables used in the model. To account for the fact that multiple observations (sites) can be associated with the same grant, clustered errors for all observations derived from the same grant were calculated.
In the results, we present the coefficients associated with the variables () and dummy variables () on a graph as ‘log Cost multipliers’, along with the 25% confidence interval as error bars (Figure 5.3). For continuous variables this can be interpreted as: For every one-unit change in the variable, by what factor would you expect the log cost per hectare to change. For dummy variables, this can be interpreted as the site having this property will cause this multiplication of the log cost per hectare. Since log is monotonic, we can translate this to how the variable multiplies cost. Each variable has different units and scales, so it is difficult to compare one multiplier to another. A statistically normalised version of the plot can be seen in Figure A5.3, where magnitudes between multipliers can be compared.
Table A5.1: List of variables and dummy variables used in the linear regression to estimate log cost per hectare. If the class of variables are dummy (i.e. binary) then this is indicated in the class column.
Appendix A5.1.4 Merging cost database with external data
The process of merging the SRUC cost database of NatureScot PA administered projects with other spatial data involved the following steps:
The site grid references in the cost database were converted to Easting-Northing coordinates (using standard UK coordinate reference system EPSG:27700) and converted to a GIS point shapefile (using QGIS software package version 3.16).
The circular polygon shapefiles with the centre point being the actual site centroids with a total area corresponding to the reported restored area (in NatureScot PA final reporting forms) were created within the GIS framework.
The maps containing spatial environmental information were overlaid over the circular polygon layer and cropped into the shape of the sites.
For the microclimatic variables (snow days, temperature, wind speed), topography (elevation, slope, ruggedness) and remoteness, an average value per site was calculated (for raster maps that means the total value of each variable for all raster cells in each site divided by the number of cells). For land cover categories, firstly the raster picture was converted into a vector polygon shapefile by smoothing the cell edges with a fineness down to 15 meters. A total area of each category per site vas calculated and recorded as a separate variable (for all the land cover types that a specific site did not contain the variable values were zero). The areas of each category were divided by the total site area to arrive to a ratio of the site that has the particular land cover. The total length of outlines of individual land cover features was calculated to account for terrain heterogeneity (assuming that the more patchy the site is the longer the outline of the individual features). Similarly for the peatland condition map, a total area of each site that is peatland was calculated, individual peatland condition categories were recorded and ratios per site calculated. The bare peat ratio and floodplain/surface water area ratio were calculated as a ratio of the peatland per site rather than the total area of the site. Similarly, average peat depth was considered only for peatland area of each site. Finally, sites were assigned to a biogeographical region based on the centroids’ precise location.
The data was downloaded from the GIS software into a spreadsheet and merged back into the cost database using a unique site identifier (concatenated from a unique site ID and a report type). The further steps of analysis/ model and figure construction were completed in Excel, STATA and Python packages, respectively.
Variable
Inventory categories
Forest
Forest
Cropland
Cropland
Eroded
Eroded
Modified
Modified bog
Near Natural
Near natural bog
Other
Other Peatland, Settlement
Grassland
Intensive Grassland, Extensive Grassland
Extraction
Industrial Extraction, Domestic Extraction
Table A5.2: Inventory peatland condition classes pooled into larger categories
Land Cover Categories
Woodland
Woodland fringes and clearings and tall forb stands, Broadleaved deciduous woodland, Highly artificial coniferous plantations, Mixed deciduous and coniferous woodland, Lines of trees, small anthropogenic woodlands, early stage woodland and coppice, Coniferous Woodland
Shrub
Arctic, alpine and subalpine scrub, Temperate and mediterranean-montane scrub, Temperate shrub heathland, Riverine and fen scrubs
Blanket Bogs
Raised and blanket bogs
Other
Inland cliffs, rock pavements and outcrops, Arable land and market garden, Built-up, Bare field, Windthrow, Littoral sediment (predominantly saltmarsh), Coastal dunes and sandy shores, Coastal shingle, Rock cliffs, ledges and shores, Surface standing and running waters
Mires & Fens
Valley mires, poor fens and transition mires, Base-rich fens and calcareous spring mires
Grassland
Dry grasslands, Mesic grassland, Seasonally wet and wet grasslands, Alpine and subalpine grasslands
Table A5.3: Land cover classes pooled into larger categories
Restoration Zones
Biogeographical Zones
Argyll
Argyll West and Islands
Central Belt
West Central Belt
Isles
Coll, Tiree and the Western Isles, Orkney and North Caithness, Shetland, Western Seaboard
Central Highlands
Central Highlands, Cairngorms Massif, East Lochaber, Loch Lomond, The Trossachs and Breadalbane
East Coast
North East Coastal Plain, North East Glens, Eastern Lowlands
Northern Highlands
North West Seaboard, Northern Highlands, Western Highlands
Flow Country
The Peatlands of Caithness and Sutherland
Borders
Western Southern Uplands and Inner Solway, Border Hills
Table A5.4: Biogeographical zones pooled into larger Restoration zones
Peatland Condition
Area (ha)
Percent of restored peat area
Cropland
5
0%
Other
9
0%
Grassland
108
1%
Extraction
328
3%
Forest
1711
17%
Modified Bog
1764
18%
Eroded
2860
29%
Near Natural Bog
3171
32%
All
9956
100%
Site Designation
Count
Percent of sites
SPA
22
9%
SAC
27
11%
NSA
28
12%
NNR
39
16%
Other
54
23%
SSSI
56
23%
No Designation
103
43%
Multiple Designations
53
22%
Site Use
Count
Percent of sites
Rough Grazing
76
32%
Forestry
20
8%
Field Sports
45
19%
Deer Management
110
46%
Biodiversity Conservation
92
38%
Other Use
22
9%
No use
26
11%
Multiple uses
104
44%
Table A5.5: Percentage of total area of restored sites falling into each: a) peatland condition category as defined by the Inventory peat condition map; b) Site designation, and c) Land use as reported on the final report forms for NatureScot Peatland Action.
Appendix A5.1.5 Main limitations
A major source of uncertainty is related to large variation in detail and rigor of reporting of the restoration process via application and reporting forms. Several reports are missing crucial details that make them invalid for further analysis limiting the power of studies such as this.
Each project that has been granted funding by NatureScot can be identified via a grant reference number. Thus, the sites that have been restored within the same restoration grant share the same reference number. However, throughout the duration of projects, the definitions of sites often change. This includes both the number of sites within a grant, and the area of identified sites can both increase or decrease based on what is currently considered feasible/priority. Therefore, the information entailed in project application forms can only be compared to final forms if these changes were sufficiently documented.
For deriving site area and overlay with GIS information, the circular site outline approach was chosen due to difficulty to reliably link a substantial number of the sites from the cost database with spatial data from Peatland ACTION that contains both centroids and site outlines. The grant reference numbers are often inconsistent between cost database and spatial information, and the number, area, account of applied measures and grant amounts often do not match between the information sources. Consequently, we had to manually “triangulate” matches between sites in the cost database and sites in the spatial data from Peatland ACTION, which was both time consuming and without guarantee of being free of error.
Due to a lack of a unified methodology for calculation of a total area of a restoration site, over time and across sites in the database, the account of area restored provided in the reporting form can be only treated as approximate. Sites for which the reported areas were missing, unclear or otherwise impossible to work with were removed from the analysis. As mentioned above, the site areas were in some cases also pooled together within the same project, and thus arriving at a reliable area estimate for the individual sites was difficult.
The format in which the type, unit and (unit or total) cost of restoration measures is reported also varies as application and reporting forms were updated over the years, and depending on reporting efforts invested by grantees. For example, the installation of wave dams has been reported either as the total number of individual dams, the total length of all the dams combined, or the total area covered by the specific type of dams. Wave dams also feature only in later editions of application and reporting forms. Such issues with reporting complicate measure-specific analysis of restoration cost. For example, differences in units in which measures are reported make judgment on measure intensity in a restoration site challenging if not impossible.
Figure A5.1: An example of populating the circular polygons with the cropped spatial features (In this case different colours represent individual land cover classes).
Appendix A5.2 Supplementary results
Figure A5.2: Distribution of costs considered in the analysis after deflation to 2020 levels.
Variable
Mean
Std. Dev.
5th percentile
95th percentile
Cost per hectare (£/ha)
1549.70
1500.49
190.54
4482.95
Ratio of bare peat
0.00
0.01
0
0.02
Ratio of floodplains/surface waters
0.00
0.01
0
0.01
Snow days per year
28.70
15.06
5.17
55.94
Average wind speed (m/s)
5.98
1.43
3.85
8.62
Annual rainfall (mm)
1679.70
543.40
978.93
2770.40
Average peat depth (cm)
83.11
37.15
25.00
151.18
Terrain ruggedness (index)
191.66
163.14
20.62
489.31
Site cover heterogeneity (m)
390.23
452.66
110.82
750.06
Peat condition (site ratio)
Forest
0.19
0.34
0
1.00
Eroded
0.20
0.32
0
0.89
Modified
0.11
0.19
0
0.55
Near Natural
0.22
0.34
0
0.98
Other
0.00
0.01
0
0.00
Grassland
0.01
0.05
0
0.08
Extraction
0.02
0.11
0
0.11
Table A5.6: Descriptive statistics of explanatory variable data and cost per hectare of sites, N=229.
In Figure A5.3, we plot the same figure as Figure 5.3 in the main text, but we divide the multiplier by the standard deviation of the variable so that the magnitude of the multipliers can be compared between variables.
Figure A5.3: Normalised Log of the Cost per hectare multipliers (i.e. coefficients in the regression) according to the multi-linear model. For continuous variables, (e.g. average rainfall) this can be interpreted as for every one standard deviation, the log of the cost per hectare increases by the multiplier represented by the dot. For dummy (binary) variables (e.g. region), can be interpreted as the site having that property will increase the log cost per hectare by the multiplier. Positive log of the cost multipliers (right of the red line) implies increasing the variable increases the cost and vice-versa for negative log cost multipliers. If the entry is green, then the multiplier is significant (p<0.05). In this case magnitude of multipliers can be compared.
Coefficient
Standard error
z-value
P>|z|
[0.025
0.975]
Proportion of bare peat
0.0681
0.054
1.266
0.205
-0.037
0.174
Prop. of floodplain/surf. waters
-0.0827
0.035
-2.339
0.019
-0.152
-0.013
Average Wind Speed
-0.0324
0.081
-0.402
0.687
-0.19
0.125
Average rainfall
-0.2711
0.106
-2.564
0.01
-0.478
-0.064
Average peat depth
-0.0594
0.064
-0.926
0.354
-0.185
0.066
Average ruggedness
0.0006
0.075
0.008
0.993
-0.146
0.147
Terrain heterogeneity
0.0334
0.032
1.058
0.29
-0.029
0.095
Site use forestry
-0.2395
0.096
-2.504
0.012
-0.427
-0.052
Site use grazing
0.1622
0.075
2.168
0.03
0.016
0.309
Site use field sports
-0.2271
0.288
-0.788
0.431
-0.792
0.338
Site use deer management
-0.0029
0.154
-0.019
0.985
-0.304
0.298
Site use biodiversity cons.
0.0456
0.168
0.272
0.786
-0.283
0.374
Site use other
-0.1757
0.201
-0.873
0.383
-0.57
0.219
SSSI
0.686
0.223
3.078
0.002
0.249
1.123
SAC
-0.2711
0.277
-0.979
0.328
-0.814
0.272
SPA
-0.1592
0.185
-0.86
0.39
-0.522
0.204
NSA
-0.6967
0.277
-2.517
0.012
-1.239
-0.154
NNR
0.3248
0.311
1.045
0.296
-0.284
0.934
Other designation
-0.1531
0.171
-0.894
0.371
-0.489
0.183
Prop. peat cond. forest
0.2808
0.085
3.306
0.001
0.114
0.447
Prop. peat condition eroded
0.2391
0.081
2.949
0.003
0.08
0.398
Prop. peat cond. modified bog
-0.0908
0.047
-1.949
0.051
-0.182
0.001
Prop. peat cond. near natural
-0.0213
0.088
-0.242
0.809
-0.194
0.151
Prop. peat condition other
0.0083
0.042
0.2
0.841
-0.073
0.09
Prop. peat condition grassland
-0.1133
0.054
-2.09
0.037
-0.22
-0.007
Prop. peat condition extraction
-0.1224
0.07
-1.742
0.081
-0.26
0.015
Zone Argyll
1.158
0.431
2.689
0.007
0.314
2.002
Zone Central Belt
0.7648
0.422
1.811
0.07
-0.063
1.593
Zone Isles
2.0428
0.352
5.797
0
1.352
2.733
Zone Central Highlands
1.4913
0.426
3.503
0
0.657
2.326
Zone East Coast
0.9365
0.373
2.514
0.012
0.206
1.667
Zone Northern Highlands
1.1248
0.413
2.725
0.006
0.316
1.934
Zone South West
0.8308
0.327
2.54
0.011
0.19
1.472
Year 2018/2019
-0.043
0.232
-0.185
0.853
-0.499
0.413
Year 2019/2020
0.1503
0.203
0.74
0.459
-0.248
0.548
Year 2020/2021
-0.0105
0.192
-0.055
0.956
-0.387
0.366
Year 2021/2022
0.1056
0.258
0.409
0.683
-0.4
0.612
Year 2022/2023
0.0486
0.385
0.126
0.9
-0.707
0.804
Table A5.7: Ordinary least squared regression of log of the cost per hectare.
Variable
VIF
constant
123.1919
Proportion of bare peat
1.249553
Proportion of flood plain
1.186187
Average wind speed
2.363117
Average rainfall
4.79262
Average peat depth
1.935288
Average ruggedness
3.198891
Terrain heterogeneity
1.708854
Site use forestry
1.568768
Site use field sports
3.643887
Site use deer management
2.73706
Site use biodiversity conservation
1.934092
Site use other
1.549223
SSSI
2.682824
SAC
2.018384
SPA
1.462261
NSA
2.738603
NNR
3.915651
Other designation
1.476853
Proportion peat condition forest
4.666531
Proportion peat condition eroded
3.073554
Proportion peat condition modified bog
1.589749
Proportion peat condition near natural
3.936502
Proportion peat condition other
1.356258
Proportion peat condition grassland
1.679904
Proportion peat condition extraction
1.691232
Zone Argyll
3.050752
Zone Central Belt
2.479631
Zone Isles
2.778177
Zone Central Highlands
4.194155
Zone East Coast
1.638507
Zone Northern Highlands
4.0296
Zone Southwest
3.898588
Year 2018/2019
2.705031
Year 2019/2020
2.128802
Year 2020/2021
1.909482
Year 2021/2022
2.277006
Year 2022/2023
2.325957
Table A5.8: Variance inflation factors (VIF) of the variables used in the log-linear model demonstrating the level of multi-collinearity. Variables were only included in the main model if the VIF<5.
Appendix A5.3 Additional information on economies of scale in peatland restoration with illustrative examples
Economies of scale arise at least partly from a contractor being able to spread fixed overhead costs for a project across a larger area. The literature review and interviews with contactors suggest that two main overhead costs are relevant: project tendering costs (i.e. the time and effort expended on submitting a bid) and project mobilization costs (i.e. the initial costs of getting equipment and materials on-site). Hence, whilst information on overhead costs was not sought explicitly through this research, some initial indicative analysis is possible.
To a first approximation, the costs of compiling and submitting a tender for a project are unrelated to its size since the effort required is determined by the tendering process rather than site size per se (although site complexity may increase required tendering effort). Similarly, again to a first approximation, haulage costs for equipment and materials relate primarily to the charge for moving a transporter carrying such items rather than carrying individual items themselves per se, implying that mobilization costs are likely to increase in a lumpy manner depending on how many haulage events are required rather than linearly with site size (e.g. if two diggers can be hauled on one transporter, mobilization costs will be the same for a small site requiring one digger and a larger site requiring two; only if more than two diggers are required will the larger site see an increase in mobilization costs – with scale still diluting the additional costs).
Contractor interviewees suggested that tendering takes two to three (eight hour) days. If contractors value their managerial time at £30/hour this equates to £480 to £720. If they value their time at £50/hour it equates to £800 to £1200. Online haulage costs suggest generic (i.e. not peatland) individual digger transportation costs mostly lie in the £400 to £500 range, depending on digger size and the distance moved (UShip, 2024; WHC, 2024). Taken together, these imply project overhead costs of c.£900 to £1700. For a five-hectare site these equate to unit costs of c.£180/ha to c.£340/ha. For a 20-hectare site they equate to c.£45/ha to £85/ha. This highlights the potential magnitude of economies of scale effects. A better understanding could be established with further investigation, including how contractors value their managerial time, the effort devoted to tendering and actual mobilizations costs (including for multiple diggers and for items other than diggers).
Table A5.9: Summary statistics outlining the average areas (ha) of restored sites per each funding year.
Types of restoration measures
Year
A only
B only
C only
A & B
A & C
B & C
A,B & C
All
2017/18
1
3
3
10
6
3
9
45
2018/19
8
2
15
16
7
1
8
57
2019/20
10
2
9
9
7
0
8
45
2020/21
10
11
3
16
2
4
2
48
2021/22
6
6
0
13
1
2
3
31
2022/23
0
0
0
3
0
0
0
3
Total
35
34
30
67
23
10
30
229
Table A5.10: Number of sites restored using a measure category (A – dams & blocking, B – surface measures (bunding, mulching, replanting), C – forest & scrub removal) per funding year.
Land cover
Year
Shrub
Mires & Fens
Raised & Blanked Bogs
Woodland
Grassland
Other
2017/18
357.2
2.4
1147.8
22.3
324.7
73.1
2018/19
195.0
60.7
1689.2
204.0
1265.6
162.3
2019/20
311.1
6.7
1354.9
101.8
357.3
289.6
2020/21
467.2
6.7
1569.1
53.8
668.4
238.6
2021/22
232.5
1.2
1644.7
15.7
121.5
48.4
2022/23
96.0
0.4
221.9
1.5
37.7
0.5
Table A5.11: Area (ha) of each pre-restoration land cover category restored per each year.
Regions
Year
Flow Country
Argyll
Central Belt
Isles
Central Highlands
East Coast
Northern Highlands
South-west
All
2017/18
10
0
4
3
17
3
3
5
45
2018/19
7
9
10
1
3
5
10
12
57
2019/20
14
10
2
5
5
1
6
2
45
2020/21
10
0
0
1
13
0
6
18
48
2021/22
2
1
0
7
11
0
7
3
31
2022/23
0
0
0
0
0
0
3
0
3
All
43
20
16
17
49
9
35
40
229
Table A5.10: Number of sites restored in each restoration zone per funding year.
Appendix B6 Opportunities and challenges for contractors
Appendix B6.1 Detailed methodological approach
Eight interviews were conducted with contractors providing peatland restoration services in Scotland. Interviews were conducted using an interview script (Appendix Table B6.1) to guide the conversation, yet allowing some flexibility for the discussion to move into other topics that were important to the participants. A semi- structured approach was selected because this is considered most appropriate where the topic of research is novel or under researched, as is the case for research concerning the experience of peatland restoration contractors.
Participants were selected for interview by purposive sampling, from a publicly available list of contractors willing to offer peatland restoration services (7), and from a list of new entrants to peatland restoration that was provided by NatureScot (1). A sampling frame was used to guide recruitment to ensure perspectives were obtained from contractors of different sizes and across geographic areas (Table 6.1).
Interviews were scheduled for thirty minutes, though ranged from 15 minutes to one hour and were conducted as video conference calls using Microsoft Teams (N=7), and by phone (N=1). Most interviews were conducted by interviewer 1 and 2 together (N=6), with interviewer 1 leading the interview. Two more were conducted by interviewer 2 alone.
An initial draft interview script was presented to the project steering group and revised to incorporate their feedback. With the consent of participants, interviews were recorded and later transcribed for analysis. Pre-approval for the overall approach and research instruments was received from the SRUC Ethics committee (Ref. 149 / 89056833).
Interview notes and transcripts were reviewed to identify commonalities and points of difference in contractor perspectives of the tender process and wider factors affecting the industry.
Pre-populated brief of contractor
Add here information collated e.g. from online sources on the contractor, if any
This may include – type of services offered, information on location, range of operation, experience & examples of past work, references, availability of machinery and staff capacity.
Contractor name:
Contact(s):
Website:
Useful info:
Type contractor (can be filled and/or revised after interview)
Experienced & active contractors focusing on restoration
Experienced & active contractors with wide range of business (e.g. forestry, estate management & road construction/maintenance)
Occasional contractors focusing on other business & who do not systematically look for restoration opportunities
Adjustments to questions needed if contractor falls into the following categories:
Tendering but unsuccessful
Not (yet) tendering
Introduction (to be tailored and aligned with contact emails and information provided therein)
We’re conducting research on behalf of the Scottish Government and its Centre of Expertise on Climate Change, looking at peatland restoration undertaken by contractors.
We’re interested in your views on peatland restoration – your experience as a contractor with the tendering process, how you approach costing bids for restoration work, and what influences restoration costs.
Your input will help with further development of funding schemes for restoration, for example by helping delivery partners and funders in having a better idea of the information that should be considered as relevant and make tendering easier for you.
Any information you provide will only be reported in anonymized form.
On this basis is this acceptable?
If not provided consent in email response, ask verbally for consent.
Table B6.1: Interview script.
Main questions
Instructions and Prompts
For context only: what we aim to learn from questions
Part 1 – business characterization
Q.1 Can you please briefly explain your role in the business?
Helps contextualizing response
Q.2 How long have you been operating as a peatland restoration contractor?
From what background did your peat restoration business start?
What prompted the move into peatland work? Was there anything that facilitated the process?
This is to get some sense of the contractors level of experience with delivering peatland projects, but also a sense how peatland restoration is seen as a business opportunity
Q.3 Is peatland restoration the main focus of the business?
1 Could you estimate the percentage that restoration is to your turnover?
2 What other services does business offer?
3 How many tenders per year and success rate?
4 Total Number of Ha restored per year
5 Do you work on restoration all year round? If not what do you do in the off season?
Get an idea of relative importance of peatland restoration relative to other activities and scale of operation.
Q.4 What is your capacity for peatland restoration?
Geographically, where do you operate i.e. offer restoration services?
How many staff? How many of those are Operators?
Machinery capacity: number of diggers and drivers?
Could you do more Ha than currently?
What stops you from doing more Ha?
Similar to Q.3 Get an idea of the scale and place of operation.
Part 2 – Tendering for projects
Q.5 Where do you usually find out about new peatland restoration tenders?
How long do you usually spend on a tender?
Transition to topic of tendering
Q.6 What influences your decisions about whether or not to submit a bid?
Top three most important aspects affecting your decision to tender?
For prompting, notes and coding – see list of related points below.
Contractor business perspective
What is our capacity to do this work?
Do we have other more profitable work?
Does the project fit into the calendar?
Will this job fit in with other jobs in the area?
Is the work within our competence/machine capability?
How flexible is the contract?
Hassle factor and contingency required?
Can we make a reasonable profit?
Level of competition from other contractors?
Overarching constraints
Distance – site too far/out of business range
No capacity in project timeframe
Client
Client reputation & payment attitude
Good communication
Tendering process
How complicated is the tendering process?
Opportunity for site visit. If not may need to add contingency
How much documentation is required? How much info (maps etc) is available
Are there other benefits of this contract….getting further contracts
Return date of tender
Project characteristics
Duration of project…longer the better
Scale of the project….bigger better usually
Start date…too soon to fit in with other work?
How close is the finishing date
Is this an easy project or complex – how is complexity assessed?
Site condition/intensity of work
Access issues that can be mitigated or not
Obtain insights on tendering decisions –, i.e., key facilitating factors and barriers to preparing and submitting a tender. Response to Q.6 may lead naturally into Q.7 (appraisal of the tender information to arrive at a bid)
Q.7 What makes for a good profitable project as opposed to a relatively difficult one?
Aspects may already emerge from elaboration on reasons for whether to tender (list above in Q.6).
How do you arrive at estimates of staff and machinery days?
Do you appraise complexity of a job for that, and if so, what are indicators for complexity you look for?
Anything you specifically look out for that has significant cost implications?
This is about appraisal of the tender information to arrive at a bid – i.e. factors affecting contractor cost calculations.
Q.8 How could the tendering process be improved?
Would you prefer if the tenders were based on a number of digger days or specific lengths of ditches for example?
Opportunities for improving tendering process to facilitate (additional) restoration
Part 3 – outlook and trajectory for peatland business
Q.9 Have you taken on additional staff to deliver peat restoration, or invested in machinery over past 2 years?
If yes to additional staff:
Did you require additional training and if so how was this delivered?
Have you taken advantage of any publicly-funded training courses?
Would simulator training help encourage you to take on a member of staff?
If yes to machinery:
Have you found the additional investment worthwhile to your operation?
What innovations will help you in the future?
What are the future drivers of costs?
Learn about past investment as indicator of expected direction of business and willingness to expand
Q.10 Do you expect (the peatland restoration side of your) business to grow? In next 1-2 years or 3 to 5 years?
If yes, why?
If no, what makes you think so?
Opportunities and barriers to growth
Q.11 What would encourage you to (further) expand capacity, or to bid for more projects?
E.g.
Changes in funding models, if there was bundling of projects?
Framework tenders, improving certainty over further income from restoration projects over several years?
Support e.g. interest free government loans for machinery
Certification indicating e.g. trained supplier of restoration services
Consistency of funding
… [input from steering group?]
Mitigating barriers to growth and new models to encourage scaling of capacity
Q.12 What do you think keeps other contractors from bidding for restoration projects?
Perceptions of other contractors – “themes” emerging across contractors
Q.13 Are you able to suggest to us other contractors who could in theory deliver restoration but don’t bid? Do you know of anyone who we could or should talk to? (and why should we talk to them)?
Help with identifying further interviewees (may or may not follow recommendations)
Wrap up
Any questions to us?
Note if they would like to see published CxC report
Thanks and close
Table B6.2: Final interview schedule for interviews with (potential) contractors of peatland restoration services.
While every effort is made to ensure the information in this report is accurate, no legal responsibility is accepted for any errors, omissions or misleading statements. The views expressed represent those of the author(s), and do not necessarily represent those of the host institutions or funders.
This work was supported by the Rural and Environment Science and Analytical Services Division of the Scottish Government (CoE – CXC).
ClimateXChange Edinburgh Climate Change Institute High School Yards Edinburgh EH1 1LZ +44 (0) 131 651 4783
If you require the report in an alternative format such as a Word document, please contactinfo@climatexchange.org.uk or 0131 651 4783.
Restoration and rewetting are used interchangeably in this report. In doing so, we do not imply that it is likely that peatlands will be restored to their historic undisturbed state, but emphasise the aim of restoring the functioning of the area as a wetland. This is done through raising water tables, i.e. rewetting. ↑
Although the 2032 emission targets have now been acknowledged as unachievable, the peatland restoration target remains in place. ↑
Unless noted otherwise, we will refer to restoration costs as the capital requirements to implement restoration on site. This does not include certain transaction (program administration and monitoring) costs borne by funders, the opportunity costs of restoration related to income forgone (see Moxey et al. 2016), or any private financial benefits of restoration e.g. related to carbon scheme participation or transfer payments. Such costs can make up a considerable amount of total cost of investing in nature based solutions (Kang et al. 2023). ↑
Forestry and Land Scotland and the Cairngorms National Park Authority also hold data on restoration costs (as do Loch Lomond and Trossachs National Park), but these databases were beyond the scope of this project. ↑
For further insights, the search goes beyond peatland and peatland restoration only, including habitat (e.g. wetlands, grassland) restoration more generally but also other land-based sectors requiring similar contracted land management services (e.g. forestry, landscape gardening civil engineering). ↑
For example, Spencer (1989), Cohan (2018), Benjaminsson et al. (2019), Kronholm et al. (2021), Oo et al. (2022), Binshakir et al. (2023), Johansson et al. (2023), Olatunji et al. (2023). ↑
We note that the magnitudes of the factors cannot be compared (see Appendix Figure A5.3 for a version of the Figure where magnitudes can be compared). ↑
Potentially contributing to relatively lower restoration costs, earlier projects especially in the Flow Country may have been subject to sequencing of restoration measures at the same site over several years; with yearly progress entered as new projects into the SRUC cost database. The extent to which such sequencing might have taken place is, however, unclear. ↑
Note that the analysis only includes forest-to-bog restoration by NatureScot PA projects (and not forest-to-bog restoration through, for example, FLS). ↑
At the time of interviewing, interviewees may not have been aware that listing on PCS had recently been made compulsory rather than simply preferable. ↑
It should be noted, however, that interviews were mostly undertaken before an announcement was made regarding funding for an additional 7000ha. ↑
Why it is important
The Scottish Government is committed to support the transition to net zero, whilst restoring and regenerating biodiversity. Organic farming practices have the potential to deliver to both agendas. Therefore, in the 2021-2022 Programme for Government, the Scottish Government committed to doubling the land area devoted to organic farming in Scotland by 2026 and supporting the growth of organic food production.
Given these aims, Government asked ClimateXChange to commission a robust evidence review to help understand how organic farming practices contribute to climate change mitigation and adaptation.
Findings from the study demonstrate the environmental benefits of different organic farming practices and how they could help farmers adapt to a changing climate. This has informed Scottish Government’s decision-making about agricultural policy.
Furthermore, the report clarifies the definition of organic farming, addressing terminology challenges identified in previous work.
How ClimateXChange supported policymakers
Organic farming has become a widely used term, applied across a range of circumstances. ClimateXChange supported the project team in designing the research and subsequent report to clearly set out important distinctions. As a result, this report presents a clear summary of what constitutes organic farming practices, which is different from organic farming business certification.
The study included a rapid evidence assessment of academic and grey literature, followed by two stakeholder workshops to test the emerging findings and gather opinions from those directly involved in this sector. Published literature is – by definition – dated, given the time required for research, reporting, publication and dissemination. Stakeholder engagement ensured that the research captured up-to-date Scotland-specific practice and experience.
The project team had considerable expertise in organic farming research. They synthesised complex academic knowledge and mapped the state of knowledge and key evidence gaps that could be explored further. ClimateXChange brought expertise in knowledge exchange to communicate the results effectively with a wider policy audience who were not experts on the topic.
Impact
The findings shaped the development of the Scottish Government’s agriculture reform work, informing decisions on what organic farming practices to support. Furthermore, the report also informed the revised draft of Scotland’s Organic Action Plan. This has been presented to teams across Government as well as to ministers and will update the shared agenda for the sector, with actions to be taken forward by all parties.
The Organic Action Plan is due to be published in June 2025 and will be used to support the growth of the organic sector in Scotland, through encouraging market growth and increasing the area of farmland under organic management.
The report contributed not only with knowledge but also to building relationships between the Scottish Government and the Scottish Organic Stakeholders Group.
“Thanks to the report, we learned about the benefits of organic farming on important aspects such as biodiversity, soil health and food waste reduction. This knowledge has been valuable in informing our work on the Organic Action Plan. It also helped set organic farming in the context of the wider agriculture support framework.”
– Callum Neil, Agri-Environment Senior Policy Adviser and Organic Action Plan Lead Scottish Government
“The report was really helpful, particularly for our agricultural reform work, highlighting that organic farming is not a uniform set of practices. This provides a more holistic approach that farmers and crofters can take in selecting from a list of measures they can adopt to increase the sustainability of agriculture.”
– Stephanie Davies, Senior Agri-Environment Policy Adviser Scottish Government
The planning system in Scotland provides opportunities to adapt to current and future risks from climate change, and the potential to promote nature recovery and restoration.
Development planning, which outlines how places should change and where development should and should not happen, requires planning authorities to publish local development plans. These should account for and address current and future climate risks, and enable places to adapt accordingly. Accurate data, identifing geographic features such as rivers and utilities, is vital for the creation of effective plans with a sound evidence base to evaluate climate risks.
This project explored the geospatial resources that are available to planning authorities, with a view to improving access to geospatial data on climate risk. The research involved an evidence review and stakeholder engagement with planning authorities at various stages of evidence report development.
The report identifies existing data, data gaps, barriers and resources needed for evidence-based planning and delivery.
Findings
A wide range of data is required to assess climate vulnerabilities and impacts, some of which require substantial climate and data expertise to interpret.
Most required data is free for planning authorities.
Planning authorities tend to rely on datasets familiar to them – such as Flood Maps (SEPA), Dynamic Coast, Scottish Index of Multiple Deprivation (SIMD), and OS MasterMap to assess climate risks like flooding, coastal erosion, and social vulnerability.
There are additional datasets and tools which would benefit from further adoption by planning authorities, especially the Local Authority Climate Service.
Significant data gaps exist for urban heat islands, storm damage, health, water, infrastructure and landslides.
Planning authority use of spatial data is limited, despite support for it in the Local Development Planning Guidance.
Planning authorities find it challenging and time-consuming to gather data from multiple providers.
There is value in carrying out Climate Risk and Vulnerability Assessments (CRVAs) to better direct the use of data but there is no consistent approach or simple tool available for planning authorities to use.
Collaboration across planning authorities allows knowledge and resources sharing, which leads to more consistent and effective outcomes.
Briefing note
The briefing note provides guidance on more usable and interpretable data that can be used for assessing climate risks and vulnerabilities.
If you require the report in an alternative format, such as a Word document, please contact info@climatexchange.org.uk or 0131 651 4783.
The planning system in Scotland is used to make decisions about future developments and use of land in towns, cities and countryside. Planning authorities are required to prepare evidence reports as part of the local development plan (LDP) process. These provide a summary of the baseline data used and explain the implications of the LDP.
Supported by National Planning Framework 4 (NPF4), planning LDPs should account for and address current and future climate risks, and enable places to adapt accordingly. Accurate, sub-national spatial data, which identifies geographic features such as rivers and utilities, is vital to create effective plans with a sound evidence base to evaluate climate risks. Fully evidencing climate risk requires an understanding of hazards, but also exposure and vulnerability, typically requiring interpretation of multiple datasets at once.
This report explores the geospatial resources that are available to support the evidence gathering stage with a view to improving access to geospatial data on climate risk. It identifies existing data, data gaps, barriers, and resources needed for evidence-based planning and delivery.
Key findings
Through engagement with a selection of Scottish Planning Authorities, we found:
Data for evidence reports
A wide range of data is required to assess climate vulnerabilities and impacts, some of which require substantial climate and data expertise to interpret.
Most required data is free for planning authorities.
Planning authorities tend to rely on datasets familiar to them – such as Flood Maps (SEPA), Dynamic Coast, Scottish Index of Multiple Deprivation (SIMD), and OS MasterMap to assess climate risks like flooding, coastal erosion, and social vulnerability. These datasets are highly usable, with consistent coverage and quality across Scotland, but sometimes require geospatial expertise for analysis.
There are additional datasets and tools which would benefit from further adoption by Planning Authorities, especially the Local Authority Climate Service. Additional datasets related to wildfire risk, air quality and land use may offer value, but would require some transformation, processing and interpretation to the climate context.
Significant data gaps exist for urban heat islands, storm damage, health, water, infrastructure and landslides. Proxies (e.g. combining urban form, green space, and housing quality data) are suggested for urban heat island assessments. However, these must be approached in a considered way, which balances the potential effort to develop the interpretation against the likely risk.
Planning authorities’ approach
There is a knowledge gap on how climate risk impacts planning. Some planning authorities have limited prior experience on climate risk, fewer technical data skills within their teams and no dedicated climate change professional. This leads to planning authorities mainly focusing on flood risk, where they have more familiarity.
Planning authority use of spatial data is limited, despite support for it in the Local Development Planning Guidance. This underuse may result from limited awareness of the guidance and expectations of evidence reports, and a lack of capacity and skills to interpret geospatial data.
Planners expressed a wish for a simplified approach to incorporate climate adaptation considerations into their plans.
Planning authorities find it challenging and time-consuming to gather data from multiple providers.
There is value in carrying out Climate Risk and Vulnerability Assessments (CRVAs) to better direct the use of data but there is no consistent approach or simple tool available for planning authorities to use.
Collaboration across planning authorities allows knowledge and resources sharing, which leads to more consistent and effective outcomes.
Given the wide range of potential data and analysis, planning authorities benefit from instances where work had been undertaken ahead of the LDP process to provide a view of which risks are most impactful, allowing a more focused approach to data.
Briefing note for planning authorities
Many planning authorities lack clarity on which data should be used for assessing climate risks and vulnerabilities, and how to interpret it. We have created an accompanying briefing note (Section 9.5), which should help by providing guidance on more usable and interpretable data.
Glossary / Abbreviations table
ADMS
Atmospheric Dispersion Modelling System
BGS
British Geological Survey
CC BY
Creative Commons Attribution License (further detail in 9.1.2)
CLIMADA
CLIMate ADAptation, Economics of Climate Adaptation
CRVA
Climate Risk and Vulnerability Assessment
CCRA
Climate Change Risk Assessment
DSM
Digital Surface Model
DTM
Digital Terrain Mode
EFFIS
European Forest Fire Information System
GIS
Geographic Information System
HabMoS
Habitat Map of Scotland
LA
Local Authority
LACS
Local Authority Climate Service
LDP
Local Development Plan
LiDAR
Light Detection and Ranging
LPA
Local Planning Authority
LSOA
Lower Super Output Area
NGD
National Geographic Database
NPF4
National Planning Framework 4
OGL
Open Government Licence (further detail in 9.1.2)
OpenCLIM
Open Climate Impacts Modelling framework
OS
Ordnance Survey
SNAP3
(Third) Scottish National Adaptation Plan
SEPA
Scottish Environmental Protection Agency
SIMD
Scottish Index of Multiple Deprivation
Sniffer
Independent charity – knowledge brokers for a resilient Scotland
PSGA
Public Sector Geospatial Agreement (further detail in 9.1.2)
UHI
Urban Heat Island
UKCCRA3
(Third) UK Climate Change Risk Assessment
UKCP18
UK Climate Projections 2018
UK-CRI
UK Climate Risk Indicators
Context and approach
Context
The reduction of emissions and adaptation to current and future risks of climate change is a challenge which is vital to be addressed via the planning system. The planning system provides opportunities to adapt to both current and future risks of climate change, as well as the potential to promote nature recovery and restoration in the area.
As part of the effort to modernise and update the planning system, the Scottish Government aims to align land-use planning with an outcomes-based approach to deliver sustainable development. This approach supports the National Performance Framework National Outcomes (Scottish Government, 2015) and supports the United Nations Sustainable Development Goals (United Nations, 2015).
Development planning, which outlines how places should change and where development should and should not happen, requires planning authorities to prepare and publish a local development plan (LDP)[1], updating on a 5 yearly basis.
The National Planning Framework 4 (NPF4) (Scottish Government, 2023c),puts climate change adaptation and resilience front and centre. A clear understanding of the impact of hazards and risks related to climate is required for an effective plan, and this must be underpinned by the effective use of climate risk data.
Defining climate risk
In this report, we refer climate risk in line with existing climate literature. Risk is defined as a combination of hazard, exposure and vulnerability (IPCC 2014).
Hazards are physical events which may have adverse effects, such as sea level rise & increased heat.
Exposure indicates the presence of people, resources, infrastructure which could be impacted by the hazard, and the extent to which they can be reached by the hazard. Physical proximity is one key consideration in understanding degree of exposure.
Vulnerability indicates to which extent people, resources or infrastructure could be more or less impacted by a hazard
Crucially, data can indicate hazard, exposure, vulnerability, or potentially a combination of the factors if indicating risk. However, if a dataset was not designed with the above in mind, it would need to be reinterpreted to a climate risk context. As an example, Ordnance Survey provides extensive data on the location of buildings, infrastructure and natural features, but geospatial analysis would be required to derive metrics such location to flood zones to indicate risk of flooding.
There is a substantial range of potential hazards associated with climate change in Scotland (Grace et. Al 2025). For this report, our engagement with the planning authorities focussed on the applicability of data, therefore a simplified grouping of hazards and risks was used (Table 1). In instances where datasets were particularly applicable to vulnerability and exposure, this is discussed in detail in Section 4.
Table 1 – Hazards and risks, as summarised in this report
Hazard Groups
Rainfall & Storms
Temperature & Water Scarcity
Sea Level Rise
Well Represented Hazards and Risks
Flooding
Costal Erosion
Health risks
Air pollution
Loss of land
Flood risk
Potentially Under Represented Hazards and Risks
Storm damage
Landslides
Water pollution
Agricultural changes
Habitat changes
Urban Heat Islands
Habitat Loss
Infrastructure damage
Local development plan evidence reports
Evidence reports are an early, statutory step in the development of a local plan. It provides a summary of the baseline data and other information which will form the basis of the plan.
This research focuses on the evidence gathering stage for climate risk – specifically, the tasks of early engagement and data collection, preparation of the evidence reports and a gate check by the Planning and Environmental Appeals Division (DPEA).
Evidence reports should be proportionate, with planning authorities having the discretion to tailor them to local characteristics and conditions. The Local Development Planning Guidance (Scottish Government, 2023b) provides guidance to support planning authorities in preparing evidence reports, including potential datasets relevant to NPF4 policies for climate change adaptation planning.
In addition to data access, there is a need to draw out implications of the data for the plan. It is not just about accessing the geospatial climate risk dataset but also ensuring its usability to accurately inform local development plans.
Rationale for this research
The lack of easily accessible spatial data on climate risk at a sub-national resolution has been identified as a key barrier to localised understanding of climate change adaptation by local authority planning officers.
Data gaps and accessibility issues create barriers to planning authorities producing proportionate, evidence-based plans. The aim of this research is to establish options for improved, simplified access by Scottish planning authorities to geospatial data that enables consistent, collaborative climate adaptation in local planning.
The intended audience for this research includes the Scottish Government and planning authorities. The work was commissioned on behalf of the Scottish Government, with particular interest for colleagues from the Climate Change Division and Planning, Architecture and Regeneration Directorate. A standalone briefing note and data catalogue (see Section 9.5) has also been produced specifically for planning authorities to showcase the available datasets.
Research methodology
The research involved an evidence review including a review of relevant literature, planning requirements and an in-depth data analysis of available risk data and its characteristics. Stakeholder engagement was conducted with planning authorities which were at various stages of evidence report development (see Figure 1) from early planning to successful completion. The engagement included interviews, as well as a wider workshop (See 9.3). Findings from these activities were the analysed to understand current needs, challenges and possible solutions to improve the process.
Figure 1 – Planning authorities engaged with in this study included Western Isles, Moray, West Dumbarton, Glasgow City, the Lothians, the Borders and Fife
Climate risk data
Effective data is central to the local development plan, and it is key that the right data is used and referenced for the evidence report. Additionally, the evidence report is expected to rely on spatial data, for which baseline evidence sources should be accessible.
There is a large range of data potentially available for use in evidence reports. This section provides a consolidated assessment of key datasets.
Our engagement with planning authorities identified:
Five climate-related datasets that were familiar to planning authorities and were – or were intended to be – used to produce the evidence report.
Eight datasets which would be valuable if used more extensively by planning authorities in the preparation of evidence reports.
Five areas of concern to planning authorities in relation to the evidence report which did not have a dataset available, or a clear methodology, documented below as data gaps.
In this section, key aspects of the data are provided, such as name, the organisation providing the data. The data license under which the data is made available is provided, the full implications of the license to usage by planning authorities is detailed in Section 9.1.2.
The majority of datasets reviewed are updated and published at a rate sufficient for their purpose, though we have noted instances where there may not be a clear long term plan for the maintenance of the data.
Several other datasets were identified as having potential value. For the full list of all data sources reviewed please see the accompanying data catalogue (Section 9.5)., which catalogue includes details of the metadata and access links.
Key datasets already in use
Through the interviews and workshop, there were multiple datasets already in use by planning authorities in the production of the evidence reports, though not consistently in all cases. The most popular datasets are discussed in this section, along with a narrative of how the datasets were applied and if any issues were faced.
Table 4.1 – Key datasets already in use by planning authorities
The consensus among most participants was that the Flood Maps from the Scottish Environment Protection Agency (SEPA) were a useful source for assessing increased flooding risks, which could be an outcome of both increased magnitude and frequency of rainfall, storms and sea level rise. The SEPA data is presented using a simple index (high, medium and low risk) down to ‘street’ level, which lends to easy interpretation by all stakeholders. The SEPA data also distinguishes between current flood risk, and future flood risk up to the 2080s, in the ‘Future Flood Maps’ layer. One participant also commented that the support provided by SEPA is also incredibly useful. Given the flood data also overlaps with other planning use cases out with the evidence report, there is a lot of familiarity with the data.
Dynamic Coast
Provider
License
Hazard Applicability
Usability
NatureScot
OGL and PGSA
Rainfall, Storms, Sea Level rise
High
Data from Dynamic Coast is used by multiple planning authorities. This project undertook a wide range of analyses, from coastal change due to sea level rise to the social disadvantage of the population exposed to coastal erosion. The output is a series of datasets on coastal erosion, intended as a broad planning tool for ‘street’ to ‘regional scale’ mitigation. The data also includes social vulnerability as an indicator. For coastal planning authorities, the data was seen as valuable and usable, though may not be as accurate or applicable in estuarine areas. The outputs include a mixture of OGL and PSGA data, so while most of the data is fully open, not all layers can be supplied to all stakeholders.
Scottish Index of Multiple Deprivation
Provider
License
Hazard Applicability
Usability
Scottish Government
OGL
All hazards/ vulnerability
High
The Scottish Index of Multiple Deprivation (SIMD) dataset provides a range of indices which can be used to highlight areas of high deprivation that may face a higher impact from climate risks. The data is presented at Lower Layer Super Output Area (LSOA) level (e.g. ‘neighbourhood’ level) and summarises social issues in simple to interpret indices. The housing index specifically accounts for houses which are overcrowded, and those which do not have central heating – key factors to consider when assessing risks related to several climate hazards.
OS MasterMap
Provider
License
Hazard Applicability
Usability
Ordnance Survey
OGL/ PSGA
All hazards
Medium
There is a large range of data available from the Ordnance Survey (OS), which can cover a range of topics from housing, infrastructure to green space and biodiversity. OS also provides products which can be used as backdrop maps to improve the accessibility of data when shared with stakeholders. The OS MasterMap range of datasets has been used in local government for various purposes since its launch in 2001, so there is likely to be organisational familiarity, especially in GIS teams. OS has been in the process of refreshing its key products with the introduction of the National Geographic Database (NGD). This is intended to add additional data to OS’s products to serve further analytical use cases and adds data such as the presence of green roofs and solar panels on buildings (coming in future release), habitat classifications and building ages. OS data is largely licensed under PSGA or OGL, and access is provided via the OS Datahub. OS also has products which identify areas of greenspace, namely MasterMap Greenspace and OS Open Greenspace. OS data is all high resolution, ‘street’ level data.
OS data is of high quality and coverage, providing street level data across Great Britain, which is updated frequently. Indicators for climate hazards, however would need to be derived through analysis. This would generally require geospatial skills and tools, but additionally, OS datasets tend to be large and complex. OS has made some efforts to address the complexity of accessing large data, including ‘Select+Build’ features, and API access. All planning authorities, as PSGA members, can access direct technical support from OS.
Light Detection and Ranging (LiDAR)
Provider
License
Hazard Applicability
Usability
Scottish Government
OGL
All hazards
Low
LiDAR data from the Scottish Remote Sensing portal is valuable for assessing risks related to flooding. Digital Surface Model (DSM)/Digital Terrain Model (DTM) data from LiDAR can be easily interpreted and integrated with other steps in the analysis. The Scottish Remote Sensing portal has OGL licensed LiDAR data in a relatively easily accessible form – however, the coverage of the data is mostly focussed on the Central Belt, limiting the ability for some planning authorities to use. Additional coverage for the data was announced as part of the Future Farming Investment Scheme[5], which should improve the usability of this data in the future. The data is high resolution, supporting analysis at ‘street’ level.
Suggested datasets for future wider use
The following datasets were discussed in interviews and workshops, but we found that not all planning authorities sampled were using them. For some datasets, the low uptake by planning authorities was due to difficulty in the use, or accessing of the dataset, whereas for others low uptake was down to a lack of familiarity.
In this section we have provided a narrative for these datasets to indicate where they may be of value for planning authorities to use going forward.
Table 4.2 – Suggested datasets which could be used by Planning authorities for further value
Neighbourhood Flood Vulnerability Index (NFVI) and Social Flood Risk Index (SFRI)
Climate Just
OGL
Rainfall & Storms
High
4.2.7
UK Climate Projections 2018 (UKCP18)
Met Office
OGL
All Hazards
Low
4.2.8
GeoSure, GeoCoast and GeoClimate
British Geological Survey
OGL and Licensed
Rainfall & storms, sea level rise
Low
Local Authority Climate Service
Provider
License
Hazard Applicability
Usability
Met Office
OGL
All hazards
High
The newly launched Local Authority Climate Service (LACS) from the Met Office aims to provide planning authorities across the UK with crucial information on climate change to support decision-making. The LACS provides a simple interface for analysing changes related to key hazards and includes climate averages and climate indicators. A Climate Report can be generated through the Climate Explorer. Planning authorities can add data and then use it in other applications such as Excel and Power BI. It is built using geospatial technology from Esri UK and is part of the Climate Data Portal (Met Office, 2024b) which hosts the information within the Local Authority Climate Projections Explorer. The LACS also includes guidance on the process of assessing climate risk with ‘regional’ level data. The Met Office launched the new beta service on 9 October, so as a new service has not yet seen widespread adoption in planning authorities. The Met Office are inviting feedback to help drive improvements of the LACS – the conclusions of which could be used as the basis to feed into this improvement process. Additionally, it could increase the number of Scottish planning authorities involved, increasing their awareness and knowledge of the system, and also make sure the LACS delivers the service that Scottish planners need. The LACS is not currently configured to provide reports for National Park planning authorities, but does cover all Scottish local authorities.
Habitat Map of Scotland
Provider
License
Hazard Applicability
Usability
NatureScot
OGL
All hazards
Medium
The Habitat Map of Scotland (HabMoS) is a composite dataset including different layers of detailed habitat data. All have been given a common Habitat Coding from the European Nature Information System (EUNIS). Using this data, a mapping of the existing habitats in a planning authority can be created. High value, or at risk habitats can then be identified, and habitat loss due to hazards such as sea level rise can be accounted for . The data is OGL licensed, with ‘street’ level resolution. HabMoS brings together habitat and land use data from multiple sources into one map, but the data is not interpreted in the context of climate hazards, so further interpretation and combination with additional datasets would be required to draw conclusions.
European Local Climate Zones
Provider
License
Hazard Applicability
Usability
Demuzere et. al. (2022)
CC BY 4.0
All hazards
High
The European Local Climate Zone (LCZ) data creates a simple typology for the built environment and landcover which is intended to support decision-making around climate risks. The data aims to characterise the urban landscape into broad categories (such as low-rise and high-rise housing) so that interactions between urban form and risks such as poor air quality, flooding and heatwaves can be modelled. Data is provided at ‘neighbourhood’ level resolution. One workshop participant reported that they had undertaken a ground truthing exercise in their local authority and confirmed that the data was broadly valid. As the data was recently, in 2022 and was aimed at the climate academic community, this dataset has not yet found widespread use in planning authorities. There are not currently any regular updates or revisions published for the LCZ data. Given the data is at ‘neighbourhood’ resolution, there is less need for it to be updated frequently, as only large changes to the urban landscape would be detected. As well as the detailed methodology being public, an LCZ Generator tool is provided by Ruhr University Bochum[9] which provides potential opportunities for updated datasets to be created for Scotland in the future.
UK Climate Risk Indicators (UK-CRI)
Provider
License
Hazard Applicability
Usability
UK Climate Resilience Programme
CC BY 4.0
All hazards
High
UK-CRI data simplifies analysis of many risks into indices. For temperature related risks, the data includes an estimation of days (or events) per year of events including heat waves, amber heat-health alerts, tropical nights (nights with a minimum temp of 20 °C). This extends to heat related impacts on infrastructure, such as road melting and high temperatures on rail. The impact of hazards on agriculture such as growing season and heat stress are also reported. Rather than creating new climate data, the UK-CRI is an interface on existing datasets (primarily Met Office) which simplifies complex data into more easily interpreted indices. The Met Office publishes annual updates to its climate data, though the UK-CRI tool does not receive updates as frequently. At ‘regional’ scale, it is less critical that the data is frequently updated, though after 5-10 years if the tool does not receive data updates, it may become far less appropriate to use.
River Basin Management Plans
Provider
License
Hazard Applicability
Usability
SEPA
OGL
All hazards
Medium
River basin management plans set out actions to address current issues affecting water quality, water resources and fish. The management plans can be used in context with other data sources to understand risks which impact river health. River basin management plans are not explicitly geospatial datasets but relate to river basins which can be represented geospatially. The issues faced using this data mainly lie in the river basin boundaries not aligning with local authority boundaries, so requires some analysis. In addition, the key use case of the dataset is not climate risk or hazard related, so will require reinterpreting to the climate context.
Neighbourhood Flood Vulnerability Index (NFVI) and Social Flood Risk Index (SFRI)
Provider
License
Hazard Applicability
Usability
Climate Just
OGL
Rainfall & Storms
High
A national flood vulnerability dataset was created by the Joseph Rowntree Foundation and is publicly available via the ClimateJust Maps tool. This dataset provides and easily to use, ready-made index describing flood vulnerability by combing physical flood risk with several factors which represent socio-economic vulnerability to flooding. However, it is based on ‘street level’ data published in 2011, which at this scale becomes quickly outdated. England and Wales had their index updated in 2022. An updated Scottish equivalent would be a useful tool for planning authorities to explore the vulnerability to this specific and pressing hazard.
UK Climate Projections 2018 (UKCP18)
Provider
License
Hazard Applicability
Usability
Met Office
OGL
All Hazards
Low
The Met Office is the authoritative source for key climate projection data for the UK. UKCP18 products are commonly used for temperature and precipitation projections, but it can also provide data on humidity, wind and sea level rise. The climate projections generally support analysis at a ‘neighbourhood’ to ‘regional’ level, dependent on the specific data UKCP18 product.
The Met Office provides a UKCP18 User Interface for querying and extracting the data, graphs and pre-paired maps (plus access to the full data catalogue for those experienced in handling large datasets), but this does require some expertise in the underlying data to navigate, limiting its usability to planning authorities that have GIS teams or capability. This was reflected in the workshops, as some participants expressed concern that the climate data accessed from the UKCP18 portal was sometimes difficult to use. In addition, there is further interpretation work required to convert a numerical value from the data into a clear indicator which can be used to influence a decision. This interpretation of the climate data and translation into implications for the LDP was also found challenging , with some planning authorities being unable to fully explore what the data means for their plan.
The UKCP18 data is a crucial underpinning to climate analysis and has been used by some planning authorities. More recently the data has been made more usable with a set of pre-prepared indicators by tools such as the Met Office Local Authority Climate Service (where GIS users can also visualise the mapped data and also add their own geospatial data), and UK Climate Risk Indicators.
GeoSure, GeoCoast and GeoClimate
Provider
License
Hazard Applicability
Usability
British Geological Survey (BGS)
OGL and Licensed
Rainfall & storms, sea level rise
Low
Participants expressed an interest in data from the British Geological Survey, which has the potential to address risks such as coastal erosion and landslides. The BGS GeoSure, GeoCoast and GeoClimate datasets indicate risks arising from multiple hazards, with a range of open and licensed datasets. The use of BGS data was not widespread among participants, partly due to the licensing cost associated with the premium datasets.
There may be more value to be gained from these datasets, but it would likely require the supporting geotechnical knowledge and interpretation, unless a simpler way of indicating future risks is provided.
Perceived gaps and ways to address gaps
When discussing risks, participants expressed several areas where they felt there was insufficient data available to meet their needs. This was due more to the limited understanding of what data was required to support the analysis, rather than specific datasets lacking appropriate spatial and temporal resolution or having gaps in coverage.
It should also be considered that if these data gaps were closed, what value would they provide to the evidence reports in each planning authority, and to what extent would the planning process be able to take useful action on the data. Urban heat islands serve as a useful example – while it would be possible to carry out a detailed analysis in each planning authority, for rural, or northerly authorities, the risk could be understood to be minimal by using an understanding of the local context and long term heat risk from tools like the Local Authority Climate Data Service (see 4.2.1).
In this section, we list the key gaps and explore some datasets and approaches which could be used to address those gaps.
Urban heat islands
Participants generally expressed a lack of data to understand the risks associated with the urban heat island (UHI) effect. The overheating risk methodology can be derived from both UKCCRA3 (Built Environment chapter) and the previous Environmental Audit Committee evidence reviews (e.g. 2018). Determining the extent of the effect of UHIs in urban areas can be done using a temperature sensor network (at high spatial resolution), modelling (e.g. using dedicated products such as Envi-MET, adapting more commonly used modelling approaches, e.g. atmospheric dispersion modelling systems (ADMS) (Zhong et al., 2024), or analysis of high-resolution satellite data products. However, these approaches may not be suitable for all planning authorities due to resource or lack of specialist knowledge. Overheating risk is likely to be greater in areas where urban form is compact, where there is less green and open space, and where the housing quality is poor. As such, combining datasets on Local Climate Zones (to give urban form), green space, and Scottish Index of Multiple Deprivation may act as a proxy for estimating urban heat island magnitude (e.g. Ferranti et al., 2023). Housing quality can also be indicated in further detail by Home Analytics data from the Energy Savings Trust which provides specific attributes on building fabric. This is a simpler approach using GIS datasets that planning authorities may be able to use for their evidence reports.
Storm and wind damage
While there are multiple datasets for inundation and coastal erosion, we did not find much work done to understand wind damage to buildings, or from trees. Tree fall risk is a statutory responsibility so it may be that planning authorities have some of this data held within parks or urban forestry teams. There are datasets which use remote sensing techniques to identify trees. One such dataset is National Tree Map from BlueSky – however, as this is a proprietary, licensed dataset it is unclear if the cost of this dataset outweighs the value which can be gained.
Landslides
While participants did discuss landslide risk, there was no broad consensus on the approach, nor most appropriate data. The open data published by the BGS could serve as a potential baseline assessment of current risk which, if found to be sufficiently high, further research could be carried out incorporating premium data, or input from specialists.
Health infrastructure
Data on the locations of key health infrastructure are available from NHS Scotland and accessible via the Spatial Hub. However, the use of these datasets in the context of the evidence reports would require further interpretation in order to drive decision making in the climate context. Whilst it would be possible to interpret which areas could be exposed to hazards such flooding and coastal erosion, understanding the magnitude of the risk on health infrastructure from hazards such as heating would require additional data to determine vulnerability such as building age and fabric. In the workshops, these aspects were not raised by participants, suggesting that this has not been a focus for planning authorities thus far.
Water infrastructure
Relevant data on water infrastructure, from Scottish Water for example, for the climate context is either available piecemeal, or not published. To understand which data would be required, planning authorities would need more knowledge as to which risks are likely to require water infrastructure data to assess.
Further observations
Wildfire risk was one aspect investigated by some planning authorities. Seasonal risk forecasts, as well as real-time monitoring is published by the European Forest Fire Information System[10] (EFFIS). This is a valuable resource for assessing the current risk landscape for fires, but additional context would be required for evaluating future risk (see UK-CRI in Section 4.3 above).
Datasets such as the Scottish Air Quality Database[11] provide information on air quality monitoring, analysis and interpretation of data, and pollutant trends at national and local levels. Historical data can also be accessed via the Met Office. Since these are observational datasets, they can be used for assessing current risk, but additional context would be required for evaluating future risk.
For more rural or agricultural planning authorities, there was also value in land use and land cover data from NatureScot, which allows risk to peatlands and croplands to be assessed. For coastal areas this data could also be analysed alongside Dynamic Coast data.
Based on the interviews and workshop discussions, participants expressed several areas where they had difficulty using data for specific outcomes or were not sure what to use.
Most of the datasets which were found to be of value for the evidence report were not hosted by a single source such as the Improvement Service Spatial Hub. The overhead effort of data acquisition for the planning authorities could be improved by more of the data providers providing a copy of their data to the Spatial Hub. However, this approach would not be straightforward with all datasets, such as those which are licensed (e.g. BGS), or those were the provider includes an analytical interface for extracting key indicators (Met Office LACS or UK-CRI).
Analytical tools
We reviewed several different analytical tools, such as CLIMADA[12] and OpenCLIM[13] which are designed to support users in analysing climate datasets and produce new data outputs indicating risk. These tools are open source, adaptable and suitable for academic use cases. In our interviews and workshops, we did not receive any feedback from planning authorities on these tools, suggesting they do not use them. As they require a high degree of specific technical proficiency (e.g. running python code), they may not be particularly suited to the planning authority teams who are producing evidence reports.
Current Approach
Climate Risk and Vulnerability Assessments
Climate Risk and Vulnerability Assessments (CRVAs) or Climate Change Risk Assessments (CCRAs) are available for some planning authorities and some regions of Scotland. These include the Clyde area, and one in preparation for south east Scotland.
Nationally, there is the UK CCRA Independent Assessment (Climate Change Committee, 2021a) and the National Summary for Scotland (Sniffer, 2021). These documents are long, difficult to navigate, and have a comprehensive list of wide-ranging risks. For anyone with limited familiarity with climate science and/or individual sectors, it is hard to understand which risks are most relevant to their planning authority or which risks are most important to planning. Risks in these documents are categorised with urgency and magnitude scores, and there is no scoring of impact or likelihood (apart from flooding likelihood) at a national, regional or local scale. Planning authorities need this information for their evidence report requirements, but it is not provided in the national CCRA3.
National documentation on adaptation (i.e. Scottish Climate Change Adaptation Programme: progress report 2023 to 2024) does not directly relate to local planning process and/or is difficult for the untrained person to see the links. The wider list of literature reviewed is given in Section 9.4.1.
Local climate risk assessment barriers and challenges – findings from the academic literature
Research related to mapping climate risk has increased rapidly in recent years. Studies are usually area- and problem-specific, which means that there is no standardised approach. Some maps focus on the local level, such as a city scale, but some have also looked nationally. Some also consider both spatial scales. Similarly, maps that assess climate risk can vary in perspective, such as focusing on one climate hazard because it disproportionately affects the study area the map is produced for. While many do take a multi-hazard approach, some focus on specific challenges such as heat, flooding, and drought.
Methodological process can also vary greatly across such assessments which may affect results so, for decision-makers, it can be challenging to decide which method is most appropriate to use. One key feature of many CRVA maps is the weighting of variables, which affects the extent of which specific variables may influence overall scoring. The SIMD dataset from the Scottish Government, as an example, weights income and employment indicators more heavily than housing in its determination of the deprivation index. However, in a climate risk context, a different weighting may be more appropriate. From a local perspective, weighting variables may be beneficial as they can provide more accurate results for decision-makers. However, in some cases it is difficult to achieve and an unweighted approach is preferred. Reasons can include
a lack of data or local studies
the risk of politicisation that may underpin the decisions upon weighting which links to subjectivity and
complexities around how different climate hazards may weight other variables differently.
Ultimately, adaptation to climate change should be a process that is iterative and embedded into organisational practices. Knowledge underpinning decisions may be imperfect, incomplete, or comprise other challenges such as those outlined above. It is important nevertheless that the process is started with the best knowledge and data available at the time. In repeating the process, more experience is gained, and the challenges can begin to be addressed (Greenham et al., 2024b).
Approach to the evidence report
Current position
In both the interviews and workshop, the planning authorities were at different stages of preparing their evidence reports. This ranged from those at very early stages of preparation through to authorities who have drafted their evidence report and received feedback from the Gate Check[14]. It is important to note that the small number of authorities having received the Gate Check at the point of the interviews and workshop, meaning a small sample may have impacted some of the feedback, alongside the relatively small sample of planning authorities that could be engaged during this short project.
The participants’ attitudes towards producing the evidence report were slightly more positive than their understanding of climate risks in general, with a generally positive sentiment (Figure 2)
Figure 2 – Sentiment captured during the workshop from the participants
Different approaches
The approaches used by planning authorities varied significantly, with different methods to identify data including policy review, evidence audits and workshops.
The teams undertaking evidence reports ranged in number of staff from 1-2 to 4-5 people. The use of specialist data or climate specialist colleagues in other departments within the planning authorities varied.
There appears to be a disparity on the anticipated timescales and resources required to undertake the evidence report. This depends on the extent to which planning authorities have already undertaken a climate change risk or vulnerability assessment and could be more reflective of local authority capabilities to conduct and deliver the output.
Some authorities have access to pre-prepared local or regional climate risk assessments or are part of existing climate ready projects (see Section 5.6). Others have access to climate change profiles, which provided an overview of expected future climate change. We also found some authorities had not explored climate risk and therefore had little existing evidence or experience to work from.
However, it was noted that even those planning authorities which had undertaken previous assessments found it difficult to access primary data. They were mainly using the conclusions of the past risk assessments to inform their evidence reports.
The implications of interpreting the data in a climate context and what the evidence actual means for informing or changing the local development plans was not always clear.
Using data to produce the reports
Concerns were raised by participants over the dynamic nature of the data, new data being published, and old data being updated. Not only did this make it hard to identify the latest datasets, but it also gave rise to concerns about evidence becoming out of date soon after reports were developed[15].
Concerns were also raised about the complex array of caveats and limitations that are inherent in much of the data. This included concerns about their own understanding and interpretation, and how these limitations should be portrayed in the reports in a non-technical manner.
Another issue raised was an inability to find locally specific data at a sub-local authority resolution; one local authority wanted to take a ‘neighbourhood’-level approach but felt that data did not exist to support this.
Data accessibility challenges
Challenges in accessing and fully utilising data exist at several points, and in ways which varied across planning authorities.
Firstly, a very broad set of potential datasets which could be used exists. The planning authorities had to locate many different data sources to compile the data they needed.
Next, the data needed to be downloaded and formatted from the different data sources and while most of the data required is licensable freely to planning authorities, we found a subset where the licensing implications and restrictions were unclear. In the case where the work was being carried out by organisations external to the planning authorities (e.g. Sniffer), additional barriers were faced as access to PSGA licensed data is not immediately granted, and additional contractor licenses need to be provided. PSGA contractor licenses are free, and they limit the scope of external use of the data to specifically the contracted work.
Once the data is obtained, its application to understanding climate risks and hazards is not always straightforward. Some information is in a readily usable format, while others require expert input before analysis is possible. In the case of datasets such as Dynamic Coast, or data presented via the Met Office Local Authority Climate Service, data is pre-transformed and interpreted in a climate context. As an example, the Met Office LACS provides simple indices such as “Average Number of Extreme Summer Days”. This contrasts with datasets such as UKCP18, where a user will need to download the dataset, isolate the area of interest, extract the climate values, and determine what metric to rate them against. This is a time-consuming process, requiring both geospatial and climate expertise.
Understanding how to link the data back to the guidance and the requirements of the evidence report is a key required outcome, and the extent to which accessing this insight from the data can be achieved varies widely across the datasets used.
Understanding climate risks
Concerns were expressed in the workshop by participants from smaller planning and development teams about resourcing, where there was little or no dedicated resource within the team, or even access to a dedicated individual with climate change knowledge. This makes the process more difficult and time consuming for these planning authorities.
Risks vary from area to area, but additionally will vary over time as the climate changes. We found that many workshop participants were focused on a current view of risk, rather than being informed on how risks might change based on future projections. Risks across different hazard areas discussed, and whether they seemed well represented or potentially underrepresented in the workshops are outlined in Table 1. Additionally, not all planning authorities had fully defined which hazards were most appropriate for their region.
Given many planning authorities already have a track record in modelling flood risk, and have a greater understanding of flood risks specifically, there is a heavy focus on flooding. There is less awareness of other climate risks, specifically future climate risks, and how they may relate to development planning. In some cases, there is confusion between climate mitigation (through reduction of greenhouse gas emissions) and adaption to reduce climate risk.
The value of pre-existing work
In some instances, planning authorities were (or will be) able to build upon pre-existing work. Of particular value is work focused on climate risk, and the production of data layers specifically to allow easy interpretation from a wide range of users.
The data and findings from examples like Climate Ready Clyde and Climate Ready South East Scotland can be re-used and built upon for consistency, as well as reducing the effort required for an evidence report specifically. However, planning authorities who have not benefited from these will be at a relative disadvantage.
Climate Ready Clyde
Climate Ready Clyde (CRC)[16] is a leading cross-sector initiative funded by 12 member organisations and supported by Scottish Government to create and deliver a shared vision, strategy and action plan for an adapting Glasgow City Region. CRC have produced Glasgow City Region’s Adaptation Strategy and Action Plan (Sniffer, 2024a) which includes a webmap (created by Clydeplan) that shows the location of postcodes most vulnerable to the impacts of climate change (Clydeplan, 2022). This includes heat risk (derived from the 4EI Heat Hazard Index[17]) and a layer highlighting postcodes within the top two heat risk bands. The work from CRC on the Climate Risk and Opportunity Assessment and data layers in the vulnerability map directly informed Glasgow City Council’s Evidence report.
Figure 3 – Glasgow City Region Climate Vulnerability Map
Climate Ready South East Scotland
A new project to support collaborative climate action in the Edinburgh and south east Scotland City Region. Climate Ready South East Scotland[18] is led by Sniffer, working in partnership with the region’s six local authorities: City of Edinburgh, East Lothian, Fife, Midlothian, Scottish Borders and West Lothian.
Climate Ready South East Scotland plans to:
Identify and prioritise the risks and opportunities from climate change to Edinburgh and south east Scotland’s society, economy and environment between now and 2080.
Lay the foundation for a transformational approach to climate adaptation and resilience for the city region.
Support a just transition to a net zero and climate resilient economy, in a way that delivers fairness and tackles inequality and injustice.
A detailed assessment of the climate risks and opportunities faced by the Edinburgh and south east Scotland City Region will be carried out, and is intended to be published by March 2025. This assessment will both draw on the best available scientific evidence, and work with communities across the region to gather and share their experiences of climate change. It will inform decision-making across the region, laying the foundation for collaborative climate adaptation action (Sniffer, 2024b).
We collated six overall observations, looking across the literature review, interviews and workshop.
A focus on flooding and a lack of awareness of available non-flood data
Knowledge and understanding of flood risk and applicable datasets is much more established with planning authorities. While this experience is valuable, it does lead to a focus on flooding to the detriment of the consideration of other risks.
In general, the participants revealed a lack of awareness around climate change projection data, including where to source it and how to use it. As an example, whilst some participants with backgrounds and expertise in climate had knowledge of the data, planners in general were far less familiar with UKCP18 data, when asked about data they used. Most questions on data were directed back to flood information. In one interview, when questioned more on UKCP18 there appeared to be no knowledge of where this data can be located and how to access it. Some statements suggested a lack of understanding of what climate projections are and different scenarios used, however this was not fully probed in the interviews. This data is key in understanding the risks that planning authorities will face in the future and the degree of potential impact.
Spatial data not always used
The use of spatial data appears limited even though the use of it in evidence reports is supported by the Local Development Planning Guidance (Scottish Government, 2023b). Whilst some spatial datasets are well known by planning authorities (e.g. SEPA flood maps) the use of further datasets is not extensive due to poor understanding of the geospatial data required and/or ability and access to staff with the right skills to use and interpret geospatial data.
Simple indices support interpretation
Interviewees generally favoured datasets which provide simple indices tailored to the climate risk context, such as SEPA flood maps and Dynamic Coast. These datasets allow interpretation by users without specific climate or data expertise. This contrasts with the UKCP18 data, as an example, which provides users with hazard data like temperature and rainfall values over time. Considerable interpretation would need to be done to translate this data into a measure of risk which can be interpreted. Users without climate or geospatial data experience can be supported in understanding the implications if the data is pre-prepared, and presented with relatively simple indicators.
Section 9.2 provides examples of tools and datasets which have been developed outwith Scotland, used to support users without climate expertise in understanding risks.
Simplification of the approach is needed
There is a need to simplify the approach that planners adopt, to enable them to incorporate climate adaptation into their plans. The evidence report is an important part of this process to help development of a baseline and support understanding of the climate risks faced by planning authorities now and in the future. To do this, a Climate Risk and Vulnerability Assessment (CRVA), which considers key hazard, vulnerability and exposure data, is a valuable prerequisite to identify those risks which can be mitigated by planning. Spatial data is key to undertaking an accurate and specific assessment, although there is currently no simple tool to support it. An example of this would be the methods and approach taken by the University of Birmingham for work done for one local authority (Birmingham) and one regional authority (West Midlands) in England (see Section 9.2). Aside from a tool, authorities would benefit from greater understanding of the key datasets which provide the best outcomes. This mirrors findings from the evidence report gate checks completed to date.
Prior work and climate data skills are advantageous
There was a general observation (which was also identified by several stakeholders) that some planning authorities faced greater challenges in the evidence report process. This is because they have little prior work on climate risk, less technical data skills within the team and no dedicated climate change professional within the Council.
Planning support and guidance is not specific on the application of data
The literature review illustrates that there is little information on climate risks and resilience that is written to support either local authority planners or the evidence report process. There is a wide range of data available, which could be used in many different approaches to be applied to understanding climate risk and appropriate adaptations. Furthermore, there is a gap in knowledge on how climate risk impacts planning and how planners can enhance climate resilience through planning requirements and the local development plan. Such information contextualised for Scottish planners would be invaluable to support the evidence report process and would allow adaptation to become business as usual within planning processes.
Conclusions
The following conclusions drawn from this research project to improve the evidence base for climate resilient planning policy are:
Accessibility and usability of data
There are numerous and varied datasets required to consider the range of vulnerabilities to, and impacts from, climate risks. There are several key datasets which are underutilised by planning authorities currently.
Many planning authorities do not have a clear and specific understanding of what data is needed to assess climate risk and vulnerabilities. The accompanying Briefing Note for Scottish Planning authorities to this research report (see Section 9.5) should provide support in providing signposted usable data.
Significant data gaps exist for urban heat islands, storm damage, health, water infrastructure and landslides. Proxies can be used, e.g. combining urban form, green space, and housing quality to assess urban heat island risk. However, consideration should be taken to ensure a consistent methodology, and a proportional amount of effort given potential risk.
The most useable and accessible data sources, such SEPA, Dynamic Coast, and Met Office LACS provide pre-determined, simple indices which provide a clear indication of climate risk. These allow planners to make clear decisions, without having to apply climate or data expertise to determine risk themselves.
Not all datasets provide simple indices, however, there are several datasets which could be used by planning authorities in the evidence reports which are not widely used currently. A consistent methodology for planners on how the indicators can be derived and used to incorporate adaptation and resilience into local planning would be advantageous.
Longer term, a single entry-point to these datasets would make this process easier for the planners and ensure that all Planning authorities have similar data to undertake the assessments
The data required is also mostly free for planning authorities, however, there are some licensing differences to be aware of when publishing to the public. See 9.1.2 – Data Licensing for further detail.
Accessibility could also be improved with further guidance on certain requirements mean and how they can be achieved. For example, the requirements ask planning authorities to assess the likelihood of risks occurring. This is a complex task, requiring knowledge of the climate hazards, how they will change, uncertainties, the ranges of climate outcomes depending on scenarios. Guidance on how to define likelihood and how to use data to evaluate likelihood is important, and can be paired with a specific indication of which dataset can be used for that purpose.
Understanding and capacity
Planning authorities find it time-consuming and difficult to get the required data from all the different providers.
Undertaking climate change risk assessments prior to the evidence report would provide a better understanding of which risks and hazards are most impactful.
However, planning authorities may need help doing this (especially the smaller planning authorities and/or those without climate and GIS and data experts), including:
Direct funding to outsource.
Support to identify partners and apply for funding.
Sharing or secondment of staff with climate resilience/climate science and GIS and data skills.
Collaboration and co-funding with neighbouring/regional planning authorities, like the ‘Climate Ready’ regional projects.
As an example, Sniffer is an independent charity that supports and coordinates the climate ready programmes in Scotland, including work such as webinars which discuss the use of different datasets. Sniffer currently hold a Scottish Government funded contract (Adaptation Scotland) to provide some capacity building support to planning authorities. This could be expanded to provide wider support for the climate change risk assessment process and support planners in translating the findings into the evidence report and the local development plans.
It should also be noted that the assessment of likelihood of risks occurring, beyond flood risk, is not undertaken in the UKCCRA3 or Scotland’s national summary.
It is useful to understand and address vulnerability at the evidence report stage, although stakeholders did not seem familiar with this as a concept or how it might be assessed.
Potential for action
Based on the findings from this research, the following actions could be explored in the short term to enhance and improve the coverage and usefulness of evidence reports:
Engage with the Met Office for a review of planner-specific user experience when accessing the latest UK Climate Projections (UKCP18)
The impression from most stakeholders was that UKCP18 projections are daunting and avoided by planners. The Met Office Local Authority Climate Service (LACS) (Met Office, 2024a) is still in beta, and feedback should be provided on how it could further meet the needs of Scottish planners.
Explore whether non-flood related climate data could be sourced directly via an existing data service for the creation of bespoke Climate Risk and Vulnerability Assessment indices and geospatial data portal relevant to planning in Scotland.
Explore the inclusion of features to support the National Park planning authorities in the LACS.
Engage with the British Geological Survey (BGS) to explore expansion of access for the assessment of landslide risk – and potential inclusion of licensed data.
Provide planners with further detail on which aspects of various datasets are valuable for their local plans, including the climate risks which planning should address (e.g. overheating, surface water flooding).
Encourage cross-authority engagement and collaboration. Given the inconsistent availability of knowledge, skills and capacity, peer learning and support can potentially provide a valuable approach to improving quality and consistency.
Share and promote the list of data (from this research) as a standalone resource, cross referenced with the relevant climate risks. See accompanying data catalogue (Section 9.5).
This research also clarifies which data licences may be required to support evidence report production, and further guidance on the impacts of the different license types.
Investigate funding options for regional Climate Risk and Vulnerability Assessments. As a first step, a CRVA provides a clear steer on what the key risks are, therefore allowing a more targeted approach to the Evidence reports.
Scope out the requirements for a Climate Risk and Vulnerability Assessment data platform for centralising the hosting of key datasets. In addition, this should include the development of new datasets and indicators which allow interpretation to non-climate, or non-geospatial users more easily. This could be delivered as a new tool or an extension to an existing one.
There is potential in the longer term to make the key national datasets available, with pre-interpreted indices available in one location. The data could have simple (e.g. high, medium, low) indices with user friendly guidance on what the data is, what it means and caveats (this could be 4-5 key hazards, with a climate vulnerability index). It could link directly to the datasets that have been identified in this report and could also potentially use some of the data from the analytics tools. This would require further research and dialogue with potential providers.
Ferranti, E., Cook, S., Greenham, S.V., Grayson, N., Futcher, J. and Salter, K., (2023) Incorporating Heat Vulnerability into Local Authority Decision Making: An Open Access Approach. Sustainability, 15(18), p.13501. https://doi.org/10.3390/su151813501
Grace, E., Marcinko, C., Paterson, C., & Stobbs, W. (2025). Using future climate scenarios to support today’s decision making. CXC/Government Actuary’s Department.
Greenham, SV., Jones, SA., Ferranti, EJS., Zhong, J., Acton, WJF., MacKenzie, AR., Grayson, N., (2023) Mapping climate risk and vulnerability with publicly available data. A guidance document produced by the WM-Air project, University of Birmingham. Available online: https://doi.org/10.25500/epapers.bham.00004259 [last accessed October 2024]
Greenham, S, Ferranti, E, Jones, S, Zhong, J, Grayson, N, Needle, S, Acton, J, MacKenzie, AR & Bloss, W. (2024a) An open access approach to mapping climate risk and vulnerability for decision-making: A case study of Birmingham, United Kingdom, Climate Services, vol. 36, 100521. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.cliser.2024.100521
Greenham, SV., Ferranti, EJS., Cork, NA., Jones, SA., Zhong, J., Haskins, B., Grayson, N., Needle, S., Acton, WJF., MacKenzie, AR., Bloss, WJ. (2024b). Mapping climate risk and vulnerability in the West Midlands. A guidance document produced by the WM-Air project, University of Birmingham. https://doi.org/10.25500/epapers.bham.00004371
IPCC (2014a). Summary for policymakers. In: Climate Change 2014: Impacts, Adaptation, and Vulnerability. Part A: Global and Sectoral Aspects. Contribution of Working Group II to the Fifth Assessment Report of the Intergovernmental Panel on Climate Change. Cambridge University Press, Cambridge, United Kingdom and New York, NY, USA, pp. 1-32. Available at https://www.ipcc.ch/report/ar5/wg2/.
Scottish Government (2023a) The Town and Country Planning (Development Planning) (Scotland) Regulations 2023. Available online at: https://www.legislation.gov.uk/ukpga/1997/8/contents [last accessed October 2024].
Sniffer (2024a) Climate Ready Clyde, Building a more resilient, prosperous and fairer Glasgow City Region. Available online: https://climatereadyclyde.org.uk/ [last accessed October 2024].
Sniffer (2024b) Climate Ready South East Scotland, Supporting regional climate action in the Edinburgh and South East Scotland City Region. Available online: https://climatereadyses.org.uk/about/ [last accessed October 2024]
UK Climate Change Committee (2021a) Independent Assessment of UK Climate Risk
Zhong, J, Lu, Y, Stocker, J, Hamilton, V & Johnson, K. (2024) Modelling the urban heat island in Birmingham, UK at the neighbourhood scale. In EGU General Assembly 2024., EGU24-19930, EGU General Assembly 2024, Vienna, Austria, 14/04/24. https://doi.org/10.5194/egusphere-egu24-19930
Appendices
Definition of Terms
Usability
Usability is summarised as follows:
‘High’ – a dataset which provides simple indices in a climate hazard and risk context and access and can be interpreted easily. Users will not need specific GIS or climate expertise to understand planning outcomes from these datasets.
‘Medium’ – data is relatively accessible but requires expertise to interpret or transform. To understand the data in a climate hazard and risk context, as well as planning outcomes, specific expertise in either climate, or GIS will be required.
‘Low’ – a dataset which requires specialist knowledge, expertise or skills. Extensive expertise, as well as time and effort will need to be applied to this data in order to arrive at indicators that can be used to make planning decisions.
Data Licensing
The information is provided as guidance on the description and general consequences of the common license types encountered for data. However, care should always be taken to ensure that if any data is used, the license and its limits should be validated before use or distribution.
Table 9.1 – Relevant data licences and their impact on planning authorities
License Name
Description
Outcomes for planning authorities
Link
OGL – Open Government License
A UK government defined license that encourages the public sharing of government created data
OGL generally supports data being used for most purposes internally at a local authority, and shared publicly in full
The license under which premium Ordnance Survey data is licensed to UK central and local governments
The PSGA license generally supports planning authorities in using data internally for all government functions. However, the data cannot be published and shared publicly in full. OS provides details on the full obligations.[19]
A permissive public copyright license that enables the free distribution of copyrighted work
CC-BY generally supports data being used for most purposes internally at a local authority, and shared publicly in full, so long as attribution is given.
There are many sub types of Creative Commons licenses, so refer to the Creative Commons site for more details
BSD is licenses are generally for software rather than data, but it is a very permissive license that imposes few limits on what can be done – a local authority could use BSD licensed software for any use internally, and then publish publicly in full
Climate Risk Vulnerability Assessment methods – the University of Birmingham
A Climate Risk and Vulnerability Assessment (CRVA) map is a method co-developed by the WM-Air project team at the University of Birmingham with local and regional stakeholders across Birmingham and the West Midlands. A CRVA map shows how geospatial climate risk data may be used by local planning authorities. It is pulled together using different environmental, physical, and socio-economic datasets to understand how climate risk varies across an area. The mapping approach prioritises using publicly accessible data and can be replicated by other planning authorities to improve climate resilience (Greenham et al., 2023).
Figure 4 – Birmingham City Council Climate Risk and Vulnerability Assessment map
Birmingham City Council recently published their CRVA (Greenham et al., 2023) on the city’s website (Birmingham City Council, 2024). The CRVA map scores areas of Birmingham based on compiling the presence and extent of 11 different factors that may influence the impact of climate change, where the higher the score, the more at-risk and vulnerable an area and its citizens are likely to be to climate change. The approach is considered a Minimum Viable Product (MVP), i.e. it works, and refinements can be made through use.
West Midlands Climate Risk and Vulnerability Assessment (WM-CRVA) Map
Figure 5 – West Midlands Combined Authority Climate Risk and Vulnerability Assessment Map
The University of Birmingham also collaborated with the West Midlands Combined Authority (WMCA); co-developing a CRVA map for the wider West Midlands (Greenham et al., 2024a). It takes forward the Birmingham MVP approach by including greater consideration of vulnerability. The overall CRVA map scores are based on 24 different factors, each of which is considered one of either a hazard, vulnerability, or exposure factor influencing climate risk.
Methodology
Our approach included two key phases the Discovery phase and the Analysis phase. The discovery phase involved a continuation of planning and refining the scope, and identifying the key tasks needed to ensure we had the full background and context to successfully undertake the research. The Analysis phase involved the main research tasks, including stakeholder engagement and a deep dive analysis of currently available climate risk and hazard data. Both are described in more detail below.
Discovery Phase
A desktop literature review was conducted (August 2024). The literature included covered information on climate change methods, past climate risk or vulnerability studies (where spatial data was used), and information relevant to climate risk in Scotland as well as the latest policy documents around climate adaptation for Scotland. Here we identified which risks were commonly highlighted within Scotland and what data has been used by others to represent those risks. As well as summarising the key policies relevant to the topic climate change risk and adaptation for the Evidence reports. The literature review findings were summarised in an excel spreadsheet. The full references to the literature are included in Appendix Literature review (Section 9.4.1).
Three of the currently available evidence reports were also reviewed, this allowed us to understand the current work by planning authorities and what approaches they took. We also began to identify gaps between the produced Evidence reports and the requirements.
A long list of potential workshop invitees was developed, this was to be refined within the analysis phase.
Identified a proposed list of relevant data with key search parameters for deep dive assessment. Research partners the University of Birmingham shared the data lists for both their CRVA mapping projects for Birmingham City Council and the West Midlands Combined Authority for review in the context of identifying the same UK wide datasets of their Scottish equivalents.
Set out an initial stakeholder engagement plan for the approach to both the interviews and a workshop, which was reviewed by and agreed with CXC.
Analysis Phase
Undertook the dataset deep dive and identified key practical characteristics including cost, availability, and accessibility
In the stakeholder engagement plan the approach for both the interviews and workshops were also set out. For the interviews we identified a list of stakeholders, this included three planning authorities that had or were in the process of undertaking the Evidence reports. We asked to speak to relevant individuals who had written the reports or who would be or were significantly involved in gathering climate evidence. Here, knowledge gained from the literature review was used to develop appropriate questions to help us better understand the local authority’s approach to gathering evidence, their understanding of the requirements and any difficulties they had faced or anticipated facing, and confidence with the topic (a full list of the interview questions can be found in Appendix Interview responses, Section 9.4.2).
When selecting stakeholders for both interviews and workshops we aimed to get a mix of stages within the development report process. We also ensured we had a good geographic spread of participants representing the wide range of planning authorities in Scotland. This included, coastal, city based, and Island based planning authorities.
During this analysis phase we held three interviews with representatives of Fife Council (21st August 2024), Comhairle Nan Eilean Siar (28th August 2024) and Glasgow City Council (3rd September 2024). Interviews included multiple members of the Arup team representing planning, Climate and data expertise as well as a note taker. All interviews were recorded with the permission of the participants. Interview findings were summarised in Appendix Interview responses (Section 9.4.2).
After the initial interviews a virtual ‘Prioritisation Workshop’ (17th September 2024) which included representatives from the planning authorities we interviewed, other planning authorities (across a geographic spread and at differing stages in their LDP) and other relevant wider stakeholders (such as representative from Sniffer). The workshop was developed using the findings of the interviews, so that the activities probed at areas of interest and or areas not fully covered by the interviews. The aim of this workshop was to further discuss how planning authorities can improve their access to geospatial data for climate adaptation.
Underlying assumptions
CXC facilitated introductions to key stakeholders for engagement. Engagements were virtual, via Microsoft Teams.
The sample of planning authorities involved was not aiming to be extensive or include all Scottish LPAs, given the scope, size and duration of this research project, but aimed to have good representation across geography, size and stage of progress with the Evidence report.
Literature review and stakeholder engagement
Literature review
A desktop literature review was conducted during the discovery phase, and a full list of references is provided here.
Table 9.3: Full list of references for literature review
Full reference
Link
Birmingham City Council (2024) Climate Risk and Vulnerability Assessment map.
Centre for Sustainable Energy and the Town and Country Planning Association (2023) Spatial planning for Climate resilience and Net Zero (CSE&TCPA). UK Climate Change Committee
Greenham, SV., Ferranti, EJS., Cork, NA., Jones, SA., Zhong, J., Haskins, B., Grayson, N., Needle, S., Acton, WJF., MacKenzie, AR., Bloss, WJ. (2024b). Mapping climate risk and vulnerability in the West Midlands. A guidance document produced by the WM-Air project, University of Birmingham
Greenham, SV., Jones, SA., Ferranti, EJS., Zhong, J., Acton, WJF., MacKenzie, AR., Grayson, N., 2023. Mapping climate risk and vulnerability with publicly available data. A guidance document produced by the WM-Air project, University of Birmingham.
Scottish Government / Riaghaltas an h-Alba (2024) Draft Scottish National Adaptation Plan (2024-2029): Actions today, for a climate resilient future. 31 January 2024.
This section provides the interview questions and a summary of the answer given by all three planning authorities interviewed.
Q1: What is your role in preparing the Evidence report?
Most stakeholders interviewed were planning officers based in planning services or equivalent.
Teams working on this topic of the Evidence report ranged from 1-2 to 4-5 members of staff as the core team. Though generally one or two key individuals took responsibility or a key co-ordination role.
Use of expertise outside of teams also varied including some drawing on data individuals or climate and sustainability officers.
Q2: What is the status of your Evidence report? And what are the next steps?
Ranged from early stages of prep to just complete and complete and addressing feedback.
Q3: How clear to you were the requirements / guidance for assessing climate risk through the Evidence report?
Responses to this question were mixed, some stated the guidance “left a lot open to interpretation”, feeling it was hard to understand what they actually needed to do.
One Local Authority said the guidance was clear in answer to this question but after further probing it appeared they were not sure on several of the elements within the requirements.
One response stated that requirements were easier to interpret due to knowledge of other resources.
Q4: How did you assess climate risk/climate change within your Evidence report?
In one interview the approach had not been developed and it was too early to discuss.
The other two planning authorities relied heavily on information that had been previously produced for the area, such as past climate profiles or regional risk assessments. Using this information and interpreting it rather than new information or raw data designed specifically for the Evidence report.
One Local Authority took a place-based approach but struggled with assessing climate risk on this level.
Q5: How have you assessed vulnerability to climate change and inequalities?
This question was generally not well answered indicating that there was a lack of understanding on the requirements around assessing vulnerability.
One Local Authority alluded to have a copy of a vulnerability index, but not sure where it was sourced from (potentially from SEPA).
Q6: Do you know what datasets were required to undertake climate risk assessment?
One Council in the early stages indicated that they did not yet know what datasets would be required to complete assessments but were aware of the recommended data sets.
Another realised on using report summarising previous regional risk assessments and interpreted screenshots from these reports. They had tried to get the data but had difficulty locating/accessing it.
Generally, when talking about data the focus was flood data. No participant mentioned raw climate projection data. Heat hazard data was mentioned by a single Local Authority but in the context of difficulties getting the data.
Q7: Do you know how to/have the ability to access them (within the team)?
Answers for this question were mixed some had dedicated contacts they could reach out too for data others stated they struggled knowing which data was relevant.
When probed there generally seemed to be a lack of knowledge on what data was out there, without even thinking about how to access, use and interpret the data.
General staff resources were flagged as an issue and time needed to use datasets.
One Local Authority had external GIS support for these kind of tasks from a cross local authority collaboration to share resource, with a 2-year secondment, though this was a resource with a limited timescale.
Q8: Is there anything else you would like to share about the process?
One set of interviews mentioned that they were beginning to realise the size and scope of the task of gathering and analysing climate risk data as they begin process of evidence gathering.
One Local Authority mentioned concern about understanding how all of this actually linked into to planning and how in general the evidence would be used to influence planning.
One also mentioned they had a lot of support from their climate team and could sense check and problem solve with their guidance. This was an invaluable resource.
Workshop
Arup and the University of Birmingham undertook a stakeholder workshop on 17 September 2024 for ClimateXChange Scotland and the Scottish Government on Improving access to geospatial climate risk data. The purpose of this workshop was to discuss together how planning authorities can improve their access to geospatial data for climate adaptation in the context of development planning.
The online workshop brought together planning authorities (across a geographic spread and at differing stages in their LDP) to better understand their needs as a local planning authority and/or climate policy team:
to prepare Evidence reports,
as users of this geospatial climate risk data and;
understand any current challenges or gaps that need addressing
The workshop provided information on key hazards and risks the planning authorities had been or anticipated focussing on and what data would or had been used. The workshop built on the interviews by delving deeper into the data and methods of analysis. Providing further insight on data gaps, ease of use and challenges faced by the planning authorities.
Additional Resources
Data catalogue
The data catalogue spreadsheet is available online:
While every effort is made to ensure the information in this report is accurate, no legal responsibility is accepted for any errors, omissions or misleading statements. The views expressed represent those of the author(s), and do not necessarily represent those of the host institutions or funders.
This work was supported by the Rural and Environment Science and Analytical Services Division of the Scottish Government (CoE – CXC).
The LDP is required under The Town and Country Planning (Scotland) Act 1997 (Scottish Government, 1997), as amended by the Planning (Scotland) Act 2019 (Scottish Government, 2019). Relevant secondary legislation and published guidance includes The Town and Country Planning (Development Planning) (Scotland) Regulations 2023 (Scottish Government, 2023a) as well as Local Development Planning Guidance (Scottish Government, 2023b). ↑
A detailed description of licensing terms and their implication, such as OGL, PSGA, BSD and CC-BY are provided in 9.1.2 – Data Licensing ↑
The relevance of the dataset to the hazard groups as discussed with participants. Definitions are shown in Table 1 ↑
Captures ease of use by local authority officials. See 9.1.1 – Usability for more detail ↑
Administered by the Planning and Environmental Appeals Division, the Gate Check is a process through which the sufficiency of the evidence report is assessed, to confirm there is a sound evidence base on which to prepare a Local Development Plan ↑
From an LDP guidance perspective the evidence available at the time of writing the report is proportionate and sufficient. ↑
The agriculture policies outlined in the Update to the Climate Change Plan (CCP) provide a route map for agricultural transformation to reduce greenhouse gas emissions. They take a co-development approach and work with stakeholders and farmer-led groups to secure increased uptake of low-emission farming measures through new schemes and approaches.
This project examined the potential reductions in livestock methane emissions through breeding, and the policy levers that could motivate these changes.
Findings
Breeding could reduce methane emissions from the digestive process in livestock by up to 9.5% by 2045.
Actions and behaviour changes will be required of Government policymakers, pre- and post-farm gate actors and farmers, with key barriers being lack of knowledge and perceived cost.
Scotland has a well-developed research base around breeding livestock for reduced emissions, placing it in good stead to develop further work in this area.
Relevant technologies that could be mainstream in Scotland by 2030 include a national breeding programme, sexed semen and the breeding potential of an animal for a specific trait.
There are very few instances of methane detection methods being used on farm in the UK. The use of proxies such as mid-infrared spectra in milk could be encouraged to determine methane emissions.
There are many reproductive technologies already in use, particularly in the dairy industry. The report estimates these to be mainstream across the cattle sector by 2045, with lower uptake in the sheep sector due to artificial insemination being a complex procedure.
For further details, please read the report.
If you require the report in an alternative format, such as a Word document, please contact info@climatexchange.org.uk or 0131 651 4783.
The agriculture policies outlined in the Update to the Climate Change Plan (CCP) provide a route map for agricultural transformation, to reduce greenhouse gas emissions. They take a co-development approach and work with stakeholders and farmer-led groups to secure increased uptake of low-emission farming measures through new schemes and approaches.
This project examined the potential reductions in livestock methane emissions through breeding, and the policy levers that could motivate these changes.
We began by exploring the technologies that detect and measure methane, manage data and are used in the breeding process. This included considering the availability of these technologies in Scotland in 2030 and 2045, with practical considerations for a Scottish context, and identifying the breeding traits that can lead to lower methane emissions.
We then identified the relevant policy levers and behaviour changes and considered what Government, the post-farm market, pre-farm gate actors and farmers can do differently to encourage methane reductions through breeding.
Key findings
By 2045, breeding could reduce methane emissions from the digestive process in livestock, known as enteric methane, by up to 9.5% (382.2 kt CO2 equivalent). This is under the “Policy changes” scenario, where legislation will require farmers to introduce methane reducing breeding techniques to their herds (with uptake rates of 100% in dairy, 80% in beef, and 60% in sheep).
This includes a 6.8% reduction in emissions from beef, 6% from dairy and 17.5% from sheep.
This reduction is achieved by selecting traits for methane efficiency (methane production, intensity and yield), feed efficiency, offspring carcass weight, milk yield and milk fat and protein when choosing breeding stock.
Our research highlighted selective breeding for feed efficiency as a promising option. This is because, despite its lower methane reduction potential, it builds on a practice that is already well understood by farmers.
To achieve emission reductions, actions and behaviour changes will be required of Government policymakers, pre- and post-farm gate actors and farmers. We found key barriers were lack of knowledge and perceived cost.
Scotland has a well-developed research base around breeding livestock for reduced emissions, placing it in good stead to develop further work in this area. Funding could be targeted towards building on this research, with more data points to support innovation and enhance the robustness of results. Further research could include the potential for a specific methane reduction target to increase clarity and focus action. Funding would be useful if targeted to better communication of the research findings to inform farm advisers, pre- and post-farm actors and supporting farmer peer-to-peer learning. Collaboration between stakeholder groups will achieve greater progress.
Relevant technologies include methods to detect and measure enteric methane in animals, data management, reproductive technologies and genomics. Those that could be mainstream in Scotland by 2030 include a national breeding programme, sexed semen and the breeding potential of an animal for a specific trait, known as estimated breeding values. The interaction between technologies is key to success. For instance, the wide use of data management tools will depend on the wide use of genomics to collect data.
We found very few instances of methane detection methods being used on farm in the UK. We therefore believe it is unlikely these will be used beyond research and innovators by 2045. As such, we recommend encouraging the use of proxies such as mid-infrared (MIR) spectra in milk to determine methane emissions.
Many reproductive technologies are already in use, particularly in the dairy industry, so we estimate these to be mainstream across the cattle sector by 2045. We estimate lower uptake in the sheep sector due to artificial insemination being a complex procedure. However, as sheep start breeding at an early age and often have multiple births per animal, there is greater potential for emission reductions if low-emitting traits are introduced into the herd such as through a ram.
On this basis, we think there is a strong foundation for breeding for reduced methane emissions to contribute to Scottish Government’s methane and climate commitments and to support Scottish livestock farmers’ future resilience.
Glossary / Abbreviations
AI
Artificial insemination
DNA
Deoxyribonucleic acid is an organic chemical that contains genetic information and instructions for protein synthesis
EBVs
Estimated breeding values
DMI
Dry Matter Intake
FAO
Food and Agriculture Organisation
Gene
A genetic sequence that contains information on specific traits.
Genetic modification
Any process by which genes are changed or deleted in order to adjust a certain characteristic of an organism. It is the manipulation of traits at the cellular level.
Genetic selection
Selecting for specific genes that carry desirable traits.
Genetics
The study of how genes are passed down from one generation to the next.
GHG
Greenhouse gas
CO2
Carbon dioxide
ICBF
Irish Cattle Breeding Federation
Methane
A powerful greenhouse gas, a chemical compound with the chemical formula CH4.
Microbes
Microscopic organisms
Microbiome
A collection of microbes (e.g. bacteria) that occur in the rumen.
NERC
Natural Environment Research Council
PAC
Portable Accumulation Chambers
Precision breeding
Amends sections of DNA by adding or moving genetic material
Proxy
An object/thing that is being used in the place of something else
REA
Rapid evidence assessment
Rumen
The specialised stomach of a ruminant (e.g. cow) that digests feed by microbial fermentation.
Ruminant
Animals, including cattle and sheep, that have more than one stomach and have the ability to bring food up from their stomach and chew it again.
Selective breeding
Choosing animals that carry desirable traits to be bred so that the traits are passed on to their offspring.
Traits
Specific characteristics that are genetically determined.
Introduction
Methane is a powerful greenhouse gas (GHG), 28 times more potent than CO2, produced as a by-product of the ruminant digestive process called enteric fermentation. During enteric fermentation, microbes digest feed in a specialised stomach, known as the rumen, subsequently releasing enteric methane. In 2021, enteric fermentation from ruminant livestock, such as cattle and sheep, was responsible for 48% of GHG emissions from agriculture in Scotland.
The UK signed the Paris Agreement, committing to limit global warming to 1.5°C and is a signatory of the Global Methane Pledge, aiming to reduce global methane emissions by at least 30% from 2020 levels by 2030. The Climate Change (Emissions Reduction Targets) (Scotland) Act 2019 outlines a net zero target for Scotland by 2045, with a 75% reduction in emissions by 2030. The strategy to meet these targets is laid out in Scotland’s Climate Change Plan (CCP) 2018-2032 and Climate Change Plan Update (CCPU).
One potential way to reduce emissions from the livestock sector is to select breeding traits in livestock that lead to lower methane emissions.
Traditional breeding programmes select cows or ewes producing offspring with desirable characteristics to either produce meat, milk or fibre, or to continue in the breeding herd. This method relies on waiting for the offspring to mature before the desired traits can be identified. The use of genetic technologies allows desired traits to be chosen at the point of breeding, giving a more assured outcome at an earlier stage.
Genetics are already used to facilitate precision breeding to improve livestock performance. As genetic changes are permanent and cumulative, it is an attractive option for targeting and reducing GHG emissions from ruminants (González-Recio et al., 2020; Manzanilla-Pech et al., 2021; Rowe et al., 2021).
Scottish research is at the forefront in breeding livestock for reduced methane. A recent project by the Roslin Institute highlighted the strong relationship between the rumen microbiome and methane emissions; SRUC has several relevant research studies (published and ongoing), with research facilities such as GreenCow measuring GHG emissions, and Moredun has researched the impact of livestock health and welfare on methane emissions. In 2023, Defra awarded £2.9 million to the sheep sector to launch ‘Breed for Ch4nge’ which aims to measure methane from 13,500 sheep to improve the efficiency of the UK flock; some of the research is taking place on Scottish farms.
The issue is of interest internationally. New Zealand research has shown that breeding for reduced emissions in sheep does not impact productivity and health; Canadian traders are marketing dairy semen with methane efficiency traits, and beef farmers in Ireland are being paid to take part in genomic programmes.
Please note, reducing methane through dietary amendments (such as feed additives) is out of scope for this project.
Project aims
This research project has two key aims:
To understand the methane emission reductions that could be achieved in Scotland through breeding. We do this by identifying technologies that detect and measure methane, manage data and are involved in the breeding process. We look at the likely availability of these technologies in Scotland in 2030 and 2045, with practical considerations. Finally, we identify the breeding traits that can lead to lower methane emissions and quantify these.
To identify what is needed to support this through policy levers and behaviour change. Using the findings of our literature review and stakeholder consultation, we suggest behaviour changes and discuss their impacts.
Identifying the evidence
To better understand where and how methane emissions could be reduced for project aim 1, we performed a Rapid Evidence Assessment (REA) and a series of stakeholder interviews[1] (now on referred to as our review) to understand:
The technologies involved in reduced emission breeding;
The important traits to select for reduced emissions;
Emission reduction values;
The benefits and challenges of breeding for reduced emissions;
The review also sought evidence on what is needed to support further uptake of these technologies in Scotland, for project aim 2.
The technologies involved in breeding for reduced emissions
We grouped the technologies used to identify livestock with low methane emissions into four categories: detection methods, data management, reproductive technologies and animal genomics.
We found little information regarding the timeline of availability for the technologies on farms in Scotland. In the stakeholder interviews, many were not aware of specific technologies being used unless they were directly involved in research. Our research did find international evidence, for example, portable accumulation chambers (PAC) in New Zealand support The Cool Sheep™ Programme. Due to this limited data on timing, we categorised the availability of the technology in Scotland in 2030 and 2045 under the following headings:
Experimental (E): used in research only, with no use on Scottish farms.
Innovative (I): used in trials on Scottish farms by a few innovators.
Mainstream (M): considered mainstream and being used on Scottish farms.
Future possibility (FP): unlikely the technology will be used by 2030 or 2045, however not ruling out its availability in the future.
Not applicable (NA): not relevant to the sector.
The rate of technology uptake will differ between and within sectors. For instance, dairy cattle are milked multiple times a day, providing an opportunity to closely assess individuals interacting with the technology. For the same assessment in the beef and sheep sectors, the grazing nature of the system may require cultural and habitual change for widespread uptake (Jones and Haresign, 2020). Farmers also have different interests, business structures, cash flow etc which impacts their decisions on changing farm practices.
Cost was excluded from our review due to the complexities in estimation. The cost of a technology is likely to depend on the individual farm situation, for example, the number of livestock or proximity to infrastructure or manufacturers. Technologies requiring installation may vary depending on whether adjustments are required to an existing building.
We understand the technologies presented below have the potential to be used in Scotland. The full list of technologies discovered in our research can be found in Appendix A, section 9.1.
Detection methods
Detection methods are used to detect and measure enteric methane to identify which animals emit less. Examples include a respiration chamber which measures the difference in methane emissions with and without the animal, while spot sampling uses head chamber systems or hand-held lasers to take short-term measurements from the animal’s breath (Tedeschi et al., 2022). Further examples can be seen in Table 1.
We found very few instances of detection methods being used in UK research, but we estimate that some will be available in 2030 and more by 2045 (see Table 1). However, as detection methods are primarily a research tool, it is unlikely they will be used beyond innovators by 2045. Practical constraints such as large technological components and measuring a few animals at a time make it challenging to introduce respiration chambers (which are considered the ‘gold standard’ of measurements) on a large scale (Manzanilla-Pech et al., 2021; Rowe et al., 2020). As such, we recommend encouraging use of proxies such as mid-infrared (MIR) spectra in milk to determine methane emissions.
Portable Accumulation Chambers (PACs) have been launched recently by scientists at Scotland’s Rural College (SRUC) for use across the UK. The two units (of 12 trailers) are currently only being used for research purposes. Each trailer holds 12 chambers and is capable of measuring between 60 – 80 sheep per day providing breeding values for methane emissions for representative samples of sheep within a breeding programme (Duthie et al., 2024)
New Zealand currently incorporates the use of PACs in breeding programmes through The Cool Sheep™ Programme, where breeders use PACs to measure and select for low-emitting rams available for breeding. Research trials are underway in countries such as Australia, Norway and Uruguay and now the UK. This technology provides a promising option for Scotland as it is transportable between farms and has a short measurement period which limits stress in livestock. However, current research trials on UK sheep systems need to be completed before PACs can be used widely (Duthie et al., 2024).
Data management
Data management technologies are essential to store, share and analyse data, while also tracking individuals and breeding lines with desired traits to improve target outcomes (including emissions reductions).
The dairy sector is advanced in this area compared to beef and sheep sectors, with established tools for monitoring and measuring production characteristics. Stakeholders discussed the possibility to enhance or repackage these tools and platforms, such as ScotEID, to incorporate methane traits. Using a tool that is familiar for farmers might reduce resistance for adoption.
Case study: New Zealand
N-Prove is a free website tool for New Zealand farmers to find the best rams for breeding. Using a series of buttons and slider scales, farmers can customise what traits they are looking for in a ram. NProve then generates a list of breeders with rams that best fit. Farmers can select terminal or maternal traits, as well as breeders based on location, breed and exclude certain flocks from results. Methane production is an option to select from the maternal traits. The tool is free to use and registration is not required. The tools anonymity means farmers can gather their options for the best breeder for their farm. NProve sources data from a central database and genetic evaluation service (SIL database) that holds information for more than 600 flocks, making it one of the largest genetic evaluations of sheep in the world. This tool could be used in a similar fashion for other species in other geographies as long as an appropriate database was available or was developed to source information.
Data technologies rely on wider infrastructure, such as website portals or cross-country collaboration, making it challenging to estimate the availability for 2030 and 2045. However, there is high potential. Stakeholders discussed that a risk for these technologies is the lack of interest and uptake from farmers, so it is important to inform and engage the industry regarding their benefits.
These technologies offer benefits for farmers by improving the understanding of the genetic qualities of their livestock and having a head-start on understanding the genetics and traits being brought into the herd. See Table 2 for the relevant data management technologies.
Table 1. Examples of the detection methods involved in breeding livestock for reduced methane emissions. Please see Appendix A, section 9.1 for the full list of the technologies found in our review.
Description
Livestock Sector
Data collected
Benefits
Risks
Timeline of availability in Scotland: Experimental (E), Innovators (I), Mainstream (M),
Future possibility (FP), Not applicable (NA)
Practical considerations in Scotland
Beef
Dairy
Sheep
Automated head chamber system (e.g. GreenFeed)
A head chamber unit that can be positioned in housing or pasture. Feed is used to attract livestock to the unit (van Breukelen, 2023; Zaman et al., 2021).
All
Methane and CO2 concentrations
Non-invasive.
Can be set up in grazing fields or in housing.
Portable
High purchase and running costs.
A spot measurement, not a true reflection of emissions per day.
Feed to attract livestock increases costs.
2030: E
2045: I
2030: E
2045: I
2030: E
2045: I
No evidence was found for use in the UK. It could be a feasible option for Scotland due to the benefits of transportability and ability to measure grazing livestock.
Mid-Infrared (MIR) data
MIR spectroscopy is used to predict the fat and protein content of milk. As methane is linked to milk composition, the latter can be used as a proxy to predict methane emissions (Dehareng et al., 2012; Semex, 2023).
Dairy
Milk components such as lactose, protein and fat
MIR technology is already used routinely in milk recording. Therefore providing an existing infrastructure to integrate methane reporting to.
Because it is a proxy, validation of results (for example with a respiration chamber) is required (Denninger et al., 2020).
NA
2030: I
2045: I
NA
No evidence found of MIR in the UK to estimate methane, but European examples were found. The data could become available through existing milk recording schemes, so it could be introduced by innovators by 2030. If the need for verifying results via detection methods is removed, this could be mainstream by 2045.
Portable accumulation chambers (PAC)
A portable respiration chamber which takes measurements over a short period of time (e.g. 1 hour) (Cummins et al., 2022).
All
Methane and CO2 concentrations
Quick measurement period reduces animal stress (Cummins et al., 2022).
Transportable (NZHerald, 2023).
Feeding and management protocols must be followed prior to measurements (Duthie et al., 2024).
Not suitable for long-term measurements (Cummins et al., 2022).
2030: E
2045: I
2030: E
2045: I
2030: E
2045: I
A promising option for Scotland as it is transportable between farms. SRUC recently acquired a PAC for sheep. However, current research needs to be completed before they can be used widely (Duthie et al., 2024).
Handheld lasers
A handheld device originally developed to detect gas leaks can measure concentrations of methane in livestock breath (Sorg, 2021).
All
Methane concentration
Non-invasive and portable.
Can take measurements from grazing livestock.
Can take measurements from several animals in one day.
Results can be sent to a smart phone (Sorg, 2021).
Has a lower accuracy, measurements are highly affected by environmental conditions (de Haas et al., 2021; Sorg, 2021).
2030: E
2045: I
2030: E
2045: I
2030: E
2045: I
No evidence found for use in UK research. However, the benefit of taking measurements from several animals in the same day may make it an attractive option for Scotland. Its widespread use may depend on supporting infrastructure such as reporting systems.
Table 2. Examples of data management tools involved in the process of breeding livestock for reduced methane emissions. Please see Appendix A, section 9.1 for the full list of the technologies found in our review.
Description
Sector
Data collected
Benefits
Risks
Timeline of availability in Scotland: Experimental (E), Innovators (I), Mainstream (M),
Future possibility (FP), Not applicable (NA)
Practical considerations in Scotland
Beef
Dairy
Sheep
nProve
A free tool for New Zealand farmers to use to choose rams for breeding. They can choose the terminal or maternal traits that fit their breeding goals. When choosing maternal traits, methane production is an option.
Sheep
Reproduction, lamb growth, size, meat, wool, health indices, methane production.
User friendly.
Farmers can choose rams based on location, breed and exclude certain flocks from results.
NA
NA
2030: FP
2045: I
Success requires genetic evaluation and measuring methane (via PAC) to be common practice. Existing tools such as ScotEID (records births, deaths, and movements), and RamCompare (presents performance recorded ram data), could be repackaged to incorporate methane production.
National breeding programme
A programme which plans and identifies breeding objectives, traits and information on selection criteria
All
Methane emissions
UK wide
To be successful at a national scale, significant data, cooperation and initial funding is required.
2030: M
2045: M
2030: M
2045: M
2030: M
2045: M
In 2023, The National Sheep Association began a 3-year initiative to measure methane from 13,500 sheep to incorporate production traits into breeding programmes. With progress like this, it is possible that national breeding programmes will be mainstream by 2030.
Multi-country database
An international database that contains data from many livestock (Manzanilla-Pech et al., 2021).
All
performance/ production (trait-related) records
A larger dataset
improves robustness (Manzanilla-Pech et al., 2021).
Combining data from different countries can be challenging due to differences in reporting, recording, technology, favoured breeds and management style (Van Staaveren e al., 2023).
Sharing genetic information between countries requires compliance with the Nagoya Protocol.
2030: FP
2045: FP
2030: E
2045: I
2030: FP
2045: FP
Due to data sharing challenges, it is unlikely this will be available by 2045 in this context. There may be progress in the dairy sector due to the use of methane indexes, e.g. in Canada and the international scope of many dairy processors.
Bull catalogues (e.g. Genus Bull search)
This index allows farmers to see the scores of certain traits in bulls.
Dairy, beef
One of these traits is called Feed Advantage which can identify bulls with the greatest feed conversion (ABS, 2023).
Farmers can choose bulls with the desired characteristics to use in breeding.
2030: M
2024: M
2030: M
2024: M
NA
These are already available for farmers to use, so we would estimate them to be mainstream by 2030.
Reproductive technologies
Reproductive technologies are directly used for breeding. With many already in use on Scottish dairy farms, we estimate that it is likely most will be mainstream in the cattle sectors by 2045. We estimate lower progress in the sheep sector reflecting the current low uptake. Stakeholders discussed the reasons for low uptake in the sheep sector are due to the extensive nature of sheep farming in Scotland and less infrastructure for sheep in this area, such as semen collection and storage, the availability of which determines uptake. In addition to this, artificial insemination (AI) in sheep requires a vet to perform a surgical procedure (in cattle it can be done by a qualified farmer), adding a practical and financial hurdle.
Table 3. Examples of reproductive technologies involved in the process of breeding livestock for reduced methane emissions. Please see Appendix A, section 9.1 for the full list of the technologies found in our review.
Description
Sector
Benefits
Risks
Timeline of availability in Scotland: Experimental (E), Innovators (I), Mainstream (M),Future possibility (FP), Not applicable (NA)
Practical considerations in Scotland
Beef
Dairy
Sheep
Artificial insemination (AI)
A technique to inseminate females, using fresh or frozen semen.
All
High success rate for cattle.
No requirement for a bull to be on the farm.
Better guarantee of uniform calving.
AI in sheep is often done by laparoscopic artificial insemination which is a surgical procedure done by a vet. Due to the scale and extensive nature of sheep farming, this brings practical challenges.
Relies on sufficient infrastructure to collect and store semen (Stakeholder comment, 2023).
2030: M
2045: M
2030: M
2045: M
2030: I
2045: I
AI is common practice in the dairy sector, with some use in the beef sector. It’s likely this will be mainstream by 2030 for cattle. Due to the practical challenges in sheep, it may still only apply to innovators.
Sexed semen
A method which allows control over the sex of the offspring by separating sperm cells based on their X or Y chromosome content. By focusing on females for example, there is the potential to reduce methane emissions by reducing the number of unwanted males (Duthie et al., 2024).
All
Increasing selection of females in the dairy sector improves productivity.
Success relies on the uptake of AI.
2030: M
2045: M
2030: M
2045: M
2030: I
2045: I
This is widely done in the dairy sector. Use in the beef sector is currently lower, however by 2030 there is the potential for this to be mainstream. Progress is determined by the uptake of AI in the sector. Due to the practical challenges associated with AI, it will likely remain an innovative practice in the sheep sector.
Conventional breeding
The use of bull/ram to cow/ewe breeding. Selecting cows or ewes producing offspring with desirable characteristics to remain in the breeding herd.
All
Minimal technical input.
Familiar practice for farmers.
Little control over selecting desirable traits.
Time intensive as it requires offspring maturity before seeing if they have the desired traits.
2030: M
2045: M
2030: M
2045: M
2030: M
2045: M
Already common practice for general breeding, so breeding for methane reduction could be mainstream by 2030.
Animal Genomics
Genomics is the study of the genome, a complete set of an organism’s DNA[2]. Genomics provides the opportunity to better understand how well an animal will perform based on its DNA profile. DNA and management both determine performance qualities, such as milk yield. Precision breeding (which is not genetic modification) amends sections of DNA by adding or moving genetic material. This has been used in the cropping sector to improve yields and/or disease resistance. In the livestock sector, research focusses on increased resilience to bovine tuberculosis and mastitis. In 2023, England introduced The Precision Breeding Act, outlining classifications for using precision breeding on crops and livestock, including how the products from them should be regulated, “Neither the Scottish nor Welsh Parliaments have granted legislative consent to the Bill.”.
Table 4. Examples of animal genomic technologies involved in the process of breeding livestock for reduced methane emissions. Please see Appendix A, section 9.1 for the full list of the technologies found in our review.
Description
Sector
Data collected
Benefits
Risks
Timeline of availability in Scotland: Experimental (E), Innovators (I), Mainstream (M), Future possibility (FP), Not applicable (NA)
Practical considerations in Scotland
Beef
Dairy
Sheep
Microbiome-driven breeding
Emphasis is on selecting livestock with a rumen microbiome composition which is more efficient at fermenting feed so producing less methane.
All
Rumen fluid samples – sequencing of microbial DNA.
Potential method for improving animal health and reducing environmental impact.
This is a relatively new field and much is unknown about how the gut microbiome develops and is maintained over time.
It is unclear how much influence the animal may have over those processes.
2030: E
2045: E
2030: E
2045: E
2030: E
2045: E
Good early signs but still at research stage.
Genomic breeding values (GEBVs)
Values that are based on information from livestock DNA and measured performance. Can be used with EBVs to improve accuracy of breeding programmes. (Meat Promotion Wales. 2013).
All
DNA and performance records.
Can be used to identify traits that
are difficult to record.
Beneficial for traits measured in only one sex.
Useful for accurately measuring traits that occur later in life (Scholtens et al., 2020).
Accuracy of the estimate is dependent on the number of animals included in the reference population (Scholtens et al., 2020).
2030: I
2045: M
2030: M
2045: M
2030: I
2045: M
GEBVs are currently available for a number of carcass traits in Limousin cattle in the UK (Business Wales, 2016) and offered by the genetic company Genus.
Estimated Breeding values (EBVs)
Calculated from the performance data of recorded animals. Environmental factors (e.g. feeding) are filtered out to provide a genetic value for each trait (Stout, D. 2021).
All
Performance records – parentage and traits of interest (e.g. weight traits).
Provides a more objective (data driven approach) towards selection.
Genetic selection based on EBVs leads to faster rates of genetic gain and flock improvement (compared to selection based on raw data or basic observation).
Allows comparisons within breeds, not between breeds.
2030: M
2045: M
2030: M
2045: M
2030: M
2045: M
Use as a tool to aid in the selection of healthy and structurally sound animals.
Traits
Traits are specific characteristics of an individual (physical or behavioural) that are influenced by genes and environmental factors. Understanding the traits that lead to lower methane emissions is key to a successful breeding programme for methane emissions reduction.
It should be noted that the breeding focus, and therefore traits selected, depends on the farmer’s goals. For example, breeding for breeding stock would focus on selecting offspring traits, such as calving or lambing ease, while farms producing fat or store stock would focus on product traits, such as increased liveweight gain (Stakeholder comment, 2023). Currently, most traits are associated with productivity, such as increasing milk yield in the dairy sector. Progress in the beef and sheep sectors has been much slower, with fewer examples found of genetics used in breeding programmes.
The traits in Table 5 are used for breeding in global research to reduce methane emissions directly and indirectly. We have categorised these traits into the following groups:
Production – offspring: Traits associated with reproduction.
Production – product: Traits associated with products from the animal.
Functional: Traits that underpin the function of the animal and are not specific to production or emissions improvements.
Climate: Traits directly linked to reducing methane emissions.
Stakeholders and the literature emphasised that selection for methane reduction traits should ensure production traits, such as health, are not compromised (Stakeholder comment, 2023; Llonch et al., 2017). To look into this further, we examined performance and methane efficiency data from SEMEX. For their Holstein bulls with above average methane efficiency scores, we could not identify any clear relationship between this trait and the other traits. However, this is only for one breed of cattle from one company.
Case study: New Zealand
Research in New Zealand genotyped low emitting sheep which identified traits that lead to reduced methane emission. The research found no negative impacts on physiology, productivity and health when selecting for reduced emissions.
Our research highlighted the importance of selecting for feed efficiency. Despite this trait having a lower methane reduction potential than others, it will benefit farmers through more efficient use of feed through better feed conversion (Stakeholder comment, 2023).
Table 6 presents the traits that were selected for further analysis, including quantification and the technologies used to detect or select them. Only a few of the traits found in our review were taken forward because some of the traits did not have robust emission reduction values, so were therefore excluded from our calculations.
Table 5. Traits included in breeding indexes around the world, split by sector and type.
Table 6. The quantifiable traits in each sector, with the technologies which can be used to detect or select them.
Technologies used to detect or select traits
Quantifiable traits in each sector
Beef
Dairy
Sheep
Feed efficiency
Offspring carcass weight
Methane production
Feed efficiency
Milk fat and protein
Milk yield
Methane intensity
Feed efficiency
Methane yield
Detection methods
Respiration chambers
X
X
X
Sniffers
X
X
X
SF6 tracer gas
X
X
X
Automated head chamber system
X
X
X
Mid-Infrared (MIR) data (proxy)
X
X
X
X
PAC
X
X
X
Handheld lasers
X
X
X
Rumen microbial composition
X
X
X
Feed efficiency index
X
X
X
Data management
Selection index theory
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
National breeding programmes
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Multi-country database
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Efficient Dairy Genome Project
X
X
X
X
Ram Compare
X
X
Bull catalogues
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Reproductive technologies
Artificial Insemination (AI)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Conventional breeding
X
X
X
Animal genomics
Microbiome-driven breeding
X
X
X
X
X
X
Genomic breeding values (GEBVs)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Estimated Breeding values (EBVs)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Genotyping
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Genetic markers
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Quantifying the potential emission savings
We calculated the potential methane emission reductions under different traits for dairy, beef and sheep. Further information can be found in Appendix E.
The traits identified in our review (see Section 4.2) were further evaluated to assess their applicability to emission reduction calculations, based on requirements for defined quantification of methane emission values (either absolute or relative) and values to have a comparative emission baseline. A summary of the applicable traits used in the quantification calculations are presented in Table 7 below, with further information presented in Appendix E, Section 10.6.4.
Table 7. Traits used in the calculations of emissions savings
Sector
Trait Category
Trait Name
Unit of baseline
Value of methane reduction from baseline
Beef
Production
Feed efficiency
kg CO2e/kg product
7%
Offspring carcass weight
kgCO2e/per kg meat per breeding cow per year
1.3%
Climate
Methane yield
gCH4/kgDMI per generation
12%
Dairy
Production
Feed efficiency
kg CO2e/kg product
5%
Milk fat + protein
MJ CH4/kg milk
12%
Milk yield
kg CH4/kg milk
15%
Climate
Methane intensity
kg CH4/kg milk
24%
Sheep
Production
Feed efficiency
kg CO2e/kg product
7%
Climate
Methane yield
g CH4/kg DMI
35%
The current uptake of genetic traits focused on methane emissions is estimated based on our review and discussions with Scottish Government. This was based on an understanding on the currently uptake of AI and breeding technologies used within the sector from expert knowledge and limited research able to be found online. This rate provides a baseline for the quantification of additional uptake in 2030 and 2045 under four scenarios (further described in Appendix E, Section 10.6.4). The scenarios include: no additional intervention, voluntary uptake, supplier demand and policy changes. Scenario uptake percentages are presented with the current baselines in Table 8 below. These values were developed based on technical expertise and discussion with both stakeholders and Scottish Government, as well as published research. The impact of other traits (such as functional, health related traits) could not be estimated in this work as relevant values for methane reduction potential could not be identified in the literature. Further information in the calculation methodology, including additional detail on the selected scenarios, traits selected and limitations to the data is presented in Appendix E, Section 10.6.
Table 8. Scenario implementation values for dairy, beef and sheep
Type
Scenario
Current baseline
2030 uptake
2045 uptake
Dairy
1. No intervention
75%
80%
80%
2. Voluntary uptake
75%
80%
85%
3. Supplier demand
75%
82.5%
92.5%
4. Policy changes
75%
85%
100%
Beef
1. No intervention
40%
45%
45%
2. Voluntary uptake
40%
45%
50%
3. Supplier demand
40%
47.5%
65%
4. Policy changes
40%
50%
80%
Sheep
1. No intervention
10%
15%
15%
2. Voluntary uptake
10%
15%
20%
3. Supplier demand
10%
17.5%
40%
4. Policy changes
10%
20%
60%
Baseline enteric fermentation methane emissions for beef, dairy cattle and sheep in Scotland in 2021 (totalling 4,020 kt CO2e ), show beef cattle emitted the most at 59% (2,370 kt CO2e ), sheep emitted 26% (1,061 kt CO2e ), and dairy cattle 15% of (590 kt CO2e).
Our calculations found that methane focused traits (methane production/intensity/yield) presented the highest emission reductions for all livestock categories. As the impact of the interaction between traits are unknown, reductions from traits focused on feed efficiency, offspring carcass weight (beef specific) and milk yield, milk fat and protein (dairy specific) are not presented in the maximum reduction potential. However, we acknowledge that reductions for these traits were found within the three livestock categories. Results are presented in Figure 1, Figure 2 and Figure 3 below. These figures show that in each sector, up to 2030, the reductions are relatively steady, but there is a greater reduction at 2045, influenced by the proposed increase in uptake. Due to the proposed uptake percentages the policy change scenario presents the greatest reduction under all traits, with the no intervention scenario showing the smallest reduction due to a 5% increase in uptake in 2030 and no further uptake in 2045.
In the policy change scenario, choosing climate traits, we estimate that emissions would reduce in 2045 up to 382.2 kt CO2e or 9.5% of enteric methane emissions. This includes a 6.8% reduction from beef cattle (161.1 kt CO2e), 6% in dairy cattle (35.4 kt CO2e) and 17.5% in sheep (185.6 kt CO2e). Smaller reductions are feasible from traits focused on feed efficiency, offspring carcass weight (beef specific) and milk yield, milk fat and protein (dairy specific). Further details presented in Appendix E.
Figure 1. Methane emissions for beef cattle traits against the 2021 baseline enteric methane emissions of beef cattle in Scotland. Please note the y-axes do not start at zero to allow for greater visibility of results.
Figure 2. Methane emissions for dairy traits against the 2021 baseline enteric emissions of dairy cattle in Scotland. Please note the y-axes do not start at zero to allow for greater visibility of results.
Figure 3. Methane emissions for sheep traits against the 2021 baseline enteric emissions of sheep in Scotland. Please note the y-axes do not start at zero to allow for greater visibility of results.
Identifying policy drivers and behaviour change needs
This section examines actions to encourage behaviour change. We understand that behaviour change is needed by four stakeholder groups:
Government, which would be policy drivers
Post-farm gate market, such as supermarkets, wholesalers, caterers, hospitality etc
Pre-farm gate, such as livestock markets, breed societies
Farmers
We explored how actions taken by each stakeholder group can enable further behaviour change in the other groups, and present three national level case studies to show actions that promote breeding practices to reduce methane emissions. Examples from these case studies are dispersed through the report in text boxes where the surrounding information was relevant. The countries are as follows:
Ireland, which has incentivised and subsidised breeding practices.
Canada, which has incentivised and subsidised breeding practices.
New Zealand, which has started to take a regulatory approach and has incentivised breeding practices.
All three countries have strong research programmes supporting their policies.
Government action
Scottish Government have an important role in supporting uptake of new breeding techniques through policy. Below are policy drivers that can influence behaviour changes across the other stakeholder groups (post-farm gate market, pre-farm gate actors and farmers).
Legislation and targets
Setting a legal target for methane reduction in Scotland can help to shift the focus of the agricultural industry to methane emissions and align with climate commitments that have been made, such as the Global Methane Pledge at COP26. Other countries have set separate targets for biogenic methane, nitrous oxide, and carbon dioxide, such as New Zealand.
Case study: New Zealand
New Zealand aims to achieve net-zero emissions by 2050 and has a target to reduce biogenic methane by 10% relative to 2017 levels by 2030 and 24 – 47% by 2050. This ‘split-gas’ approach helped focus policy development and action, informed by strong research programmes and stakeholder dialogue. A split-gas approach can also give farmers flexibility to determine the most efficient, cost-effective mitigation practices for their farms (Stakeholder comment, 2023).
A methane target for Scotland could encourage constructive conversations among stakeholders about how to reduce emissions, leading to a higher uptake of relevant practices.
Financial incentives
The concept of breeding livestock for reduced methane emissions may be new for many farmers in Scotland. Methane emissions from ruminant livestock are viewed by many as a natural part of livestock farming, particularly in upland farming systems (Bruce, 2013). Therefore, the economic benefits of breeding for reduced methane emissions will need to be clearly demonstrated to farmers.
Cost was mentioned by some stakeholders as a barrier to selecting livestock based on lower emissions. However, there was little understanding of what the specific costs are. Given this, the perceived cost of adopting new breeding techniques might become just as significant as the barrier of cost itself. However, measuring methane from individual animals in a herd using the technologies in Table 1 is labour intensive and not widely available, which creates financial and labour bottlenecks (CIEL, 2023).
6.1.2.1 Subsidies
Some stakeholders believe that new policies could drive financial incentives (Stakeholder comment, 2023). For example, payments for using the technologies presented in section 4.1.
6.1.2.2. Specific funds incentivising measuring emissions
New Zealand supported a programme via funding to enable every stud ram breeder to use PAC chambers to measure emissions. This service was oversubscribed in 2023, indicating that the adoption of measurement techniques could be encouraged by government funding.
Case study: New Zealand
The Cool Sheep™ Programme, launched in 2022, is a three-year programme aiming to offer genetic selection to every sheep farmer in New Zealand to reduce GHG emissions. It gathers phenotype data to provide a methane breeding value which will be available on NProve. Breeders wanting to produce low-methane rams can measure a proportion of their flock using a PAC.
6.1.2.3. Research
All three case study countries have strong Government funded research programmes. The outputs from these informs the policies and actions designed to reduce emissions. Scotland is at the forefront of research on breeding livestock for reduced methane, so this just emphasises the importance of focussing research in this area.
Case study: Canada
Canada’s Agricultural Methane Reduction Challenge will award up to $12 million CD$ to innovators designing practices, processes, and technologies to reduce enteric methane emissions.
Education and advice
Effective communication around breeding for reduced methane and the climate benefits for reducing methane are essential to support uptake. Farmers are crucial stakeholders and while some may be confident in trialling new approaches, advice must be available to help all understand why and how to implement innovative techniques on their farm, manage their farm in a new system and where to ask for help (Stakeholder comment, 2023). Training could also be provided by the private sector.
Peer to peer learning is very successful as it provides an informal opportunity to ask practical questions of farmers who have already tried and hopefully succeeded.
Example: Northern Ireland farmers visit Scotland
As part of the Farm Innovation Visits, a group of dairy farmers from Northern Ireland visited farms in Scotland to see breeding technologies in practice, such as genetic reports and use of sexed semen.
Farm advisers would be essential to ensure consistent and clear messaging to farmers. Training and communication material could be provided for advisers through existing Government schemes such as the Scottish Farm Advisory Service.
Consumers should be made aware of the importance of reducing methane emissions and of the industry’s associated actions .
Behaviour change
Table 10 shows the outcome of our review on possible Government actions that could lead to behaviour change among farmers, the post-farm gate market and pre-farm gate actors. The three key actions we identified are 1) legislative targets for methane reductions, 2) financial incentives and 3) education and advice programmes.
Table 107: Behaviour changes caused by actions taken by Government
Government actions
Behaviour changes due to Government actions
Farmers
Pre-farm gate actors
Post-farm gate market
Legislative targets for methane emissions reductions
Provides a legislative backstop that must be met. Increased awareness of emissions helps farmers to visualise their emissions and select practices for adoption.
Provides a legislative backstop that must be met. Livestock markets and breed societies prompted to support farmers by providing information on emissions from animals.
Provides a legislative backstop, therefore retailers may encourage suppliers to take on low-emission breeding practices.
Financial incentives
Farmers are more likely to invest time and money in adopting breeding practices if they receive payments for their efforts or if (real and perceived) financial barriers are reduced.
Stronger demand from farmers to understand emissions from livestock will drive breed societies and markets to provide information about emissions.
If breed societies provide advice on reducing emissions from a herd, they could gain a competitive and possibly over time cultural advantage.
Reduced emission livestock products could be marketed for a higher price, aimed at more environmentally conscious consumers.
Risk: if government subsidies were already supporting farmers adopting emission reduction practices, retailers may be less incentivised to pay a premium price.
Education and advice programmes
Increased awareness and clarity on breeding practices to reduce emissions may encourage increased uptake.
Advisers will be able to influence farmers.
Increased awareness of low emissions products may influence consumers to buy food produced using low emission breeding strategies.
Risk: consumers will ask for one thing but often pay for something different
Post-farm gate market
The post-farm gate market includes supermarkets, farm shops, other retailers, consumers and food chain assurance schemes. It has an important role in supporting uptake of new breeding techniques through demonstrating demand and providing price signals. Using our review, we explored actions where the market can influence behaviour change across the other stakeholder groups.
Price signals
Stakeholders discussed the important role of supermarkets, retailers, hospitality businesses, and their suppliers and consumers as these groups can set standards for better prices or to meet customer/societal demands. For example, Tesco aims to be net zero from farm to fork by 2050 , Waitrose has committed to source only from net zero carbon farms in the UK by 2035, and Morrisons aim to be supplied by ‘Net Zero’ carbon British farms as a whole by 2030. Others along the supply chain may need to start to provide evidence of emission reductions as these different retailers and suppliers reduce their Scope 3 emissions, for example as outlined in the British Retail Consortium’s Net Zero Roadmap for the Retail Industry.
Validation of the claims through assurance schemes are important to ensure trust in the food chain. A stakeholder said, “if you take an animal to a ‘normal’ livestock market and claim it has reduced methane emissions, you’ll probably get the same price as any other animal regardless of the additional effort”.
Consumer demand
Consumers paying a premium price are likely to drive new practice adoption. Transparent communication about low emission breeding practices, supply chains and actions on farm is important to demonstrate to consumers the benefits of their choices and reduce the risk of ‘greenwashing’.
International example: Sweden
In 2022, methane-reduced beef was sold in Sweden. It was well received by consumers, selling out in less than a week. There was however backlash in the media with claims of greenwashing. This example emphasises consumers’ interests in climate-friendly options. while ensuring transparency.
Behaviour change
How the market influences other stakeholders is explored in more detail in Table 10. The key actions are 1) improved price signals from retailers and 2) increased consumer demand which is realised at the sales point.
Table 11: Behaviour changes caused by post-farm gate market actions
Post-farm gate actions
Behaviour changes as a result of post-farm gate actions
Government
Farmers
Pre-farm gate industry
Post-farm gate market retailers
Price signals from retailers
Similar to government financial incentives, farmers are more likely to invest time and money in adopting breeding practices if they receive payments for their efforts.
Risk: uptake by farmers could be inconsistent depending on which retailers adopt this action first.
Livestock markets or breed societies could display methane scores if they know this is something that farmers are looking for.
Retailers offering a premium for low-emitting products will encourage uptake of practices.
Marketing low-emitting products will raise awareness among consumers, possibly increasing demand for low-emission products.
Post farm gate actors own emission reduction targets to meet societal demand for low emission products will require farms to reduce emissions
Increased consumer demand for low emissions livestock products
Government may be encouraged to support low methane emissions breeding practices due to a higher demand.
Procurement guidelines for catering in Government funded facilities could include low methane emitting meat.
Increased demand for low emissions products may prompt adoption of practices.
Due to farming in Scotland not being solely driven by the market, consumer demand alone may not influence the pre-farm gate industry. Yet it may lead to actions that prompt further actions related to emission savings.
Increased demand for low-emission products will incentivise retailers and hospitality to provide these, possibly paying a premium to farmers.
Pre-farm gate actors
Pre-farm gate actors refers to industry representatives, levy groups, research institutions, breed societies, and livestock markets. They have an important role in supporting uptake of new techniques through increasing understanding and supporting data collection. Below are actions that can influence behaviour change.
Improving data and data sharing
A key infrastructure need is an accessible database of genetic information, including methane emissions, to enable benchmarking (Stakeholder comment, 2023). Stakeholders noted that farmers may struggle to envision new practices on their farms, and a database can help to conceptualise the traits.
Case study: New Zealand
The ram selection tool nProve provides a user-friendly platform to select required traits in a ram, including methane production.
Existing platforms already used by farmers, such as ScotEID, the Beef Efficiency Scheme (BES), and SRUC’s genetic tool EGENES could add new elements around methane (Stakeholder comment, 2023). For example, Nprove allows farmers to assess methane elements in a user-friendly way.
The Beef Efficiency Scheme (BES) required farmers and land managers to submit tissue samples and other metrics of their beef herd to develop an understanding of the genes within the herd to improve efficiency. Uptake from the industry was low, with only 30% of the national breeding herd participating in the scheme. It currently remains unclear in the literature if the captured data has been incorporated into any local breeding schemes or progressed following the end of the scheme. This scheme could provide valuable learning on the integration of positive genetic traits across the herd in Scotland.
In our review, a stakeholder commented that as only a handful of breeds make up most of the livestock sector in Scotland, the establishment of a database would not take long to create (Stakeholder comment, 2023). This comment however shows the lack of understanding that the genetic material for breeding for methane is independent of breed and based on individual animals.
Case study: Ireland
The Irish Cattle Breeding Federation (ICBF) launched the National Genotyping Programme (NGP) in 2023 to achieve a fully genotyped cattle herd in Ireland. The programme offers beef and dairy farmers a low-cost option to collect DNA samples from calves at birth. The collected information is used to identify specific traits which contribute to national genetic indexes, including methane traits. It also allows farmers to optimise the health and productivity of their herd, while reducing the emissions intensity. The ICBF further publish methane evaluations for AI sires when methane data has been recorded.
Ireland’s NGP and New Zealand’s N Prove provide examples of the development of national databases. In Ireland, the use of metrics like Residual Methane Emissions (RME) index and predicted transmitting ability (PTA) aim to provide an easy way of comparing livestock to the average and to other farmers. Stakeholders noted that a challenge in the Scottish context could be a reluctance by stakeholders to pool data. However this has been successfully achieved in the Scottish pig industry with a number of health and productivity benefits to the individual farmers and to the sector. The NGP also allowed for subsidising DNA sampling of calves which helps to genotype the national herd
Stakeholders discussed the potential for livestock markets to display information on methane emissions. In many markets, a screen displays the weight of the animal and the name of the seller; it could be possible to add the expected or benchmarked methane emissions.
Case study: New Zealand
A methane breeding value was launched in 2019 by Beef and Lamb New Zealand, giving the sector a practical decision making tool. This led to the development of The Cool Sheep™ Programme (see section 6.1.2).
Metrics for methane emissions
Stakeholders recommend adding methane as an estimated breeding value (EBV) as this would allow farmers to benchmark. Stakeholders emphasised that metrics would only be used if they are adopted consistently across Scotland (and perhaps the UK) with cross sector collaboration and there was some incentive for farmers to reduce methane emissions from their livestock. Similarly, to the adoption of RME and PTA figures in Ireland, regulation and guidance from Scottish Government would be advisable to make sure the most sensible metric was adopted.
Case study: Ireland
Residual methane emissions (RME) index is a metric to understanding the difference between the expected methane emissions based on feed intake and the actual emissions. High RME is undesirable and low RME is desirable.
ICBF methane predicted transmitting ability (PTA) values have been produced by recording methane emissions from over 1,500 animals from 19 breeds. These are publicly available for AI beef and dairy bulls. Bulls are classed as favourable or unfavourable compared with the average sire.
Behaviour change
The two key take-aways from our review are 1) improved data and data sharing amongst farmers, researchers and across stakeholders and 2) developing metrics for methane emissions to enable benchmarking between farmers and products. Table 12 describes how actions by pre-farm gate actors could support behaviour change among other stakeholders.
Table 12: Behaviour change due to actions taken by the pre-farm gate actors
Pre-farm gate action
Behaviour change due to pre-farm gate action
Government
Farmers
Pre-farm gate actors
Post-farm gate market
Improved data and data sharing
A database can inform policy.
Enables farmers to understand the emission reduction potential of their animals.
Displaying methane information at markets can help choose livestock based on emissions.
More data would support more robust research, thereby increasing the output of Scotland-specific research.
Markets around Scotland displaying methane data would raise awareness among farmers.
Better data would enable retailers to communicate sustainability data to customers, increasing trust in the food system.
Metrics for methane emissions
Scottish Government could ensure all relevant stakeholders are involved in developing a metric.
Metrics would enable farmers to make comparisons against individual animals when deciding which ones to breed or purchase.
Breed societies and livestock markets would be able to display methane emissions.
Breed society representatives can discuss options for reducing emissions.
Retailers have a consistent metric they can use to communicate the methane emissions of products to consumers.
Farmers
Farmer behaviour change in this context relates to choosing animals with low methane traits to breed, and implementing systems on farm that support this. Some farmers could measure emissions from their livestock to verify the effectiveness of breeding for reduced emissions. Uptake of technologies outlined in section 4 provides the opportunity to better track genetics and traits in their herd.
Farmers will need support to make these changes and to enable behaviour change from the pre-market, post-market and government stakeholder groups identified in the sections above. In addition, the adoption of new practices will likely vary between dairy, beef and sheep producers, and the challenges they face will be different. Farmers who are already using reproductive technologies, such as sexed semen and AI, are expected to progress fastest in this area, given their familiarity with the processes. It is likely that the dairy sector will lead the way, and to a smaller extent, the beef sector. Rapid uptake of AI (and therefore sexed semen) in the sheep sector faces practical challenges, therefore it may be best to prioritise low-emitting traits in rams.
The financial benefit of farmers selecting methane traits is currently unclear. It is likely that the primary motivation will come from the supply chain; it will be important to have specific supply chain indicators. For example, if a milk buyer sets methane reduction goals, suppliers will need to respond. Behaviour change is also influenced by seeing neighbours or peers taking on new practices for example. Below are some points for each of the different livestock sectors groups that should be considered to enable the behaviour change actions identified in the previous sections.
Cummins et al (2022) advise that further research is needed on how breeding for low methane emissions affects the productive and profitable genes that make an animal appealing to farmers. However, research in New Zealand on genotyped low emitting sheep showed no negative impacts on physiology, productivity and health when selecting for reduced emissions and preliminary economic analysis shows that low-emitting sheep could lead to higher profits, primarily due to higher growth rates, a greater proportion of meat, and increased wool production. This section also briefly covers some actions that could be undertaken on farm to support farmers to shift to breeding lower methane emitting livestock.
Sheep farmers
Sheep farmers deal with a large number of animals which tend to be farmed extensively in Scotland, so using methane detecting technologies is potentially more difficult than for other livestock sectors. Despite this challenge, the shorter time to slaughter means that low-emitting traits can be introduced regularly and methane reductions can accumulate quickly (Stakeholder comment, 2023). In addition, other countries such as New Zealand have implemented programmes to begin to measure the national flock such as The Cool Sheep Programme (see section 6.1.2). Stakeholders discussed how the sheep sector produces a lower-value product compared to the cattle sector, so cash flow may be a prohibiting factor in taking on new practices.
Beef farmers
Stakeholders asserted that the beef sector is complicated by several commercial interests in the market which influence genetic improvement. Unlike the dairy sector, AI is not widely used in the beef sector (Stakeholder comment, 2023). However, there are opportunities to influence the genetics of the herd by encouraging bull breeders or bull stud farms to take on practices to support low-emitting traits.
As it is common for dairy cow offspring to enter the beef system, there is the opportunity to use lower emitting dairy animals to feed into emissions reductions in the beef sector (Stakeholder comment, 2023).
Dairy farmers
The dairy sector is the most advanced ruminant sector in using genetic technology and tools for selective breeding. For example, AI is fairly common practice, currently with the objective of increasing productivity rather than targeting emissions. Progress in the sheep and beef sectors is much slower due to challenges around practicalities, sufficient data and uptake of technologies in these sectors. The dairy industry also has a steadier cashflow than beef and sheep (Stakeholder comment, 2023), and is more progressive when it comes to real-time data collection and data management. This puts the dairy sector in a good position to advance breeding for reduced methane emissions.
Cross-farm actions to support breeding lower methane livestock
Strong and structured communication, sharing of ideas and engagement locally are important drivers to enable behaviour change in farming communities. Peer to peer support, for example through breeding groups, to share ideas, showcase technologies and discuss successful and disappointing technologies will enable neighbours and other local farmers to progress faster. Organising local workshops, either by Government supported advisers or leading farmers, would help to spread the word about the importance of breeding for reduced emissions and provide practical examples. The more discussion about the overall aim, the need to reduce emissions, the potential actions, outcomes and successes, the more likely that breeding for reduced methane emissions will become mainstream.
Gaps in the research
We identified the following gaps in research:
Timeline of availability for the technologies. Due to a lack of robust information in many cases, we made an expert judgement on the availability of the technologies in Scotland up to 2030 and 2045.
Quantified impact of introducing methane traits in case study countries. We did not find evidence for the actions and policies introduced in the case study countries reducing overall country emissions. A reason for this is that many of the examples presented in the case studies in the appendices are very recent, therefore there has not been enough time to quantify the emission savings. In addition, it could be challenging to see whether these actions had a specific impact emissions due to other surrounding factors, for example changes in stocking rate, or outbreak in disease.
Evidence for current level of uptake in Scotland and the UK. The review did not find much evidence for current levels of uptake of breeding livestock for reduced emissions.
Mitigation potentials of some traits. Many sources did not present methane emission values, but instead covered genetic correlations between traits. This meant that due to a lack of data many of the traits identified in the REA (see Table 5) were excluded from quantification. In other cases, some mitigation potentials were not comparative to the baseline used in our study because it presented changes from an entire lifecycle or system.
The interaction between traits. Emission calculations were quantified for individual traits, rather than combining the mitigation potential for all traits because the relationship and interaction between traits is unknown.
Due to the smaller quantity of literature available on methane efficiency focused traits, the reduction potential values may be less robust. Greater consistency in measurement, modelling, and presentation and their impacts on emissions savings and animal production would fill this knowledge gap.
Conclusions
We estimate that, by 2045, breeding for reduced methane emissions could achieve a reduction in enteric methane emissions of 9.5% from the baseline, including 6.8% reduction from beef, 6% from dairy and 17.5% from sheep assuming livestock numbers remain constant. This would be achieved by selecting breeding traits for methane efficiency (methane production, intensity and yield), feed efficiency, offspring carcass weight, milk yield and milk fat and protein. Selecting for these traits brings cumulative and permanent emission savings. A limited number of studies researched the impacts of selecting low-methane traits on productivity and health and found that these qualities were not compromised.
Scotland has a well-developed research base around breeding livestock for reduced methane emissions, placing it in good stead in developing further work and providing validation and trust. Research programmes in New Zealand, Canada and Ireland have successfully interacted with farmers, for example, by the development of user-friendly, accessible tools. Our stakeholder comments implies that a comparable interaction between research and on-farm activities and innovation is currently lacking in Scotland.
To achieve the emissions reductions, actions and behaviour change will be required by four stakeholder groups: Scottish Government, pre- and post-farm gate industry and markets, and farmers. Change will need to be co-created across the stakeholder groups.
The financial benefit of farmers selecting methane traits remains uncertain. Therefore, it is likely that the primary motivation will be the supply chain which will need supply chain indicators. For example, if a milk buyer sets methane reduction goals, suppliers will need to respond. Behaviour change is also influenced by neighbours or peers taking on new practices.
The key barriers to uptake are around knowledge and perceived cost. To alleviate these, Government funding could be targeted towards more data collection and research with farmer involvement to improves robustness. Investment in adviser training and farmer peer-to-peer will enable local farmers to progress faster. Organising local workshops, either by Government supported advisers or leading farmers, would help to spread the word about the importance of breeding for reduced emissions and provide practical examples. The more discussion about the overall aim, the actions, outcomes and successes, the more likely it is that breeding for reduced methane emissions will become mainstream.
The technologies we estimate could be mainstream by 2030 include a national breeding programme, sexed semen, artificial insemination (AI) and estimated breeding values (EBVs). However, their success will be about but the interactions between them. For example, data will inform EVBs, which in turn will inform a national breeding programme. If the constant use of methane detecting technologies is required, this may be difficult to implement in extensive farming systems. However, if a proxy measurement was used or the breeding stock was known to provide the necessary traits, this would allow existing systems to continue.
On this basis, we think there is a strong foundation for breeding for reduced emissions to become part of Scottish Government’s commitments.
Alford, A.R., Hegarty, R.S., Parnell, P.F., Cacho, O.J., Herd, R.M. and Griffith, G.R., 2006. The impact of breeding to reduce residual feed intake on enteric methane emissions from the Australian beef industry. Australian Journal of Experimental Agriculture, 46(7), pp.813-820.
B+LNZ Genetics, 2023. Reducing methane emissions in New Zealand’s national sheep flock through genetic selection – The Cool Sheep™ Programme. Available from: https://www.blnzgenetics.com/cool-sheep-programme
Bell, M.J., Wall, E., Russell, G., Morgan, C. and Simm, G., 2010. Effect of breeding for milk yield, diet and management on enteric methane emissions from dairy cows. Animal Production Science, 50(8), pp.817-826.
Bruce, A., 2013. The lore of low methane livestock: co-producing technology and animals for reduced climate change impact. Life Sciences, Society and Policy, 9(1), pp.1-21.
De Haas, Y., Veerkamp, R.F., De Jong, G. and Aldridge, M.N., 2021. Selective breeding as a mitigation tool for methane emissions from dairy cattle. Animal, 15, p.100294.
Dehareng, F., Delfosse, C., Froidmont, E., Soyeurt, H., Martin, C., Gengler, N., Vanlierde, A. and Dardenne, P., 2012. Potential use of milk mid-infrared spectra to predict individual methane emission of dairy cows. Animal, 6(10), pp.1694-1701.
Denninger, T.M., Schwarm, A., Dohme-Meier, F., Münger, A., Bapst, B., Wegmann, S., Grandl, F., Vanlierde, A., Sorg, D., Ortmann, S. and Clauss, M., 2020. Accuracy of methane emissions predicted from milk mid-infrared spectra and measured by laser methane detectors in Brown Swiss dairy cows. Journal of dairy science, 103(2), pp.2024-2039.
Esrafili Taze Kand Mohammaddiyeh, M., Rafat, S.A., Shodja, J., Javanmard, A. and Esfandyari, H., 2023. Selective genotyping to implement genomic selection in beef cattle breeding. Frontiers in Genetics, 14, p.1083106.
González-Recio, O., López-Paredes, J., Ouatahar, L., Charfeddine, N., Ugarte, E., Alenda, R. and Jiménez-Montero, J.A., 2020. Mitigation of greenhouse gases in dairy cattle via genetic selection: 2. Incorporating methane emissions into the breeding goal. Journal of Dairy Science, 103(8), pp.7210-7221.
Hayes, B.J., Lewin, H.A. and Goddard, M.E., 2013. The future of livestock breeding: genomic selection for efficiency, reduced emissions intensity, and adaptation. Trends in genetics, 29(4), pp.206-214.
Hybu Cig Cymru – Meat Promotion Wales, 2013. Genetic markers in beef and sheep breeding programmes. Available from: https://meatpromotion.wales/en
Jones, H., Haresign, W. 2020. A review of current and new technologies for both genetic improvement and breed conservation of UK farm animal genetic resources. Produced by members of the Defra expert committee on Farm Animal Genetic Resources (FAnGR).
Jonker, A., Hickey, S.M., Rowe, S.J., Janssen, P.H., Shackell, G.H., Elmes, S., Bain, W.E., Wing, J., Greer, G.J., Bryson, B. and MacLean, S., 2018. Genetic parameters of methane emissions determined using portable accumulation chambers in lambs and ewes grazing pasture and genetic correlations with emissions determined in respiration chambers. Journal of Animal Science, 96(8), pp.3031-3042.
Llonch, P., Haskell, M.J., Dewhurst, R.J. and Turner, S.P., 2017. Current available strategies to mitigate greenhouse gas emissions in livestock systems: an animal welfare perspective. Animal, 11(2), pp.274-284.
Manzanilla-Pech, C.I.V., Gordo, D.M., Difford, G.F., Pryce, J.E., Schenkel, F., Wegmann, S., Miglior, F., Chud, T.C., Moate, P.J., Williams, S.R.O. and Richardson, C.M., 2021. Breeding for reduced methane emission and feed-efficient Holstein cows: An international response. Journal of Dairy Science, 104(8), pp.8983-9001.
Manzanilla-Pech, C.I.V., Stephansen, R.B., Difford, G.F., Løvendahl, P. and Lassen, J., 2022. Selecting for feed efficient cows will help to reduce methane gas emissions. Frontiers in Genetics, 13, p.885932.
Martínez-Álvaro, M., J. Mattock, Z. Weng, R. J. Dewhurst, M. A. Cleveland, M. Watson, and R. Roehe. 2022. “Part of the functional rumen core microbiome is influenced by the bovine host genome and associated with feed efficiency.” In Proceedings of 12th World Congress on Genetics Applied to Livestock Production (WCGALP) Technical and species orientated innovations in animal breeding, and contribution of genetics to solving societal challenges, pp. 324-327. Wageningen Academic Publishers, 2022.
Miller, G.A., Auffret, M.D., Roehe, R., Nisbet, H. and Martínez-Álvaro, M., 2023. Different microbial genera drive methane emissions in beef cattle fed with two extreme diets. Frontiers in Microbiology, 14, p.1102400.
Quinton, C.D., Hely, F.S., Amer, P.R., Byrne, T.J. and Cromie, A.R., 2018. Prediction of effects of beef selection indexes on greenhouse gas emissions. Animal, 12(5), pp.889-897.
Reid, A. and Wainwright, W., 2018. Climate Change and Agriculture: How Can Scottish Agriculture Contribute to Climate Change Targets.
Rowe, S.J., Hickey, S.M., Johnson, P.L., Bilton, T.P., Jonker, A., Bain, W., Veenvliet, B., Pilel, G., Bryson, B. and Knowler, K., 2021. The contribution animal breeding can make to industry carbon neutrality goals. In Proc. Assoc. Advmt. Anim. Breed. Genet (Vol. 24, pp. 15-18).
Rowe, S.J., Hess, M., Zetouni, L., Hickey, S., Brauning, R., Henry, H., Flay, H., Budel, J., Bryson, B., Janssen, P. and Jonker, A., 2020. Breeding low emitting ruminants: predicting methane from microbes. Multidisciplinary Digital Publishing Institute Proceedings, 36(1), p.177.
Scholtens, M., Lopez-Villalobos, N., Lehnert, K., Snell, R., Garrick, D. and Blair, H.T., 2020. Advantage of including genomic information to predict breeding values for lactation yields of milk, fat, and protein or somatic cell score in a New Zealand dairy goat herd. Animals, 11(1), p.24.
Tedeschi, L.O., Abdalla, A.L., Álvarez, C., Anuga, S.W., Arango, J., Beauchemin, K.A., Becquet, P., Berndt, A., Burns, R., De Camillis, C. and Chará, J., 2022. Quantification of methane emitted by ruminants: a review of methods. Journal of Animal Science, 100(7), p.skac197.
van Breukelen, A.E., Aldridge, M.N., Veerkamp, R.F., Koning, L., Sebek, L.B. and de Haas, Y., 2023. Heritability and genetic correlations between enteric methane production and concentration recorded by GreenFeed and sniffers on dairy cows. Journal of Dairy Science, 106(6), pp.4121-4132.
van Staaveren, N., Oliveira, H.R., Houlahan, K., Chud, T.C., Oliveira Jr, G.A., Hailemariam, D., Kistemaker, G., Miglior, F., Plastow, G., Schenkel, F.S. and Cerri, R., 2023. The Resilient Dairy Genome Project–a general overview of methods and objectives related to feed efficiency and methane emissions. Journal of dairy science.
Wellmann, R., 2023. Selection index theory for populations under directional and stabilizing selection. Genetics Selection Evolution, 55(1), p.10.
Worden, D. and Hailu, G., 2020. Do genomic innovations enable an economic and environmental win-win in dairy production?. Agricultural Systems, 181, p.102807.
Appendix / Appendices
Technologies involved in breeding for reduced methane, full tables
Table 13. Examples of the detection methods involved in the process of breeding livestock for reduced methane emissions.
Description
Sector
Data collected
Benefits
Risks
Timeline of availability in Scotland: Experimental (E), Innovators (I), Mainstream (M),
Future possibility (FP), Not applicable (NA)
Practical considerations in Scotland
Beef
Dairy
Sheep
Respiration chamber
A sealed chamber taking samples from an animal in a controlled environment. The animal is typically kept in the measurement chamber for a couple of days and is provided with food and water (Zaman et al., 2021).
All
Methane concentration
Believed to be the most accurate way to measure methane from livestock (Zaman et al., 2021).
Measurements taken over several days increases robustness (Manzanilla-Pech et al., 2021).
Restricts normal animal behaviour and movement (Zaman et al., 2021; Manzanilla-Pech et al., 2021).
High capital cost.
Limited to a few or one animal per chamber (Manzanilla-Pech et al., 2021).
2030: E
2045: E
2030: E
2045: E
2030: E
2045: E
Used in research facilities in Scotland, however there is limited scope to use them on farms due to the high cost (Stakeholder comment, 2023).
Sniffers
Non-dispersive infrared unit that can be installed in feeding areas or milking parlours (van Breukelen, 2023; de Haas et al., 2021).
All
Methane and CO2 concentration
Non-invasive, can be incorporated into existing milking technologies (de Haas et al., 2021).
Offers large scale recording (de Haas et al., 2021).
A spot measurement, not a true reflection of emissions per day.
Limited to indoor measuring (Cummins et al., 2022).
More difficult to introduce in beef and sheep sectors compared to dairy due to frequent milking.
2030: FP
2045: FP
2030: E
2045: E
2030: FP
2045: FP
In 2021 ‘the first’ was installed at a Dutch dairy farm for research (CRV, 2021). No evidence found for use on farms in the UK.
SF6 tracer gas
A tube containing sulfur hexafluoride (SF6) tracer gas is placed inside the rumen and collection lines are used to collect breath samples (Cummins etal., 2022).
All
Methane concentrations
Measurements can be taken from confined, free range, and grazing animals (Manzanilla-Pech et al., 2021).
Invasive measure which has animal welfare concerns (de Haas et al., 2021).
SF6 is a greenhouse gas itself (Tedeschi et al., 2022).
Daily canister collection means high labour (Cummins etal., 2022).
2030: E
2045: E
2030: E
2045: E
2030: E
2045: E
No evidence was found for use in UK trials and research, but it used widely in globally. It would be beneficial in Scottish research due to measuring livestock while grazing.
Automated head chamber system (e.g. GreenFeed)
A transportable head chamber unit that can be positioned in housing or pasture. Feed is used to attract livestock to the unit (van Breukelen, 2023; Zaman et al., 2021).
All
Methane and CO2 concentrations
Non-invasive.
It can be set up in grazing fields or in housing.
High purchase and running costs.
A spot measurement, not a true reflection of emissions per day.
Feed to attract livestock increases costs.
2030: E
2045: I
2030: E
2045: I
2030: E
2045: I
No evidence was found for use in UK trials and research. However it is potentially a feasible option for Scotland due to the benefits of transportability and measuring grazing livestock.
Mid-Infrared (MIR) data
MIR spectroscopy is used to predict the fat and protein content of milk. As methane is linked to milk composition, it can be used as a proxy to predict methane emissions (Dehareng et al., 2012; Semex, 2023)
Dairy
Milk component such as lactose, protein and fat
MIR technology is already used in milk recording, so could provide an existing infrastructure to integrate methane reporting into.
Because it is a proxy, validation of results (for example with a respiration chamber) is required (Denninger et al., 2020).
NA
2030: I
2045: I
NA
No evidence found of MIR being used in the UK to estimate methane, but European examples were found. As data could become available through existing milk recording schemes, it could be introduced by innovators by 2030. If the need for verifying results via detection methods is removed, this could be mainstream by 2045.
Portable accumulation chambers (PAC)
A portable respiration chamber which takes measurements over a short period of time (e.g. 1 hour) (Cummins et al., 2022).
All
Methane and CO2 concentrations
Quick measurement period reduces animal stress (Cummins et al., 2022).
Transportable (NZHerald, 2023).
Feeding and management protocols must be followed prior to measurements (Duthie et al., 2024).
Not suitable for long-term measurements (Cummins et al., 2022).
2030: E
2045: I
2030: E
2045: I
2030: E
2045: I
A promising option for Scotland, given its transportable between farms. SRUC recently acquired a PAC for sheep in the UK. However current research needs to be completed before they can be used widely (Duthie et al., 2024).
Handheld lasers
A handheld device originally developed to detect gas leaks can measure concentrations of methane in livestock breath (Sorg, 2021).
All
Methane concentrations
Non-invasive and portable.
Can take measurements from grazing livestock.
Can take measurements from several animals in one day.
Results can be sent to a smart phone (Sorg, 2021)
Has a lower accuracy, measurements are highly affected by environmental conditions (de Haas et al., 2021; Sorg, 2021)
2030: E
2045: I
2030: E
2045: I
2030: E
2045: I
No evidence found for use in UK research. However, the benefit of taking measurements from several animals in the same day may make it an attractive option for Scotland. Its widespread use may depend on supporting infrastructure such as reporting systems.
Rumen microbial composition
The rumen holds a variety of microorganisms that aid in the digestion of feed. By studying the microbes present in the rumen, those influencing the production of methane can be identified and used as a proxy to identify animals with the microbiome composition which emits lower methane (Miller et al., 2023).
All
Dry matter intake and methane concentrations
It can also be used to improve feed conversion and disease resistance (Duthie et al., 2024).
The composition of the microbiome is largely influenced by the ratio of feed (i.e. forage vs concentrate) so accuracy of results may be influenced by diet (Miller et al., 2023).
2030: E
2045: I
2030: E
2045: I
2030: E
2045: I
A technique being used in Scottish research in all sectors. Likely to remain an experimental technology, with future trials on some farms in the future.
Feed efficiency index
An indicator showing how efficient a cow is at converting feed into product, for example, into milk. Research shows that selecting for feed efficiency reduces methane emissions (Manzanilla-Pech et al., 2022).
Helps to reduce the amount of feed required and therefore associated costs.
It’s important that selecting for feed-efficiency does not compromise growth.
2030: M
2045: M
2030: M
2045: M
2030: M
2045: M
No evidence found of this being done with the aim of reducing methane emissions in the UK, but it is used in the UK to improve efficiency in dairy.
Table 14. Examples of data management tools involved in the process of breeding livestock for reduced methane emissions.
Description
Sector
Data collected
Benefits
Risks
Timeline of availability in Scotland: Experimental (E), Innovators (I), Mainstream (M), Future possibility (FP),
Not applicable (NA)
Practical considerations related to the feasibility in Scotland
Beef
Dairy
Sheep
ScotEID
A multispecies database which records and tracks livestock information. It may be possible to build on this in the future to introduce information relevant to methane.
All
Births, deaths and movements.
A familiar platform for farmers in Scotland.
2030: E
2045: I
2030: E
2045: I
2030: E
2045: I
An established infrastructure exists and is familiar to the industry, therefore a promising option to repurpose to include methane traits.
nProve
A free tool for New Zealand farmers to use to choose rams for breeding. They can choose the terminal or maternal traits that fit their breeding goals. When choosing maternal traits, methane production is an option.
Sheep
Reproduction, lamb growth, size, meat, wool, health indices
Very user friendly, guides the user through the selection process. Contact details are provided for breeders that meet chosen criteria.
Farmers can choose rams based on location, breed and exclude certain flocks from results.
NA
NA
2030: FP
2045: I
To be successful in Scotland, genetic evaluation and measuring methane from sheep would need to be common practice. There are existing tools such as ScotEID which records births, deaths and movements, and RamCompare which presents data from performance recorded rams i.e. carcass weight, that could be repackaged to incorporate methane production. But success would also depend on wide use of PAC (as done in New Zealand).
Selection index
Combines information to predict an animals estimated breeding value (EBV). It can be used to select traits for breeding goals, for example, milk production, feed efficiency and health to maximise future profit (Wellmann, 2023; de Haas et al., 2021).
All
It is possible to apply weightings to traits in relation to its importance in the breeding goals
Before a trait can be added to a selection index, it needs to be “clearly defined, recordable, affordable, have phenotypic variation, be heritable, and the genetic correlations between other traits in the index need to be known” (de Haas et al., 2021).
2030: E
2045: I
2030: E
2045: I
2030: E
2045: I
In 2023, Semex introduced a methane index for Holsteins in Canada. Availability in Scotland depends on the progress of measuring methane.
National breeding programme
A programme which plans and identifies breeding objectives, traits and information on selection criteria.
All
It can optimise gains and trait changes (De Haas et al., 2021).
To be successful at a national scale, significant data and cooperation is required.
For a trait to be included in a programme it must be environmentally important, express genetic variation and be measurable (Teagasc, 2012).
2030: M
2045: M
2030: M
2045: M
2030: M
2045: M
In 2023, The National Sheep Association began a 3-year initiative to measure methane from 13,500 sheep. The aim of this is to measure production traits to incorporate into breeding programmes. With progress like this, it is possible that national breeding programmes will be mainstream by 2030.
Multi-country database
An international database that contains performance/production (trait-related) records from a large number of livestock (Manzanilla-Pech et al., 2021).
All
An increased dataset
Improves robustness (Manzanilla-Pech et al., 2021)
Combining data from different countries can be challenging due to differences in reporting and recording, technology, favoured breeds and management style (Van Staaveren e al., 2023).
2030: FP
2045: FP
2030: E
2045: I
2030: FP
2045: FP
A significant amount of collaboration is required to make this effective. Due to having to overcome the data sharing challenges, it is possibly unlikely this will be available with the aim of reducing methane emissions by 2045. There may be some progress in the dairy sector however due to the introduction of the methane index in Canada.
Efficient Dairy Genome Project
An international initiative that combines data from 6 countries (Australia, Canada, Denmark, United Kingdom, United States, and Switzerland) aiming to build one genomic reference population and a unique database of DMI records.
Dairy
DMI, milk, methane was measured in 4 of the 6 countries participating in the initiative
The overall objective is to potentially improve feed efficiency (cost benefit) and reduce methane emissions (environmental benefit).
Combining data from different countries can be challenging due to differences in areas such as reporting and recording, technology, favoured breeds and management style (Van Staaveren e al., 2023).
NA
2030: I
2045: I
NA
Bull catalogues (such as Genus Bull search)
This index allows farmers to see the scores of certain traits in bulls. One of these traits is called Feed Advantage which can identify bulls with the greatest feed conversion (ABS, 2023).
Dairy, beef
Farmers can choose bulls with the desired characteristics to use in breeding.
2030: M
2024: M
2030: M
2024: M
NA
These are already available for farmers to use, so we would estimate them to be mainstream by 2030.
Beef Efficiency Scheme
A 5-year scheme funded by Scottish Government to help improve the efficiency, sustainability and quality of beef herds – helping to increase genetic value and reduce GHG emissions. The scheme focused on cattle genetics and management practices on-farm.
Beef
Tissue samples – genotyping
blood samples,
calving data,
culling/death reasons, dam data (docility)
Funding was provided to farmers for data collection and entry.
A free advisory service was also provided to assist farmers in developing their beef herd.
2030: FP
2045: FP
NA
NA
This scheme ended in 2021. It may be possible to build on and repackage the scheme to consider methane traits in the future.
Table 15. Examples of reproductive technologies involved in the process of breeding livestock for reduced methane emissions.
Description
Sector
Benefits
Risks
Timeline of availability in Scotland: Experimental (E), Innovators (I), Mainstream (M)
Future possibility (FP) Not applicable (NA)Practical considerations related to the feasibility in Scotland
Beef
Dairy
Sheep
Semen freezing
A technique to preserve semen.
All
Provides security in an instance that could risk a breed’s survival (Jones et al., 2020)
Variable success rate using thawed semen.
2030: M
2045: M
2030: M
2045: M
2030: I
2045: I
Artificial insemination (AI)
A technique to inseminate females, using fresh or frozen semen.
All
High success rate for cattle.
Not required to have a bull on the farm.
Better guarantee of uniform calving.
To be most efficient, livestock are required to come into heat at the same time as AI takes place. This is done artificially by the farmer, adding additional labour.
AI in sheep is often done laparoscopically, which is a surgical procedure performed by a vet. Due to the scale and extensive nature of sheep farming, this brings practical challenges.
Relies on sufficient infrastructure to collect and store semen of which there are limited facilities in Scotland (in particular for the sheep sector) (Stakeholder comment, 2023).
2030: M
2045: M
2030: M
2045: M
2030: I
2045: I
AI is already common practice in the dairy sector, with some use in the beef sector too. It’s likely this will be mainstream by 2030 for cattle. However, due to the practical challenges in sheep, it may still only apply to innovators.
Sexed semen
A method which allows control over the sex of the offspring by separating sperm cells based on their X or Y chromosome content. By focusing on females for example, there is the potential to reduce methane by reducing the number of unwanted males (Duthie et al., 2024).
All
Increases the selection of females in the dairy sector.
Improves productivity.
Success relies on the uptake of AI.
2030: M
2045: M
2030: M
2045: M
2030: I
2045: I
This is widely practiced in the dairy sector. Use in the beef sector is currently lower, however by 2030 there is the potential for this to be mainstream. Progress is determined by the uptake of AI in the sector. Due to the practical challenges associated with AI, it will likely remain an innovative practice.
In-vitro fertilisation (IVF)
Harvested oocytes are taken from donor cows and fertilised in a petri dish with semen to create an embryo.
Beef, dairy
Less semen required
Nutrition and diet need to be consistent in the lead up to extracting oocytes.
2030: I
M
NA
Process is conducted in a lab under sterile conditions.
Embryo freezing
A method for cryopreservation of embryos for long-term storage or transport. This tends to occur in conjunction with MOET.
All
I?
I?
I?
Lack of suitable laboratories
Conventional breeding
The use of bull/ram to cow/ewe breeding. Enhanced tools to select lower than average emitting bulls or rams.
All
Minimal technical input.
Familiar management practice for farmers.
Little control over selecting desirable traits.
It requires waiting for offspring to become fully grown before seeing if they have taken on the desired traits.
M
M
M
Table 16. Examples of animal genomics involved in the process of breeding livestock for reduced methane emissions.
Description
Sector
Data collected
Benefits
Risks
Timeline of availability in Scotland: Experimental (E), Innovators (I), Mainstream (M), Future possibility (FP), Not applicable (NA)
Practical considerations in Scotland
Beef
Dairy
Sheep
Microbiome-driven breeding
Emphasis is on selecting livestock with a rumen microbiome composition which is more efficient at fermenting of feed so that less excess hydrogen and thus less methane is produced.
Livestock genetics and therefore breeding influences the composition of the microbiome which therefore affects the amount of methane released.
All
Rumen fluid samples – sequencing of microbial DNA
There is a growing demand for livestock that emit less methane.
Potential method for improving animal health and reduce environmental impact.
This is a relatively new field, and much is unknown about how the gut microbiome develops and is maintained over time.
It is unclear how much influence the animal may have over those processes.
2030: E
2045: E
2030: E
2045: E
2030: E
2045: E
Good early signs but still at research stage.
Genomic breeding values (GEBVs)
Values that are based on information from livestock DNA and measured performance. Can be used with EBVs to improve accuracy of breeding programmes. (Meat Promotion Wales. 2013).
All
DNA and performance records
Can be used to identify traits that are difficult to record
Beneficial for traits measured in only one sex
Useful for accurately measuring traits that occur later in life (Scholtens et al., 2020).
Accuracy of the estimate is dependent on the number of animals included in the reference population (Scholtens et al., 2020).
2030: E
2045: I
2030: E
2045: I
2030: E
2045: E
For the UK beef industry, GEBVs are currently available for a number of carcass traits in Limousin cattle (Business Wales, 2016)
Estimated Breeding values (EBVs)
Calculated from the performance data of recorded animals. Environmental factors (e.g. feeding) are filtered out to provide a genetic value for each trait (Stout, D. 2021).
All
Performance records – parentage and traits of interest (e.g. weight traits).
Provides a more objective (data driven approach) towards selection.
Genetic selection based on EBVs leads to faster rates of genetic gain and flock improvement (compared to selection based on raw data or basic observation)
Allows comparisons within breeds, not between breeds.
2030: M
2045: M
2030: M
2045: M
2030: M
2045: M
Use as a tool to aid in the selection of healthy and structurally sound animals.
Genotyping
The process of determining/comparing the genetic variation of DNA sequences (or whole genomes) amongst individuals or populations.
All
Aids in genomic selection of both desirable (and harmful) traits.
Prediction accuracy of genomic selection is influenced by the type (male/female, previous generations) and number of animals that are genotyped (Mohammaddiyeh et al., 2023)
NA
NA
NA
Farmers cannot use this method themselves and therefore require the use of external service providers.
Genetic markers
Genetic markers identify desirable traits in animals which can then be selected for breeding (Meat Promotion Wales. 2013).
All
DNA marker information can be obtained from animals at birth (Hayes et al., 2013).
Can be used to select for traits that are difficult to record.
Genetic progress in slow given the relatively long generation interval in cattle and sheep
NA
NA
NA
Farmers cannot use this method themselves and therefore require the use of external service providers.
Gene editing
A method for editing individual genes within the genome of a cell, embryo or ovum to bring about a desired genetic change.
All
The ability to eliminate undesirable traits.
Accelerates rate of genetic improvement.
Introduces variation into a population e.g. disease resistance
Identifying the appropriate genes/ genomic site can be challenging, time consuming and expensive.
Appendix A: REA and stakeholder interviews methodology
REA methodology
The REA methodology used for this project aligned with NERC methodology (Collins et al., 2015) and comprised of the following steps.
Define the search strategy protocol, identify key search words or terms, define inclusion/exclusion criteria. This step helped to focus the review on the most relevant sources. Inclusion and exclusion criteria were also defined. For example, studies related to reducing emissions through feed additives were excluded.
Searching for evidence and recording findings. Due to the short timescales of this REA, we searched for literature using Google Scholar, utilising our accounts with Science Direct and Research Gate to access restricted pdfs where required. For each search, we recorded the date, search string and number of results found, each search string was assigned a reference number. Examples of search strings include:
breeding for reduced methane emissions
policy drivers for reduced methane emissions in livestock “breeding”
breeding for reduced methane emissions in livestock “Scotland”
Screening. Evidence was then screened, initially by title and a selection of sources were screened by the abstract, applying the criteria developed in step 1. This step ensures the relevance and robustness of the evidence that was included in the study.
Extract and appraise the evidence. Evidence was then extracted from the papers after screening, this included methane reduction values, traits that lead to reduced emissions and the technologies involved in the process.
Stakeholder interview methodology
Stakeholder interviews were used to collect information that may have been absent from the literature, for example on trials currently taking place that will not yet be included in publications. The stakeholders included researchers and individuals from farmer representative groups. We invited farmers for interview, however, only confirmed one farmer for an interview.
The semi-structured interviews took place over Microsoft Teams, with questions covering all parts of the study. For instance, asking for views on the key traits to select for, any examples of farmers choosing livestock based on emissions and the benefits and risks.
We did seven one-to-one interviews (with four stakeholders based in Scotland) and a group interview with nine stakeholders, all located in Scotland. The group interview was done to allow space for conversation and discussion between stakeholders. During this meeting, we presented the key themes raised in the one-to-one interviews. This included the barriers and drivers to uptake, the availability of technologies and the structural needs to support uptake.
Appendix B: New Zealand sheep case study
Country information
New Zealand is an island nation in the South Pacific and has many similarities to Scotland in terms of its geography and climate. Agriculture is integral to the New Zealand economy with the sector accounting for 10% of gross domestic product (GDP), over 65% of export revenue and almost 12% of the workforce. In 2023 there were 26,821,846 sheep in New Zealand, down from approximately 70,000,000 in the 1980s.
Around half of GHG emissions in New Zealand (49% in 2021) and 91% of biogenic methane emissions stem from agriculture, with sheep farming a key contributor.
New Zealand has relevant international and domestic emissiontargets, including the Global Methane Pledge, and the Climate Change Response (Zero Carbon) Amendment Act 2019, which sets a net zero target by 2050. There is a specific reduction target for biogenic methane of 10% relative to 2017 levels by 2030, and 24 – 47% by 2050. New Zealand also has emissions’ budgets and emissions’ reduction plans which sets out policies and strategies for meeting the budgets.
Accelerating new mitigations such as breeding for low-methane sheep is seen as an important way to reduce emissions alongside the pricing of agriculture emissions, as well as support initiatives.
Relevant research, programmes and technologies
The New Zealand Agricultural Greenhouse Gas Research Centre (NZAGRC) and the Pastoral Greenhouse Gas Research Consortium (PGgRc) are key leaders in the robust and comprehensive programme of research in New Zealand.
The NZAGRC is a Government funded centre which invests and coordinates research for practical and cost-effective reductions of agricultural GHG. One of its main targets of reducing enteric methane emissions.
The PGgRc is a joint initiative of the New Zealand Government and the agricultural sector which funds research into ways to reduce methane emissions, including from sheep, such as breeding. It also provides knowledge and tools for farmers to help mitigate GHG, for instance research reports (‘Sheep farmers now able to breed “low methane” sheep’), and fact sheets, with the aim of increasing understanding around the research.
The NZAGRC and PGgRc led the following research programmes related to breeding for reduced methane emissions:
Low emitting sheep were genotyped and markers were used to identify low emitting traits which confirmed a genetic basis for the variation in methane emissions. After 13 years of selecting for low emitting traits, a 16% difference in methane emissions was found between low and high emitting sheep. Other key findings include no negative impacts on physiology, productivity and health when selecting for reduced emissions. Predications have also been made that with the low emitting flock a 1% decrease in methane emissions per year is achievable The low emitting flock has been producing more wool and leaner meat and the emissions savings are both permanent and cumulative. This programme is ongoing and has produced one of the most comprehensive datasets in the world.
A methane breeding value was launched in 2019 from research undertaken by NZAGRC and PGRC. This was made available to selected ram breeders through Beef + Lamb Genetics and gives the sector a practical tool to make decisions with. This has then led to the development of the Cool Sheep Programme.
The Cool Sheep™ Programme was launched in 2022. This three-year programme aims to provide every sheep farmer in New Zealand the chance to use genetic selection to reduce GHG emissions. As well as supporting farmers, this programme gathers phenotype data which feeds back into research. This is available to farmers who are reviewing rams for selection on N Prove. Breeders wanting to produce low-methane rams do so by measuring a proportion of their flock using PAC. When combined with other information and sheep genotyping, this is used to provide a methane breeding value. In November 2023, bookings for use of the PAC chambers by stud breeders were fully subscribed, indicating uptake is high. They note that progress is slow in terms of methane emissions reduction around 2-3% per year, with single trait selection, although this is cumulative.
The four workstreams of the project are:
Ram supply: Measuring rams with PAC to make low-emitting rams available for breeding.
National Impact: using GHG calculators on farms to show methane reductions, rewarding farmers for their efforts.
Awareness and outreach: increasing knowledge for farmers, improving public awareness of efforts to reduce emissions while improving national productivity.
Key policies
There is no government policy legislating livestock breeding for reduced methane emissions in New Zealand. However, there are policies that that may contribute to introducing this in the future.
The Emissions Trading Scheme (ETS) is a key tool in New Zealand to help reduce emissions. Under the ETS, businesses must measure and report on their GHG emissions, and surrender one ‘emissions unit’ (an NZU) to the Government for each tonne of emissions emitted. They do this by purchasing NZU. The Government sets and reduces the number of NZU supplied into the scheme over time. This limits the quantity that emitters can emit, in line with emission reduction targets. Businesses who participate in the ETS can also buy and sell units from each other i.e. emitters can buy NZU from forestry companies or farmers to offset emissions. The price for units reflects supply and demand in the scheme. All sectors of New Zealand’s economy, apart from agriculture, pay for their emissions through their ETS surrender obligations. The agriculture sector must report its emissions but does not have surrender obligations.
Currently, no major incentive exists for agricultural producers to reduce their emissions. The ETS was not seen as the right mechanism to price agricultural emissions.
Instead, Government, industry representatives and Māori formed the He Waka Eke Noa – Primary Sector Climate Action Partnership (the Partnership) to reduce agricultural emissions. It is committed to designing an on-farm pricing system that ensures New Zealand’s agricultural products remain internationally competitive while reducing emissions.
Key Stakeholders
Key stakeholders involved in the research, technologies, programmes and policies include:
Agricultural Greenhouse Gas Research Centre, Government-funded centre which invests and coordinates research for reductions of agricultural GHG.
Crown Research Institutes, Crown-owned companies that carry out scientific research.
Beef + Lamb New Zealand, a farmer-owned, industry organisation representing New Zealand’s sheep and beef farmers.
Dairy Companies Association of New Zealand, representing dairy manufacturing and exporting companies.
Dairy NZ, industry organisation that represents all dairy farmers.
Farmers.
He Pou a Rangi – Climate Change Commission, an independent Crown entity that provides advice to government on climate issues
Iwi Māori, tribal entities and largest social units in Māori society that represent a group of people and land area
Māori Landowner groups, groups that represent Māori land that is governed and protected under specific statutes
Meat Industry Association, voluntary trade association representing red meat processors, marketers and exporters
Ministry for the Environment, New Zealand Government’s primary adviser on environmental matters
Pastoral Greenhouse Gas Research Consortium, provides knowledge and tools for farmers, to mitigate GHG
Public
Scientists and academics
Successes of research, technologies, programmes and policies
There are many successes in New Zealand for identifying emissions savings, policy drivers and behaviour change which would lead to improved breeding for reduced emissions.
Full subscription of the Cool Sheep programme to use genetic selection to reduce GHG emissions highlights the keen interest in this programme from farmers
Within the proposal for emission pricing, there have been the following successes that are likely to help drive behaviour change to uptake methane emission reduction breeding selection:
A farm level, split-gas levy gives farmers flexibility to determine the most efficient, cost-effective mitigation practices for their farms (Stakeholder comment, 2023).
The He Waka Eke Noa partnership involved key stakeholders discussing practical solutions to reducing emissions (Stakeholder comment, 2023).
While a policy for pricing agricultural emissions has not yet been legislated and implemented, discussions about a policy helped make New Zealand farmers more aware of their emissions and how to manage them.
Challenges of research, technologies, programmes and policies
There are some challenges with the New Zealand scenario that are relevant for identifying emissions savings, policy drivers and behaviour change which would lead to improved breeding for reduced emissions.
The fully prescribed uptake of the Cool Sheep programme in 2023 may highlight potential challenges with sourcing enough infrastructure to support all farmers interested in the programme.
In particular, there are challenges related to the agriculture emissions pricing:
Mitigation options under proposed policies are more currently more suited to dairy farmers than sheep and beef farmers.
The sheep and beef sectors are expected to be impacted by the pricing of emissions more than other farming sectors. There are likely to be disproportionate impacts on Māori due to the large proportion of Māori ownership in the sheep and beef sectors and historical context.
Potentially ancillary challenges and unforeseen challenges from the proposal such as environmental and social challenges due to land use changes due to the need to reduce emissions i.e. increased planting of forest may lead to landscapes changes etc.
The recent change in Government has posed a challenge. The 2025 implementation target for implementing the pricing of emissions is expected to be pushed back until 2030 (Stakeholder comment, 2023) and uptake of other methane related programmes could waver too.
Relevance in Scotland
There are some key learnings from the New Zealand scenario that are relevant for identifying emissions savings, policy drivers and behaviour change which would lead to improved breeding for reduced emissions.
At this stage, it is hard to determine exactly what has encouraged uptake of the Cool Sheep Programme and PAC measurements by sheep farmers. However it is assumed that discussions around agriculture emissions pricing and increased awareness, as well as financial assistance, has no doubt contributed to uptake.
The He Waka Eke Noa partnership highlighted that each livestock sector has different requirements. In Scotland, for example, stakeholders interviewed for this project suggested that it may be difficult to introduce breeding practices in the sheep sector due to its extensive nature. In addition, there is less frequent cashflow in the sheep and beef sectors compared to dairy, making it more difficult to introduce new practices. In New Zealand suggestions have been made that the dairy industry has had a better lobbying influence in the development of the policy than the sheep and beef industry and have been more successful at influencing a policy that better suits their needs (Stakeholder comment, 2023). Therefore, any consultations or partnerships must include different livestock types and stakeholders, and consider the differences between upland or lowland systems.
New Zealand is one of the first countries in the world to attempt to price agriculture emissions therefore can provide a huge amount of learning that should be considered by Scotland in developing policy around methane reduction.
Having an emissions number to reduce from makes it easier to see how actions will impact. This will encourage the consideration of emission reductions as part of general on-farm decision making, on-farm investment decisions and other considerations.
The policy impacts on certain farmers and Māori may be of relevance to island farmers and crofters with unique challenges, who may be disproportionately impacted by any climate policies in Scotland.
Research from the NZAGRC and the PGgRc has produced schemes like the Cool Sheep Programme.
The ram selection tool nProve provides a user-friendly platform for farmers to select the traits they want from a ram, including methane production. It gives farmers a tool to compare emissions between different animals before purchasing a ram, bull or semen. Because of the Cool Sheep programme and because there are planned policies to reduce emissions, there may be an incentive to use this metric. It may be possible to build on existing tools such as ScotEID and RamCompare in the future to create a similar platform (not only for sheep).
A policy for pricing agricultural emissions has not yet been legislated and therefore whether it has/will contribute to reduced emissions is yet to be realised. However government modelling suggests that the levy could achieve sufficient emissions reductions to meet or exceed methane targets. Discussions about a policy helped make New Zealand farmers more aware of their emissions and how to manage them.
Appendix C: Canada dairy case study
Country information
Canada has similarities in climate and geography to Scotland. Agriculture is a key aspect of the Canadian economy with agriculture and the agri-food system generating $143.8 billion Canadian Dollars (CD$) (around 7%) of Canada’s GDP. Canada is also the fifth-largest exporter of agri-food and seafood in the world. Dairy is a key part of the sector and is a top commodity in five of Canada’s provinces/territories.
Description of relevant research, programmes and technologies
Canada is undertaking research and programmes focused on breeding and new genomic technologies for reduced methane emissions in dairy production systems:
The Efficient Dairy Genome Project (EDGP) developed genomic-based methods for selecting dairy cattle with reduced methane emissions and improved feed efficiency. The project was underpinned by an extensive database used for genomic analysis. For example, correlating MIR with reduced methane emissions. The project also recognised the necessity of featuring the economic, environmental and social benefits of selecting for reduced methane emissions.
The Resilient Dairy Genome Project (RDGP) aims to integrate genomic approaches to improve dairy cattle resilience and industry sustainability. The project builds on the EDGP, with a focus on additional data collection, management and visualisation to support genomic analyses. Researchers noted an essential component is understanding the interaction between enteric methane emissions and specific farm conditions. For example, predicting methane emissions of individual animals and whole herds using milk MIR spectroscopy. By acknowledging the crucialness of collaboration with industry partners, the project will ensure results will render user-friendly products to enable technological uptake.
An ongoing commercial endeavour between genetic evaluation provider, Lactanet Canada and genetics supplier, Semex Alliance aims to develop a reliable methane efficiency index that can be easily integrated with common selection indices such as fertility, disease resistance and lifetime profitability.
Description of key policies related to reducing methane emissions through breeding
There are currently no government policies legislating livestock breeding for reduced methane emissions in Canada, however there are some policies that are likely to eventually incentivise it.
Agricultural Methane Reduction Challenge provided funding awarding up to $12 million CD$ to innovators designing practices, processes, and technologies to reduce enteric methane emissions.
Key Stakeholders
Key stakeholders involved in the research, technologies, programmes and policies include:
University of Guelph, and University of Alberta, orchestrate EDGP and RDGP
Successes of research, technologies, programmes and policies
There are many successes in the Canadian scenario that are relevant to identifying potential emissions savings, and in identifying policy drivers and behaviour change which would lead to improved breeding for reduced emissions.
Public-Private Partnerships (PPP) between research and industry can be accredited for the establishment of Canada’s major EDGP and RDGP, and were paramount in the development of the sophisticated database. Stakeholders Lactanet Canada and Semex Alliance effectively utilised this database, and in April 2023, Canada became the first country in the world to commercially market dairy semen containing methane efficiency as a relative breeding value (RBV). Their database and AI catalogue now includes 26 Holstein bulls with proven methane reduction capabilities, and a further 165 predicted. Semex Alliance also estimate widespread adoption of the low-methane trait could reduce methane emissions from Canada’s dairy herd by 1.5% annually, and up to 20-30% by 2050. The collective effort of all members of the Canadian dairy industry has enabled significant progression, to which the inclusion of a methane efficiency genetic valuation can be traced to.
A GHG Offset Credit System can incentivise farmers to undertake innovative projects that reduce GHGs for financial reward.
Challenges of research, technologies, programmes and policies
There are some challenges with the Canadian scenario that are relevant to identifying potential emissions savings, and in identifying policy drivers and behaviour change for improved breeding for reduced emissions.
There are some key learnings from the Canadian scenario that are relevant for Scotland in terms of identifying potential emissions savings, and in identifying policy drivers and behaviour change for improved breeding for reduced emissions.
When compared to other livestock sectors, the data gathering process in the dairy industry is unique as daily milking and feeding activities provide a non-invasive opportunity to measure individual animals without major management changes. Coupling the simplistic nature of data collection with advanced existing genetic databases and the widespread use of artificial insemination (AI), the Scottish dairy industry is capable of reducing enteric methane emissions efficiently. Applying knowledge or making predictions from existing information has great potential to eliminate and/or significantly reduce cost, data collection periods and the requirement of on-farm experimentation.
Genetic change is a simple and low-cost approach to reduce enteric methane emissions in dairy production systems. Owing to modern technologies and transport capabilities, the methane efficiency RBV developed in Canada is compatible with the Scottish dairy herd and can be purchased and administered via AI to help begin reducing enteric methane emissions.
Canada has precedented instigating good working relationships with farmers, a goal achieved by highlighting the primary objective of research is to enhance industry sustainability. In response, many Canadian dairy farmers have also recognised constructive engagement with research and industry is fundamental. The establishment of a comprehensive and transparent database has provided assurance and confidence to adopt new best management practices.
Scotland could consider monitoring the effectiveness of the Offset Credit System currently being considered in Ottawa to see if it incentivises behaviour change or changes finances and markets.
Canada does not currently offer incentives for low-methane cattle breeding, and livestock breeders do not charge a premium for methane efficiency traits. However, discussions on this topic are ongoing between stakeholders and policy makers and it is looking likely a financial benefit will be introduced in the future.
Appendix D: Ireland beef case study
Country information
Ireland has a similar climate and geography to Scotland. Agriculture is key aspect of the Irish economy with the agriculture, forestry and fishing GDP valued at €3,672m in 2020. In 2020, 55% of farms were specialist beef, with many others including cattle as part of a mixed farm.
In 2022, agriculture was responsible for 38.4% of GHG emissions, making it the sector with the biggest share of emissions. 62.6% was caused by enteric fermentation.
Ireland is part of the Global Methane pledge and legally obliged as an EU Member State to reduce emissions under the EU’s Effort Sharing Regulation, including in agriculture. Ireland’s 2030 target is to deliver at least a 42% reduction by 2030 compared to 2005 levels.
Ireland has developed the Food Vision 2030 Strategy for the Irish agri-food sector which commits to reducing biogenic methane. This includes the ‘Ag Climatise’ Roadmap, covering animal breeding, with an aim to genotype the entire national herd by 2030 to develop and enhance dairy and beef breeding programmes.
Description of relevant research, programmes and technologies
The Irish Cattle Breeding Federation (ICBF) launched the National Genotyping Programme (NGP) for cattle in 2023. This offers beef and dairy farmers a low-cost option to collect DNA samples from calves at birth which can be used for genotyping to identify specific traits or characteristics. The aim of the programme is to achieve a fully genotyped herd in Ireland. This has made national genetic indexes available to farmers, including methane traits. It also allows farmers to optimise the health and productivity of their herd, reducing its emissions intensity. The ICBF also publish methane evaluations for AI sires that have had methane data recorded.
Teagasc has an important role in the research in Ireland. Animal breeding is one of the four solutions from Teagasc to reduce methane emissions from livestock. Current research projects include:
GREENBREED: Measured methane at the Tully Progeny Test centre using a GreenFeed automated head chamber system. This research led to the publication of genomic evaluations for methane emissions in Irish beef cattle and sheep. It found notable differences in methane emissions from livestock being fed the same diet, 11% of these in cattle were found to be due to genetic differences. This indicates that breeding programmes to reduce methane will be effective in Ireland.
Collaborative research by Teagasc and ICBF found a 30% difference in methane emissions from beef cattle of a similar size. This lead to the residual methane emissions (RME)[10] index being identified as a metric to rank animals.
Description of key policies
There is no legislation on livestock breeding for reduced methane emissions in Ireland, but the following policies related to GHGs may support this.
The Beef Data and Genomics Programme (BDGP) paid suckler farmers to improve the genetic merit of their herd through data collection and genotyping, with the aim of lowering GHG emissions by improving quality and efficiency.
Payments were made of €142.50/ha for the first 6.66 ha and €120/ha for the remaining eligible hectares (the equivalent of €95 for the first 10 cows and €80 for the remaining cows), farmers have to undertake specific requirements.
These requirements include calf registration, detailed surveys of animal characteristics, genotyping and tissue tag sampling, and implementing a replacement strategy based on high genetic merit animals.
Additional support in the form of the carbon navigator decision making tool and training courses for farmers are also provided.
Participants of the programme were found to be achieving improvements at a faster rate compared to farms not taking part. The impact of the programme can help to promote smaller, more efficient suckler cows to produce more efficient beef.
The Suckler Carbon Efficiency Programme:
As part of its Common Agriculture Policy Strategic Plan (CSP), Ireland developed ENVCLIM (70) 53SCEP as a follow-on from the BDGP, providing support to beef farmers who implement breeding actions that aim to lower the overall GHG emissions. The BDGP was shown to deliver on both environmental and productive efficiency and emissions per suckler cow are being reduced through breeding strategies. Another measure in the CSP, 53SCT, targets training to complement the Suckler Carbon Efficiency Programme.
Key Stakeholders
Key stakeholders involved in the research, technologies, programmes and policies include:
Teagasc, Agriculture and Food Development Authority providing research, advisory and training to the agriculture and food industry and rural communities.
Department of Agriculture, Food and the Marine, Irish government department leading, developing and regulating the agri-food sector, protecting public health and optimising social, economic and environmental benefits.
Irish Cattle Breeding Federation (ICBF), non-profit organisation charged with providing cattle breeding information services.
Irish Environmental Protection Agency, independent public body to protect, improve and restore the environment through regulation, scientific knowledge and working with others.
Irish Farmers Association, Ireland’s largest farming representative organisation.
Farmers.
Food Vision Sheep and Beef Group, group of stakeholders established by the Minister for Agriculture Food and the Marine to identify measures that the sector can take to contribute to reducing emissions from the agricultural sector
Successes of research, technologies, programmes and policies
There are many successes in the Irish scenario that are relevant to identifying potential emissions savings, and in identifying policy drivers and behaviour change which would lead to improved breeding for reduced emissions.
The NGP is a useable database of genotyped methane information available for farmers to use. This is the result of comprehensive research programmes, collaboration between breed societies, and creating useful systems for farmers to benefit from. Making this data easily available to all farmers across Ireland can encourage behaviour change and is a successful programme that could be considered in Scotland. The creation of the ICBF has been essential for this, as it means there is one body overseeing all genotyping and data storage.
The BDGP is an example of how payments to farmers can be used to gather data and reward farmers for adopting positive practices.
Research from GREENBREED indicates that breeding programs to reduce methane emissions will be effective for selecting low-emitting livestock, especially combined with the national genomic evaluations, and will have no negative impact on performance and profitability.
Ireland has produced methane evaluations to enable farmers to identify opportunities to reduce emissions and improve the sustainability of their enterprise.
Overall, the authors did not find evidence of a quantifiable impact from introducing methane related actions and policies. This may be because the relevant research, programmes and technologies as mentioned above are still relatively new and it is too early to quantify. For example, the NGP is to only be completed by 2027, whereas following on from data collected from methane evaluations, methods are still being developed on how best to incorporate methane traits into beef and dairy production.
Challenges of research, technologies, programmes and policies
Additional research would be required to understand how the policies and programmes were received by farmers and how successful the agricultural community views them to be. We contacted Ireland representatives for involvement in stakeholder interviews however we did not get a response.
Relevance to Scotland
There are some key learnings from Ireland that are relevant for Scotland in terms of identifying potential emissions savings, and in identifying policy drivers and behaviour change for improved breeding for reduced emissions.
A national database was suggested by Scottish stakeholders (Stakeholder comment, 2023). Therefore, Ireland’s NGP provides an example for Scotland if this was to develop. In particular:
predicted transmitting ability (PTA) could give Scottish farmers and crofters an easy way of comparing their livestock to other farmers and understanding where they are compared to the average.
Challenges in the Scottish context could include reluctance on the part of different breed societies to pool data.
Ireland have shown that emissions for cattle can be reduced through appropriate breeding strategies and incentives for farmers. Such as subsidising DNA sampling of calves which helps to genotype the national herd.
The creation of the Food Vision Beef and Sheep Group to chart a path for the sector to meet the emissions emission targets is a potential model for ways that Scotland might bring key stakeholders into the development of key policies to reduce emissions.
The main ways behaviour change has been encouraged is by making the programmes and policies mentioned above easy to access, for example, the ICBF also provides information to help farmers make decisions about their herd through HerdPlus.
The BDGP and CSP provides training to farmers who are using the scheme, for which funding is provided.
Appendix E: Methodology and results for the quantification of potential emission savings
Methane emission savings are achievable through breeding and new genomic technologies. The main sources of methane from cattle and sheep in Scotland are enteric fermentation and managed manures. We have chosen to focus our calculations on emissions from enteric fermentation for two reasons:
Methane emissions from managed manures are much smaller.
Changes to livestock by selecting traits which lead to lower methane emissions will have a greater impact on the emissions from enteric fermentation rather than the emissions produced from livestock manures.
To align with the CCP’s targets, of achieving net zero in Scotland by 2045 and a 75% reduction in emissions by 2030, we present data for potential emission reductions for 2030 and 2045. The following data were used to quantify the potential emission savings:
Key traits leading to reduced methane emissions, from the REA.
Methane reduction values associated with traits, from the REA.
Note: A particular challenge was identifying emission reduction values that were associated with specific traits, that we could use in our calculations. We have used the data available to draw conclusions.
Baseline emissions data for Scotland from the National Atmospheric Emissions Inventory (NAEI, 2023).
Uptake values (sector specific) for adoption of chosen traits through breeding, based on findings in the REA, stakeholder interviews and expert judgement.
Baseline methane emissions
To calculate the baseline methane emissions for dairy, beef and sheep, the enteric fermentation emissions of the livestock types for Scotland in 2021 were extracted from the NAEI (2023)[11].
Current uptake rate for adoption of traits
The current uptake rate is an estimated current baseline based on evidence gathered in the REA review of evidence and technical knowledge. This provides a baseline for additional uptake under the scenarios presented below.
Current uptake is set at 75% for dairy cattle, due to the high usage of reproductive technologies (see Section 4.1.3), in particular use of sexed semen and artificial insemination (AI) using Holstein Friesian semen, a key breed which already has proven methane efficiency ratings published as part of the breeding profile. It is understood that methane efficiency ratings are also being developed for other key dairy breeds as observed on UK dairy and beef cattle semen sales websites.
Beef cattle uptake has been set at a 40% baseline as findings show that methane efficiency ratings are less regularly published as part of the beef breed profile on UK semen sales websites. However, artificial insemination of beef cattle is relatively common, although it is not a standard practice as in the dairy industry. It is understood adoption of breeding for reduced emissions is developing and evidence is being gathered (see Section 4).
The current baseline for sheep has been set at 10% based on a comparison with New Zealand where there is an uptake rate of 30% (Rowe et al. in 2020). Following discussions with Scottish Government it is acknowledged that there is some technology usage around the world, but that adoption in Scotland is not yet as high as in New Zealand. Therefore, 10% has been chosen as the baseline. This links to understanding of technology uptake in Section 4.
Scenarios
The quantification of emissions savings was based on four different scenarios to reflect various levels of uptake:
The no interventionscenario reflects an increase in uptake of 5% from the current baseline by 2030 and remains at the same level until 2045 for all livestock types.
The voluntary uptake scenario is designed to reflect levels of uptake expected with no other push such as a financial incentive or a relevant policy. This scenario reflects a 5% increase in uptake from the current baseline by 2030, and an additional 5% increase in uptake by 2045 for all livestock types.
The supplier demand scenario is based on companies along the supply chain offering financial incentives to farmers that implement breeding techniques to reduce methane emissions. This value is set at a mid-point between the voluntary uptake and the regulatory scenario.
The policy changes scenario represents the uptake where legislation has been introduced that will require farmers to introduce methane reducing breeding techniques to their herds. This scenario reflects a 10% increase in uptake from the current baseline by 2030. By 2045 it is assumed there would be 100% uptake for dairy cattle due to the large-scale usage of AI within the industry and progress seen on methane efficiency profiling already published within the key breed profile. It is assumed that beef cattle could reach 80% uptake by 2045, and sheep could reach a 60% uptake by 2045 under a regulatory scenario.
Scenario uptake values are presented for dairy, beef and sheep in Table 17.
Table 17. Scenario implementation values for dairy, beef and sheep
Type
Scenario
Current baseline
Change from current baseline to 2030
2030 uptake
Change from current baseline to 2045
2045 uptake
Dairy
1. No intervention
75%
5%
80%
5%
80%
2. Voluntary uptake
75%
5%
80%
10%
85%
3. Supplier demand
75%
7.5%
82.5%
17.5%
92.5%
4. Policy changes
75%
10%
85%
25%
100%
Beef
1. No intervention
40%
5%
45%
5%
45%
2. Voluntary uptake
40%
5%
45%
10%
50%
3. Supplier demand
40%
7.5%
47.5%
25%
65%
4. Policy changes
40%
10%
50%
40%
80%
Sheep
1. No intervention
10%
5%
15%
5%
15%
2. Voluntary uptake
10%
5%
15%
10%
20%
3. Supplier demand
10%
7.5%
17.5%
30%
40%
4. Policy changes
10%
10%
20%
50%
60%
Traits
Traits and technologies with a possible relationship with methane emissions and emission reductions were identified through a REA of relevant literature (see Section 4).
Traits identified were further reviewed to assess their applicability to emission reduction calculations. When assessing each trait to quantify the emissions savings, appropriate values were found to be scarce in the literature. There were two key reasons that led to studies and/or traits being excluded from use in this task:
A significant portion of the literature did not present methane emission values and was instead looking at genetic correlations between traits. Therefore, literature that did not present methane emission values or change in methane emissions, either as absolute or relative values, were excluded.
Often the changes in methane emission were comparative to a baseline that was not appropriate for our calculations focusing on methane emission from enteric fermentation. For example, papers excluded in our review presented changes to emissions from the entire lifecycle or system.
A summary of the traits, where appropriate values were obtained, are presented in Table 17 below.
Table 18. Traits identified with appropriate methane reduction values used in the calculations of emissions savings
Sector
Trait Category
Trait Name
Unit of baseline
Value of methane reduction from baseline
Beef
Production
Feed efficiency
kg CO2e/kg product
7%
Offspring carcass weight
kgCO2e/per kg meat per breeding cow per year
1.3%
Climate
Methane yield
gCH4/kgDMI per generation
12%
Dairy
Production
Feed efficiency
kg CO2e/kg product
5%
Milk fat + protein
MJ CH4/kg milk
12%
Milk yield
kg CH4/kg milk
15%
Climate
Methane intensity
kg CH4/kg milk
24%
Sheep
Production
Feed efficiency
kg CO2e/kg product
7%
Climate
Methane yield
g CH4/kg DMI
35%
Feed efficiency
References: (Alford, A.R. et al. 2006; Worden, D. et al. 2020; Rowe, S.J. et al. 2021)
The ability of animals to optimally convert feed into liveweight with minimal losses of energy, meaning that animals with high feed efficiency consume less than their peers with equivalent liveweight and weight gain. This trait was identified across all three livestock types and has been highlighted by the stakeholders and the literature as a key trait for emission reductions (see Section 4).
Methane focused climate traits
References: (Quinton, C.D. et al. 2018; De Haas, Y. et al. 2021; Jonker, A. et al. 2018)
Methane traits are likely to have the greatest impact on methane emissions. Here the methane related traits were focused on manipulating the gut microbiome and selecting for animals with certain microbial populations that led to lower methane emissions. While methane traits were identified for all three livestock types, they were presented differently across the literature.
Offspring carcass weight – Specific to beef cattle
References: (Martínez-Álvaro, M. et al., 2022)
Focus on offspring carcass weight in beef cattle reduces methane emissions through increased quantity of product per animal, therefore reducing the number of animals required to produce the same amount of beef product.
Milk yield and Milk fat and protein – Specific to dairy cattle
References: (Bell, M.J. et al. 2010)
Traits reduce methane emissions per kg of milk while maintaining production levels and quality.
Emissions reduction
To calculate the emission reduction of different traits under the different scenarios the following formula is used:
Where:
= Emissions savings (kt CH4 for the livestock type)
= Baseline emissions (kt CH4 for the livestock type)
= Uptake (U) for the projected year (y)
= Emission reduction coefficient (%)
This formula calculates a percentage of emissions based on emissions reduction potential and uptake rate and subtracts this portion from baseline emissions. The result is an estimate of methane emissions if the reduction potential and uptake for the trait is achieved. The savings were then calculated by subtracting the estimated emissions from the baseline emissions, and both were calculated in units of percentage of baseline and absolute values (kt CO2e). This calculation was completed for each trait found in beef, dairy, and sheep sectors, for the years 2030 and 2045.
Limitations in the data:
All traits have been presented separately as the interaction between traits and the impact this would have on emission reductions is unknown.
It is acknowledged that traits found within the literature are presented in different units (see Table 7). Traits selected from the literature also presented a percentage change which was used within the change calculations. The percentage change has been applied to total emissions from the relevant livestock sector due to limited data on specific emissions related to more specific production categories such as CH4 emissions per kg milk produced.
Methane efficiency focused traits have shown to have the greatest methane reduction potential for all three livestock types. However, it is noted that there was less literature available on this subject compared to feed efficiency. Due to the smaller quantity of literature available the reduction potential values selected for methane efficiency could be less robust. Greater consistency in measurement, modelling, and presentation of methane efficiency traits and their impacts on emissions savings and animal performance production could be useful research to fill this knowledge gap.
Traits reduction factors compiled within the review were presented in different units, however, all presented a percentage reduction. It has been assumed that the percentage reduction would be applicable to be used as a reduction factor as this would have a direct impact on methane reductions independent of the unit the factor was recorded in.
Limited data was provided within the literature reviewed on the length of time until each trait reaches maximum potential within the population. However, it is assumed that once the trait has been bred into the total population there will be no additional improvements unless new breeding traits are selected. Within the calculations we have assumed that traits will account for their maximum potential to the selected population at the assessment point (i.e., in 2030 100% of the trait will apply to the current baseline uptake with the additional percentage uptake).
There is the possibility that, due to the nature of genetics, when selecting for certain traits, that they will not fully spread throughout the entire population where the trait is applied. This is a complicated process, and it has been assumed that at each assessment point (2030 and 2045) each trait has reached maximum spread in the portion of the population that has taken up the measure (i.e., in 2030 100% of the trait will apply to the current baseline uptake with the additional percentage uptake).
Results
Figures 4-7 show that in each sector, up to 2030, the reductions are relatively steady, but there is a greater reduction at 2045, influenced by the proposed increase in uptake. Due to the proposed uptake percentages the policy change scenario presents the greatest reduction under all traits, with the no intervention scenario showing the smallest reduction due to a 5% increase in uptake in 2030 and no further uptake in 2045.
Figure 4 presents the methane emissions under the four scenarios for the three traits selected for beef cattle: feed efficiency, offspring carcass weight and methane production. The methane production focused trait has the largest emission reduction (reduction of 161.1 kt CO2e in 2045 under the policy changes scenario), whereas the offspring carcass weight focused trait has the smallest impact at less than 12.4 kt CO2e reduced by 2045 under the maximum reduction scenario.
In correlation with beef trait reductions, methane intensity traits have the largest reduction to methane emissions in dairy cattle, with a reduction of 35.4 kt CO2e observed under the policy change scenario by 2045, as presented in Figure 5. While breeding for methane reductions through feed efficiency has the least change at 7.4 kt CO2e reduced by 2045, this could be due to the work already completed on feed efficiency breeding within dairy. Traits focused on milk fat and protein and milk yield provide similar reduction level levels, however there is the potential for overlapping improvements with feed efficiency as breeding focused on improvements to milk production traits could also link to improvements to feed efficiency.
Reduction potential for sheep is presented in Figure 6 for the two selected traits: feed efficiency and methane yield. As with the cattle categories, the trait focused on methane improvements (methane yield) had the largest potential reduction at 185.6 kt CO2e reduced by 2045 under the policy change scenario, whilst feed efficiency traits saw a smaller reduction of 37.1 kt CO2e by 2045 under the policy change scenario.
Figure 4. Methane emissions for beef cattle traits against the 2021 baseline enteric methane emissions of beef cattle in Scotland. Please note the y-axes do not start at zero to allow for greater visibility of results.
Figure 5. Methane emissions for dairy traits against the 2021 baseline enteric emissions of dairy cattle in Scotland. Please note the y-axes do not start at zero to allow for greater visibility of results.
Figure 6. Methane emissions for sheep traits against the 2021 baseline enteric emissions of sheep in Scotland. Please note the y-axes do not start at zero to allow for greater visibility of results.
Figure 7 presents the methane emissions by 2045 under all scenarios for all traits for each livestock type. The difference in total enteric fermentation emissions for each livestock type can be seen by the dotted baseline line. Beef cattle emitted the majority of the methane from enteric fermentation in Scotland in 2021, with sheep emissions being less than half those of beef cattle, and dairy under a quarter those of beef cattle.
Figure 7. Methane emissions for all livestock for all traits presented against baseline enteric emissions of beef, dairy and sheep in Scotland.
How to cite this publication:
Jenkins, B., Herold, L., de Mendonça, M., Loughnan, H., Willcocks, J., David, T., Ginns, B., Rock, L., Wilshire, J., Avis, K (2024) ‘Breeding for reduced methane emissions in livestock’, ClimateXChange. http://dx.doi.org/10.7488/era/5569
While every effort is made to ensure the information in this report is accurate, no legal responsibility is accepted for any errors, omissions or misleading statements. The views expressed represent those of the author(s), and do not necessarily represent those of the host institutions or funders.
DNA contains the information required to create the entire organism, a unit of DNA containing specific information to create a protein or set of proteins is referred to as a gene. It is these proteins which make up the body and control chemical reactions between cells. the study of genes is referred to as genetics. ↑
The productive lifespan of livestock. For beef and dairy – a longer productive lifetime would reduce the number of replacement heifers needed to maintain a constant herd size. For sheep – the longer ewes can produce lambs, production efficiency improves. ↑
The number of lambs born per number of ewes mated, expressed as a percentage. ↑
For beef and dairy – less feed is used for the same output of product and less loss of energy to methane (kg CO2e/kg product). For sheep – this is CO2e but as far as can be told it is only methane in this value. Less feed is used for the same output of product and less loss of energy to methane (kg CO2e/kg product). ↑
The number of kilograms gained by the animal per day, measured in kg/day. ↑
Overall production of the animal (including feed efficiency), supporting the animal to reach its full genetic potential and ensuring it reaches the highest possible level of performance. ↑
ME is expressed as a Relative Breeding Value (RBV) with a mean score of 100 and a standard deviation (how much a point differs from the average), of five. A score below 100 indicates below average and a score above 100 indicates above average. A higher RBV indicates a higher methane reduction potential. ↑
The amount of methane produced per unit of milk or sheepmeat produced (kg CH4/kg milk/sheepmeat). ↑
RME is the difference between the expected methane emissions from an animal based on its size and feed intake, compared to what it actually produces. High RME is undesirable and low RME is desirable. ↑
The generation of energy from organic matter, such as plants, is called bioenergy. The Update to the Climate Change Plan (CCPu) identifies the significant role that bioenergy could play in delivering Scotland’s legally binding commitment to achieve net zero by 2045.
This research examines the economic potential of perennial energy crops (PECs) for farmers and land-managers in Scotland, as well as the wider economic implications.
The three PECs considered are miscanthus, short rotation coppice (SRC) and short rotation forestry (SRF).
Findings
PECs have the potential to generate income for farmers and land-managers in Scotland.
Miscanthus showed the highest average gross margin of the three crops studied but in Scotland there is more suitable land for growing SRC and SRF.
Farmers and land managers may view PECs as a risky proposition due to uncertainty about market demand and achievable crop sale prices, combined with the need for upfront investment to establish production.
The most economically and environmentally advantageous approach is likely to be site-specific and determined by local circumstances.
For further information on the findings please download the report.
If you require the report in an alternative format, such as a Word document, please contact info@climatexchange.org.uk or 0131 651 4783.
The generation of energy from organic matter, such as plants, is called bioenergy. The Update to the Climate Change Plan (CCPu) identifies the significant role that bioenergy could play in delivering Scotland’s legally binding commitment to achieve net zero by 2045. This could be achieved whilst also supporting a green economic recovery from the effects of the Covid-19 pandemic and a just transition that creates jobs and supports people and rural communities.
To meet this expanded role for bioenergy in Scotland, a scaling up of domestic biomass production would be required. The UK Climate Change Committee (CCC) highlighted the opportunity for domestic production as a key pillar for delivering the CCPu ambition.
This research examines the economic potential of perennial energy crops (PECs) for farmers and land-managers, as well as the wider economic implications. The three PECs considered are miscanthus, short rotation coppice (SRC) and short rotation forestry (SRF).
Key findings
Profitability of perennial energy crops
PECs have the potential to generate income for farmers and land-managers in Scotland.
Comparison of gross margins shows income from PECs is likely to be lower than from other typical farm enterprises on suitable land, such as lowland cattle and sheep and ‘mixed agriculture’. This is assessed on the basis of yearly average gross margins over the lifetime of the PEC in comparison to equivalent gross margins for other farm enterprises.
Income (gross margin calculation) from PECs compared very favourably in the analysis compared to the farming type known as ‘general cropping: forage’. This is growing crops for animal consumption, usually on lower quality land, and it typically makes a significant loss.
There is a need for greater confidence that PECs will deliver good economic returns in order for them to be viewed as an attractive, economically viable option by farmers and land managers in Scotland. High upfront establishment costs for perennial energy crops and low revenue potential are both likely to hinder uptake.
Miscanthus showed the highest average gross margin of the three crops studied, at £382 per hectare per year. However, there are some potentially limiting factors:
There is limited theoretical growing area in Scotland, which is much lower than for SRF or SRC.
SRF and SRC showed lower profitability for farmers: £80 and £87 per hectare per year over their lifetime respectively for ‘SRF: broadleaved’ and SRC. However, there is more suitable land for growing these.
SRF conifer would see a negative gross margin, given that the production costs outweigh the value of the crop sold.
Potential opportunities
PECs could help diversify a business, creating additional income, without adding significant additional labour requirements or ongoing input costs because minimal management time and inputs are required once crops are established.
Potential barriers
Cash flow could pose a barrier to uptake. The distribution of costs and income year-on-year for PECs is significantly different to typical farming activities which have an annual profit cycle. PECs need investment in site preparation and planting upfront, but income only arrives after first harvest several years later. This is 2-3 years for miscanthus with subsequent annual harvests, 6 years for SRC with periodical harvests thereafter, and 15 years for SRF first and only harvest.
Farmers and land managers may view PECs as a risky proposition due to uncertainty about market demand and achievable crop sale prices, combined with the need for upfront investment to establish production.
Other potential barriers to uptake include: farmer and land-manager unfamiliarity with PEC production, low appetite for risk, need for new skills, access to equipment and services, concerns about community perception of land-use change, and impacts on other agricultural production, e.g. available animal feed.
Enhancing economic potential and production
Potential approaches to improve the economic potential of PECs in Scotland include:
Financial incentives, such as government specific subsidies under future agricultural support or other market-focused incentives.
Risk reduction strategies, such as secure, attractively priced contracts with end markets, alongside expansion of the market.
Innovations to allow processing at the farm and to improve transportability of crops could also help to increase the economically viable travel distance.
Improving access to skills and knowledge to produce PECs could also remove a barrier to uptake, if economic prospects are improved.
Implications for wider Scottish economy
Future demand for PECs to support the Scottish Government’s climate ambition is likely to require increased production, and previous research suggests 38,000 hectares could be feasibly planted by 2032 and 90,000 by 2045.
We modelled two demand scenarios to illustrate the potential range in results if land was transitioned to growing PECs:
Scenario 1: conversion of approximately 38,000 hectares. This would result in an economic gain in terms of increased gross margin of around £9.6 million. This would however result in a shortfall in non-PEC agricultural yield (crops, stock-feeding crops and grass) of between 537,600 and 700,000 tonnes.
Scenario 2: conversion of approximately 90,000 hectares. This would result in an economic loss of around £9.5 million per year, based on gross margin, and a shortfall in non-PEC agricultural yield (crops, stock-feeding crops and grass) of between 708,200 and 1.6 million tonnes. The financial loss is because under this scenario more economically advantageous land is transitioned to PECs and the PECs perform less well economically.
Economically viable production locations
Economically viable production locations for PECs are influenced by multiple factors including proximity to markets and local access to services and facilities for crop management, such as harvesting contractors, to avoid incurring excessive costs.
The research identified suitable growing regions (some SRC/miscanthus and most for SRF) within an economically viable transport distance to existing biomass plants and potential sites for Bioenergy with Carbon Capture and Storage (BECCS) near the proposed east coast carbon capture and storage feeder pipeline (assumed 50-100 km).
Economic viability may be a barrier to SRF production increases even if suitable land is available, given that it is economically uncompetitive against other land use options.
Potential further steps
Key debates and areas for further research include:
Considering more in-depth ‘whole farm’ economic analysis. This study focused on gross margin comparison, which is useful for comparing specific crops and farm enterprises, but has limitations in terms of how well it allows assessment of integration of energy crops into a whole farm business. This will vary farm to farm but could be explored through farm case studies. This could include considering a wider range of costs for farmers and that after initial set up the PECs would require less workload.
Comparing the economic and environmental potential of using land for energy crops with utilising the same land for other renewable energy options, such as using the land for solar panels alongside grazing.
Exploring the potential role for on-farm use of perennial energy crops.
Considering future biomass markets, including how future Greenhouse Gas Removal (GGR) schemes, global demand and demand from biotechnology sector may impact it.
Identifying how to make domestic biomass from energy crops a more attractive option than imports and a more profitable use of land, and on what basis this can be justified. For example, taking account of full LCA and rewarding greatest emission saving.
Considering in more detail the role of PECs in the context of how the agriculture sector is changing and how it may have to change to reduce GHG emissions.
Considering the value, including the financial value, of other benefits of energy crops, such as flood mitigation or animal shelter, relative to existing or potential alternative land-uses.
Exploring how PECs support/interact with tier 2 or 3 objectives of the ARP.
Considering the impact of subsidies.
The most economically and environmentally advantageous approach is likely to be site-specific and determined by local circumstances. Making judgements about the best use of land is complex for policy makers, farmers and land managers alike. Guidance on this decision-making is likely to be needed.
Abbreviations table
BECCS
Bioenergy with Carbon Capture and Storage
CCC
UK Government Climate Change Committee
CCPu
Scotland’s Climate Change Plan Update (2020)
CXC
ClimateXChange
LFA
Less Favoured Area (a designation in Scotland for disadvantaged agricultural areas – including crofting)
NETs
Negative Emissions Technologies
PEC
Perennial energy crops
SRC
Short Rotation Coppice
SRF
Short Rotation Forestry
Introduction
This evidence assessment focuses on examining the economic potential of perennial energy crops (PECs) for farmers and land-managers in Scotland, along with considering the wider economic implications for Scotland. The assessment builds upon recent ClimateXChange reports which demonstrated that there are significant opportunities for the expansion of perennial energy crop cultivation in Scotland (Martin et al, 2020) and that increased supply of biomass for energy generation from such crops will be needed to meet forecast future demand in the context of Scotland’s climate mitigation plan goals (Meek et al, 2022). However, in scaling up domestic biomass production it is important to consider how the economics intersect with other relevant issues including biodiversity, land-use, water management and a ‘just transition’. This report aims to consider these issues, alongside the economics and support the Scottish Government’s development of policy in relation to perennial energy crop production.
The policy context for energy crops in Scotland
The Scottish Government’s Update to the Climate Change Plan (CCPu) forecast a role for Negative Emissions Technologies (NETs) , including bioenergy with carbon capture and storage (BECCS), to remove carbon dioxide from the atmosphere to compensate for residual emissions. ). The UK Climate Change Committee (CCC) acknowledges Scotland’s opportunity to scale up domestic biomass production to meet this aim, recommending careful consideration of impacts on land-use and agriculture. In line with Scottish Government’s Vision for Agriculture, and set out in the Scottish Agricultural Bill, future subsidy support which will replace Common Agricultural Policy, will be split across unconditional support and support targeted to sustainable food production and environmental outcomes, including low carbon farming and biodiversity. Scotland’s draft ‘Energy Strategy and Just Transition Plan’ aims to use bioenergy where it can best support Scotland’s Net Zero Journey, and aligns with and supports Scotland’s goals for protecting and restoring nature. Considering the role for production of PECs in the evolving Scottish policy landscape will be critical.
Alongside this the UK Government has also published a new biomass strategy, which aims to support sector growth and strengthen biomass sustainability. The strategy acknowledges that bioenergy policy involves a mix of reserved and non-reserved powers, and so as the Scottish Government develops its Bioenergy Policy Statement, Scotland has an opportunity to build on UK policies and develop policies appropriate for Scotland. Further policy information is included in Appendix A.
Introduction to perennial energy crops for Scotland:
Previous research for CXC identified that perennial energy crops (PEC) present opportunities for scaling up biomass production in Scotland, with short-rotation coppice (SRC), short-rotation forestry (SRF) and energy grass Miscanthus, showing most potential (Martin et al, 2020). Details of each crop can be found in Appendix B. PECs support climate mitigation by providing a renewable energy source; displacing fossil fuel use; helping to reverse soil carbon loss, and acting as a carbon sink. When used for energy generation and combined with carbon capture and storage (CCS), such crops have the potential to generate negative emissions and contribute towards Scotland’s net zero ambitions. PECs can also bring additional benefits, such as flood mitigation (see Section 4 below for further details).
Figure 3.2: Schematic diagram of bioenergy with carbon capture and storage [1]
Currently, Scotland grows only a small area of PECs – about 250 ha (Martin et al, 2020). Previous geo-spatial mapping work for Scotland (Martin et al, 2020) has shown theoretical potential for approximately 900 kha of land, to be suitable for PECs (913kha SRF, 219 kha SRC and 52kha Miscanthus – with some overlap between suitable areas) mainly in the east and the lowlands. This analysis considered topography, soil type, climatic variables and suitable land capability classes[2] to identify these theoretically feasible growing areas. Future demand for PECs to support the Scottish Government’s climate ambition is likely to require increased production of such crops.
Markets for PEC Biomass in Scotland
Research[3] has identified the following potential uses of biomass via ‘Negative Emissions Technologies’:
BECCS Power – bioenergy with carbon capture and storage (BECCS) for electricity in a power station
BECCS hydrogen – either via gasification of biomass or steam methane reforming of biomethane, with carbon capture and storage
BECCS in industry (for heat and other industrial processes)
BECCS Biomethane – processing of biomass via Anaerobic Digestion (AD), gasification or pyrolysis, with carbon capture and storage
Biochar – pyrolysis of biomass, with carbon capture and storage
PEC biomass can also be used in combined heat and power plants and biomass boilers at a variety of scales. The market for the biomass produced from PECs is relatively immature in Scotland. There are several biomass energy plants ranging in size from large scale industrial units and power stations to small units supplying individual farms. These mostly utilise wood from local forests, waste wood from Scotland sawmills and other industries so the market for further PEC biomass is currently limited[4]. Scotland’s largest wood-fuelled power station, is located in Markinch, with 55MW capacity utilising mostly recovered wood, some virgin wood chip. The next biggest is Steven’s Croft, in Lockerbie which generates 44MW of electricity and 6MW of heat which initially planned to source fuel from local forests (60%), SRC willow (20%) grown within a 60-mile radius (and requiring around 4,000 hectares land) and recycled wood fibre (20%) (Warren et al., 2016), but the latest data suggests it mostly uses a mix of wood and waste wood[5]. BECCS plants are not expected to deploy in Scotland until 2030.
Evaluating economic potential of PEC in Scotland
To understand the real potential, it is critical to consider not just the overall economic viability of PECs, but also how the demand for land for PECs can be balanced against, or integrated with other uses such as food and fodder production and biodiversity, and the skills, knowledge and attitudes of the farmers or land managers.
The economic potential of energy crops
A Rapid Evidence Assessment (REA) seeking evidence of the economic potential of energy crops in Scotland was undertaken and identified peer-reviewed and grey literature. The methodology can be found in Appendix C. The review focused on Miscanthus, SRC and SRF to specifically identify:
The positive and negative economic potential of energy crops.
Other (non-economic) opportunities and barriers to deployment.
Further economic potential (e.g., in relation to employment; technologies; wider decarbonisation, just transition).
Key insights are presented here, along with relevant insights from the stakeholder research. For full details of information found in the literature review and references to information sources (please see Appendix d), for details of stakeholder interviews conducted see Appendix G.
Key findings of the rapid evidence assessment and stakeholder engagement
Evidence of positive economic potential
There is evidence that PECs can be profitable, but there are limited studies directly applicable to Scotland and to the current economic climate (Appendix D: 15.1)
Economic performance of biomass production is influenced by production costs, crop yields, crop price and end-use/market opportunities. (Appendix D: 15.1)
Several studies comparing energy crops reported a high return per hectare for miscanthus primarily due to low maintenance cost along with the low requirement for field operations. (Appendix D: 15.1)
The tree species chosen for SRF influences plantation establishment costs and therefore profitability as costs vary between species. Initial indications from trials underway in Scotland suggest hybrid apsen to have most potential, with common alder, silver birch and Sitka spruce having potential at some sites. (Appendix D: 15.1)
Evidence of negative economic impacts
The most prominent evidence of negative economic impacts in the literature was the high upfront cost to establish PECs, lack of established markets, and the uncertainty over the stability of the long-term market. (Appendix D: 15.2)
Profitability and economic considerations for farmers are dominated by high establishment costs, uncertainties about the market, a delayed period of revenue, and biomass yield. (Appendix D: 15.2)
Economic potential of PECs in comparison to other land uses
The literature review did not provide clear evidence of how the three key PECs compare economically to other crops, annual crops and agricultural land-uses – some studies showed favourable comparison and others did not. Limited insights can be gained from the literature given the recent economic changes affecting agricultural costs and market prices (Appendix D: 15.3)
Influences on decisions to plant PECs
One of the main factors affecting the uptake of PEC is economic profitability (Appendix D: 15.4)
Appetite for and perception of financial risk, skills, attitudes and access to markets can influence farmer and land-manager decisions. (Appendix D: 15.4)
Even where PECs, or energy crops in general, can deliver positive economic results for farmers and land managers, this on its own is not always sufficient to convince them to start growing PECs. (Appendix D: 15.4)
Other features of PEC production that influence economic potential
Producing PECs has specific economic implications for growers which influence their economic potential and attractiveness. These include lack of flexibility of land-use, reduced market responsiveness, and opportunities for diversification alongside current farming enterprises. (Appendix D: 15.5)
To view PECs as economically worthwhile, farmers need confidence that they can achieve an acceptable and secure market price into the future. As farms typically operate in a risk-averse manner, reduced risk is an important factor in farmer decision-making for PECs. (Appendix D: 15.5)
The way PECs are deployed on farms influences their economic potential. Integration of PECs alongside other enterprises and on land which is not performing well could be advantageous. (Appendix D: 15.5)
Opportunities to improve economic potential
Cultivation techniques, crop variety choice and other technological developments can influence economic potential of PECs in Scotland and have potential to improve profitability for farmers and land managers in future. (Appendix D: 15.6)
There are factors which can negatively affect the economics of PEC production, which if addressed are potential opportunities to improve economic performance. (Appendix D: 15.6)
Gaps in the crop (i.e. patches where it didn’t grow) was a key factor reducing profitability of miscanthus in the UK.
Ensuring access and enabling harvesting equipment is essential for economics of SRF to be viable
For SRF effective plantation establishment is important for the economics and general success of a SRF plantation
Single species monocultures can offer greatest economic return by providing higher yields per hectare
Highest yield are achieved on fertile soil or under intensive management systems, including weed control, fertilizer application and irrigation
Evidence of potential for wider economy
There was limited research addressing the potential contribution to the wider Scottish economy and a just transition, but some opportunities and challenges can be inferred. These include sales for local energy generation and other industrial uses, employment opportunities in contract services, along with potential payments for environmental outcomes. (Appendix D: 15.7)
Evidence of non-economic opportunities
Non-economic opportunities and benefits of PECs were identified including several relating to positive environmental outcomes such as reduced agro-chemical use, reduced soil and water pollution, carbon sequestration, and biodiversity benefits. (Appendix D: 15.8)
The opportunities for environmental improvements resulting from PECs vary depending on planting, prior land-use and landscape context. (Appendix D: 15.8)
Challenges and deployment barriers
Non-economic challenges facing the production of PECs in Scotland, relate to skills, land-use commitment, compatibility with current culture and habits, farm businesses, perceived land suitability and environmental concerns. (Appendix D: 15.9)
Deployment barriers include the need for farmers to commit land for a long period of time, land quality, knowledge, profitability, time to financial return and social resistance relating to whether land should be used for energy or food production. In addition for SRC and SRF, converting land once planted is challenging, and additionally for SRF conversion be restricted by regulations as land will no longer be classed as agricultural. (Appendix D: 15.9)
Lack of access to specialist skills and to specialist contractors and machinery was identified as a barrier to deployment. While there is interest amongst farmers in diversification, appetite for change is tempered by concern about moving into unfamiliar activities which require new skills.
Culture and attitudes can be a barrier to PEC deployment. (Appendix D: 15.9)
There are concerns about the impact on biodiversity from PECs. (Appendix D: 15.9)
Energy generation from biomass is a potential source of direct and indirect emissions and limiting these emissions would need consideration. (Appendix D: 15.9)
Other relevant crops and planting regimes
Hemp has the potential to provide high yields or returns with little or no pesticides and insecticides, significant potential in carbon sequestration, fits well into crop rotations with food and feed crops and helps improve soil structure and soil-borne pests. Constraints on producing hemp in Scotland includes the current lack of market as there are no large processing facilities in or near Scotland, strict regulations on growing hemp including the need to obtain a costly license, and some reports of low profitability according to Scottish growers. (Appendix D: 15.10)
Specific studies focused on Scotland to show how PECs could be grown in agroforestry systems were not found, but provided the design of agroforestry systems can allow for economically efficient planting, management and harvesting it could provide an advantageous model. (Appendix D: 15.10)
Key evidence gaps
The research found some uncertainties – due to lack of Scottish specific data and in relation to climate impacts on PECs – which are described in the relevant sections above, and also some key gaps in the evidence which are summarised here.
Lack of Scottish data and research leading to economic uncertainty
Research related to the production and economic potential of energy crops in Scotland is limited. SRC is currently grown, but only at a small scale, and miscanthus still requires further trials and research before implementing at a commercial scale. SRF trials are currently underway in Scotland with findings slowly emerging as plantations reach maturity (Parratt, 2017). There is therefore uncertainty regarding the economic potential in Scotland.
The literature is inconclusive regarding the financial performance of PEC production. Conflicting results are found across studies, for example, a study in Ireland found miscanthus production to be an economically viable option (Zimmermann et al., 2014), yet in France, Miscanthus was found to be less profitable compared to conventional cropping systems (Glithero et al., 2013). Research by Warren (2014) reported that the soils and climate across Scotland offer significant biophysical potential, especially for SRC willow cultivation, which can also achieve good growth rates. However, with such limited data on Scotland and in light of the less favourable climate than found in locations of many studies there is uncertainty about the economic viability in Scotland.
Climate change
The effects of climate change on PECs are to some extent unknown. Research suggests that SRC willow yield may reduce as a result of rising temperatures, while miscanthus performs favourably (Alexander et al., 2014). However, as the temperature rises, this may change the habitat suitability, further research is required to establish the suitability and risks that a changing climate may have on seed development in miscanthus throughout the UK (Martin et al., 2020). We did not find research which commented on how extreme weather such as storms, flooding and drought would affect PECs. Some research suggests that water-logged soils hinder growth of PECs (Martin et al, 2020), but a recent technical webinar from Biomass Connect suggested that willow SRC is not negatively affected by water-logging, and can help improve water management when established.
Active debates within the sector
It is evident from the literature and stakeholder interviews that there are some topics with differing views including what types of land are most suitable for PEC growing considering the wider land-use debates, and likely impacts on biodiversity.
Land use and use of unproductive areas of land
In Scotland, there is competition for land to deliver food, materials, environmental services (such as carbon sequestration), leisure opportunities and more (Martin et al., 2020; Scottish Government, 2021). Scotland has the potential to produce 9.25TWh/yr and 1.75Modt/yr for SRC (Martin et al., 2020) such as SRC willow, however amongst the farming community there is social resistance relating to land being used for energy instead of food production (Anejionu and Woods 2019). The Scottish Government’s Land-use Strategy (Scottish Government, 2021) highlights the complexity of balancing the need for land to support the move to net zero with other essential activities such as food production, and that whilst land-use decisions are often determined by the land suitability, much land is suited to multiple different uses. In these cases multiple factors need to be considered as to whether PECs are a suitable use for the land.
Literature identifies that using ‘marginal’ land, for energy crop production could be a solution to this land use debate. However, there are several challenges in understanding whether this ‘solution’ could usefully apply in Scotland. Ranacher et al., 2021 found there is a gap in the available literature regarding farmers’ willingness to adopt short rotation plantations on marginal lands. There is also no agreed definition in the literature of what comprises ‘marginal’ land, so it is unclear how this would apply in the Scottish context. Much discussion in research focuses on cropland, yet in Scotland grasslands including rough grasslands, which may be viewed as ‘marginal’ from some perspectives, are a critical part of the Scottish rural economy and environment and so a more indepth analysis of the potential social, environmental and economic implications of PECs on grasslands is needed. Additionally, not all literature agrees on whether PECS will successfully grow on marginal land.
Biodiversity & ecosystem services
Converting land to energy production in Scotland will have direct impacts on biodiversity, wildlife, and landscape connectivity, yet the exact nature of these is unclear from the literature. Research shows that bioenergy crop choice and location influence biodiversity outcomes – choosing appropriate bioenergy crops in the right location is vital for the protection of biodiversity and ecosystems and to prevent damage to the surrounding ecosystem.[6] Contradictory evidence has been found throughout the REA on the effects of converting land for energy crop production in Scotland. Existing sustainability criteria for the use of biomass to produce heat or electricity require that PECs are not grown on land of high biodiversity value[7]. Beyond application of these criteria, the research could create uncertainty about how to select the right crops for the right locations in Scotland to ensure good outcomes for biodiversity and ecosystem services. Extrapolation of potential biodiversity effects from conversion of ‘marginal’ land has low confidence (Holland, et al., 2015) (Vanbeverena & Ceulemansa, 2019), and application of this research to the Scottish context with different land-use types is therefore very difficult.
The impact on biodiversity from SRC, SRF and Miscanthus differ depending on location, previous land use and crop type and management (e.g., cultivations, pesticide, and fertiliser use). The replacement of any semi-natural habitat by a dedicated bioenergy crop is likely to result in significant biodiversity losses due to creating a monoculture habitat (Martin et al., 2020). Significant areas of land classified as ‘Less Favoured Areas’ (LFA) in Scotland which were identified as potential PEC growing areas could be described as semi-natural – and seen as ‘marginal’ – but there is a risk of biodiversity loss if this is converted to PEC.
The REA identified a conflict in opinion as to whether PECs provide a biodiversity gain or loss. Firstly, factors such as reduced ground disturbance, increased diversity of nectar and pollen sources, and the potential to provide over wintering sites which are associated with energy crop production will benefit pollinating species. Conversely the monoculture nature of energy crops is likely to be detrimental to pollinator species as landscape homogenisation is widely accepted to be a driver for the current loss of pollinating species (Martin et al., 2020). Holland et al. (2015) identified ecosystem services such as hazard regulation, disease and pest control, water, and soil quality may benefit from the conversion of arable land to energy crop production, and that the transition of marginal land[8][9] to bioenergy crops will likely deliver benefits for some ecosystem services while remaining broadly neutral for others. On the other hand, conversion of forest to energy crops will likely have a negative impact due to the increased disturbance associated with the management cycle.
Estimating economic potential
This research looked at perennial energy crops (PECs), SRF, SRC and Miscanthus and included two core economic analyses:
Farm-scale economic analysis and comparison with typical land-use options:
A farm scale economic analysis of the net economic benefit for a farmer or land-manager from producing and selling the Miscanthus, SRC and SRF.
A comparison of this net economic benefit for a farmer or land-manager with typical existing land-uses.
Assessment of wider economic implications: drawing on geo-spatial data about existing farming and land-use types, the study analysed what the economics implications would be for the wider Scottish economy of a transition to growing more energy crops.
Farm Scale Economic Analysis
Methodology overview
For the farm-scale economic analysis high, medium and low-cost scenarios were developed for the production costs for: Miscanthus; short rotation coppice: willow; short rotation forestry: conifer; and short rotation forestry: broadleaved. The higher scenario includes high output/high price minus low costs, the medium scenario scenario includes medium output/medium price minus medium costs and the low scenario includes low output/low price minus high costs.
The following production costs were included; pre-planting/land preparation, planting, post-planting, harvesting and storage and reversion.
Capital investment costs were not included: where specialist equipment would be needed, which a farmer would not typically have on a farm, such as cutting equipment for SRF, we have assumed services of a specialist contractor would be utilised and this cost has been included within the production costs.
Estimates of likely income from PEC sales were combined with costs to create a ‘gross margin[10]’ (income minus costs) for each bioenergy crop. Because the PECs all have a long lifespan, time series charts are used to show the income minus costs over the lifetime of the crop. The results of which can be found in section 5.1.3. Depending on the crop, the yield changes over the lifespan of the rotation, for example due to lower yields in early years after establishment and harvest only occurring in some years. Details on the yields during rotation can be found in Appendix D. For Miscanthus and SRF a low, medium and high price presented, whereas for SRC a single price is used due to limited data. Prices used in the analysis are in Appendix D.
To compare to the economics of current land use, three farm types were used these were lowland cattle and sheep; mixed farming[11]; and general cropping – forage. These were selected because they are feasible on the land capability of grades; 4.1, 4.2, 5.1, 5.2, 5.3 and 6.1, – typically suitable for mixed agriculture, improved grassland and high-quality rough grazing, and also the land capability grades assumed suitable for PECs . To calculate the gross margins for the farm types used in the analysis the latest data from the ‘Scottish farm business income: annual estimates 2020-2021’ were used[12].
Subsidies are not included in this analysis.
Total average output in the farm business survey[13] includes the output categories; total crop output, total livestock output and miscellaneous output. For the ‘general cropping – forage’ category census data is used and output represents the estimated farm-gate worth (£s) of crops and animals without taking account of the costs incurred in production.
A more detailed description the methodology used, assumptions and data sources is included in Appendix E.
Limitations with the methodology
The calculations for the farm types used in the analysis are based on data from the Scotland Farm Business Income Survey, therefore the estimates are based on averages and so any other factors that might influence the costs and output for example climate, soil type will not be accounted for. This is the same for the costs and output estimates for the bioenergy crops. We have not allocated an economic value to any additional benefits a farmer may gain for the other farm enterprises, such as shelter for livestock on adjacent land.
It should also be noted that this study focused on gross margin comparison, which is useful for comparing specific crops and farm enterprises, but has limitations in terms of how well it allows assessment of integration of energy crops into a whole farm business. This will vary farm to farm and would require more in depth ‘whole farm’ economic analysis to be fully understood.
Results of Farm Scale Economic Analysis
Figure 5‑1 shows what land managers could earn on average in a year if costs and yield were spread equally over the lifecycle of the bioenergy crop as well as for farm types (for full details on the method please see Appendix E). There are gross margins for a low, medium and high scenario for each of the bioenergy crops and for the farm types (except for general cropping, forage[14]). The low, medium and high scenario for lowland cattle and sheep and mixed farming includes the lower (25%), average and upper (25%) of data from the farm business income data respectively, average data from 6 years 2016-17 to 2021-22 uprate to reflect 2023 prices[15].
Figure 5-1 ‑Yearly average gross margins for each of the PECs over the lifetime of the PEC and for each farm type £/ha (2023 prices)
If costs and income were spread equally over the lifetime of the crop, the medium scenario suggests:
Miscanthus produces a positive average annual gross margin of £382 per hectare, SRC £87 per hectare and SRF broadleaved £80 per hectare.
SRF conifer would see a negative gross margin i.e., the production costs outweigh the value of the crop sold. The planting and the ground preparation costs are the main drivers behind this negative gross margin (see Appendix D for more detailed costs).
Mixed farming and and lowland cattle and sheep farms both show a greater average annual gross margin than all of the PECs examined.
The average gross margin per year for general cropping, forage is negative at around £990 per hectare, significantly lower than for all of the PECs. Based on these average annual gross margins, growing PECs in lowland cattle and sheep and mixed farming would reduce financial returns in the farm. Whereas, growing PECs in farms in the general cropping forage category could improve their financial returns.
Figure 5‑2, Figure 5-3, Figure 5-4, Figure 5-5 shows the low, medium and high scenario gross margins (output minus variable costs) over time of each of the PECs: Miscanthus, SRC, SRF broadleaved (silver birch) and SRF conifer (Sitka spruce). The higher scenario includes high output/high price minus low costs, the medium scenario includes the medium output/medium price minus medium costs and the lower scenario includes low output/low price minus high costs.
Costs included in the calculations included:
Site preparation / land preparation (including from different prior land-uses where data is available)
Establishment / planting
Crop management costs e.g., during initial growth
Harvesting
Reversion (where relevant)
Detailed breakdowns of these costs for the PECs are included in Appendix E.
Figure 5-2 Gross margins for Miscanthus (£/ha) (2023 prices)
Miscanthus shows an initial negative gross margin in the first two years during the site preparation and plant stages, but then picks up in the following years with harvesting driving the positive gross margins in the following years. The gross margin drops slightly in the year 21 when the costs of reversion take place.
Figure 5-3 Gross margins for short rotation coppice (£/ha) (2023 prices)
Short rotation coppice shows a negative gross margin for the first 3 years, in part driven by the pre-planting/land preparation costs in years -1 and 0. Gross margin is then positive in the years 3, 6, 9, 12, 15 and 18 reflecting when harvesting takes place.
Figure 5-4 Gross margins for short rotation forestry – Sitka Spruce (£/ha) (2023 prices)
Figure 5-5 Gross margins for short rotation forestry – Silver Birch (£/ha) (2023 prices)
Short rotation forestry for silver birch and Sitka spruce shows a negative gross margin except for the year 15 when harvesting takes place.
Linking back to Figure 5-1 with the lowland cattle and sheep category on average earning £433 per hectare per year, the mixed farming category £597 per hectare per year and the general forage making a loss of £990 per ha per year the results show;
Miscanthus, initially has a lower gross margin than all the other farm types, however, after the first few years, land managers would be better off planting Miscanthus.
SRC, produces a better gross margin than general cropping-forage after the first few years but is outperformed by all other categories when the yield is harvested in years five, eight, 11, 14, 17, 20 and 23.
SRF, again outperforms general cropping- forage, but has a lower gross margin than the other farm types, except for when harvest takes place in year 18.
Assessment of implications for Scotland’s rural economy
To consider the potential implications of growing more PECs, the results from the farm-scale economic analysis (Section 5.1) were extrapolated across Scottish regions, to consider a transition of approximately 40,000 to 90,000 hectares of suitable land to grow PECs – the area judged to be feasible by 2032 and 2045 respectively (see below for the source of these estimates).
Key findings:
This transition of land in mixed holdings and non-LFA cattle and sheep to PECs would create a shortfall of non-energy crops and and reduced income across the Scottish rural economy due. Because PECs would be more profitable than ‘general cropping: forage’ land-use, there would be an economic gain from transition, but loss of production of animal feed, which may have knock-on implications for livestock production costs (which have not been quantified here).
This research found that, if land to match the level of demand as set out in these scenarios, was utilised for perennial energy crops it would create:
a gain in gross margin[16] of around £9.6 million (scenario 1) or a loss of around £9.5 million (scenario 2) per year across the regions.[17]
a shortfall in agricultural yields (of farm outputs generated by existing land-use activity, which would not be available when the activity ceased to be replaced with PECs) across the regions between 537,600 tonnes (scenario 1) and 708,200 tonnes (scenario 2).
Our analysis which forms the basis of this assessment is set out below – with details of each scenario (approximately 40,000 and 90,000 hectares).
Limitations:
This assessment does not consider potential loss or additions to the economy due to changes in associated services. Some additional contracting employment for PECs servicing is likely based on the research, but this, and any potential shortfall in other employment from reducing other farm enterprises have not been assessed.
It should also be noted that the findings relate solely to gross margin comparison. Actual farm income – whole farm business income – is very different, comprising multiple farm enterprises (livestock, crops, diversifications) and may be supplemented with off-farm income. For the farm types considered here typical farm income levels are shown in Table 5-1 below (note General Cropping, Forage is not a type assessed in the Scottish Farm Business Income Survey so data is not available). Assessment of implications for PECs on the overall farm costs and income has not been fully assessed here and may reveal additional positive and negative economic implications of PECs.
Table 5-1: Annual Farm Business Income (£) (average of 6 years 2016-17 to 2021-2022)
Farm total
Per hectare
Farm Type
Lower (25%)
Average
Upper (25%)
Lower (25%)
Average
Upper (25%)
Mixed Farming
-9271
37,791
129,023
-58
225
551
Lowland Sheep & Cattle (non-LFA)
-20,688
25,756
105,926
-176
191
451
Method and results
For each of non-LFA cattle & sheep, mixed holdings, general cropping; forage, areas that would be suitable to grow PECs have been identified (see Table 5-1). (See Appendix E for further details on how these areas were selected.) This was done by using the GIS mapping done in previous work for CxC (Martin et al,2020) which identified land suitable for PECs to identify the percentage of land in region which was suitable for PECs. This percentage was then applied to the land area estimated to be in each farm type in the region, to derive the land are potentially suitable for PECs by farm type. There is some overlap between the types of land suitable for each of the three types of PECs so the areas in the table cannot be summed to give a total area.
Table 5-1 Potential land suitable for each bioenergy crop on different farm types (hectares)
General Cropping, Forage
Non-LFA Cattle & Sheep
Mixed Holdings
Total
(all farm types)
Land potentially suitable for SRF
13,601
66,189
27,746
107,536
Land potentially suitable for SRC
7,967
50,520
20,156
78,643
Land potentially suitable for Miscanthus
1,352
12,633
4,770
18,755
A previous CXC study (Meek et al, 2022) indicated that, bearing in mind land suitability, an estimated total of approximately 27,000 ha PECs[18]could be planted by 2030, 38,000 by 2032 and 90,250 hectares by 2045. Using these estimates and the potential land that can grow bioenergy crops two illustrative scenarios have been created to estimate the potential economic gain/loss of growing bioenergy crops at the Scottish level.
Scenario 1:
From the results presented in section 5.1 it was financially beneficial to grow bioenergy crops on general cropping, forage land. Furthermore, of all the PECs, growing miscanthus was the most financially beneficial. Therefore, the first scenario assumes that two-thirds (66%) of the general cropping, forage land suitable for SRF and for SRC will be converted and 100% for Miscanthus. Only 66% of land for SRF and SRC are assumed to be converted to avoid double counting due to the likelihood that some areas identified are suitable for both PECs and thus appear in both estimates of suitable areas. Although the results in section 5.1 show that growing bioenergy crops on both non-LFA cattle and sheep and mixed holdings would not be financially beneficial, the loss was less on non-LFA cattle and sheep land. Therefore, to get to the 38,000 hectares, it was assumed that 15% of the land suitable for both SRF and SRC in non-LFA cattle and sheep holdings will be converted and 30% for Miscanthus (see Table 5-2). Overall this means that about 20% of total land in Non-LFA Cattle and Sheep[19] and 1.1% of land in general cropping, forage are converted to PECs.
Table 5-2 Land that is converted for each bioenergy crop for each farm type in scenario 1 (hectares)
General Cropping, Forage
Non-LFA Cattle & Sheep
Mixed Holdings
Total (all farm types)
SRF
8,977
9,928
–
18,905
SRC
5,258
7,578
–
12,836
Miscanthus
1,352
3,790
–
5,142
Total (all PECs)
15,587
21,296
–
36,883
Total land in farm type in Scotland
1,378,365
107,712
304,901
1,790,978
Percentage of total area converted
1.1%
20%
0%
2.1%
Results: scenario 1
Figure 5-6, shows that, for Scenario 1 there would be an economic gain for converting land used for general cropping and forage to PECs. This is because PECs have a positive, albeit small gross margin, compared to the large negative gross margin for general cropping and forage. The total gain in gross margins across the region is around £16.6 million, of which almost half occurs in Grampian.
Figure 5-6 Change in gross margin for converting General Cropping, Forage land to Miscanthus, SRC and SRF (Scenario 1)
Figure 5-7, shows there would be potential economic loss for converting non-LFA cattle and sheep land to Miscanthus, SRC and SRF in table 5-2 (scenario 1) with Grampian showing a loss of a total of about £1.8 million. SRF showed the greatest loss in the majority of the regions, as it has the lowest gross margin of all the PECs but has more land suitable for it. Miscanthus showed the smallest loss across all regions. The total loss in gross margins across regions is just under £7 million. This loss is lower than the gain in gross margin from growing PECs on general cropping and forage farms, suggesting that achieving 38,000 ha of PECs could give a net increase in gross margins across the two farm categories of £9.6 million.
Figure 5-6 Change in gross margin from converting Non-LFA Cattle and Sheep land to Miscanthus, SRC and SRF (Scenario 1)
Figure 5-8 shows the reduction in production (crops, stock-feeding crops and grass from grazing land) that could occur when converting the land shown in Table 5-2 to PECs. From converting land to PECs, there is an estimated yield loss of 537,600 tonnes: 263,000 tonnes for crops replaced by with SRF, 85,300 tonnes for crops replaced by Miscanthus and 189,000 tonnes for crops replaced with SRC.
Figure 5-8 Reduction in production (barley, stock-feeding crops and grass) resulting from converting land to PECs (thousand tonnes) (Scenario 1)
Scenario 2:
For the second scenario to get to around 90,000 hectares of land, it was assumed that more of the suitable general cropping and forage land was converted to SRF and SRC (66%), and more of the non-LFA cattle and sheep land (30% of land suitable for SRF and SRC and 60% of land suitable for Miscanthus). It was assumed that a small percentage of the suitable land on mixed holdings was converted (50% of land suitable for SRF and SRC and 50% of land suitable for Miscanthus). Overall, this means that about 40% of the total land in non-LFA cattle and sheep farms, around 9% of total mixed holdings and 1.3% of total general cropping /forage land are converted to PECs.
Table 5-3 Land that is converted for each bioenergy crop for each farm type in scenario two (hectares) (Scenario 2)
General Cropping, Forage
Non-LFA Cattle & Sheep
Mixed Holdings
Total (all farm types)
SRF
10,201
19,857
13,873
43,931
SRC
5,975
15,156
10,078
31,209
Miscanthus
1,352
7,580
4,770
13,701
Total (all PECs)
17,528
42,592
28,721
88,841
Total land in farm type in Scotland
1,378,365
107,712
304,901
1,790,978
Percentage of total area converted
1.3%
40%
9%
5%
Results: scenario 2
Figure 5-9, show the results of the conversion rates set out in table 5-3 (scenario 2). The only farm type which shows an increase in gross margin for conversion to PECs is general cropping and forage (due to its current large negative gross margin). Conversions on the other farm types (necessary to meet the target planting area of around 90,000 ha) give a loss in gross margins. Overall, the increase in income in general and cropping farms of £18.6 million is not enough to offset losses in the other two farm types, (£13.9 million in non-LFA cattle and sheep farms and £14. 2 million on mixed holdings) meaning there is a net loss in gross margin of £9.5 million.
Figure 5-9 Change in gross margins from converting Non-LFA Cattle and Sheep land to Miscanthus, SRC and SRF (Scenario 2)
Figure 5-10 shows the crop production that could potentially be lost from converting the land shown in table 5-3 (scenario 2) to PECs. This based on loss of stock feeding crops (barley, maize and lupin) and grass silage and hay produced on each farm type. From converting land to PECs, there is estimated yield loss of 708,200 tonnes for replacing with SRF, 248,100 tonnes for replacing with Miscanthus and 523,900 tonnes for replacing with SRC.
Figure 5-10 Reduction in crop production (barley, stock-feeding crops and grass) resulting from converting land to PECs (thousand tonnes) (Scenario 2)
Preferred locations: considerations
Preferred locations for economically viable production of PECs are influenced by multiple factors including proximity to markets (current biomass energy plants and potential future BECCS plants) and local enough access to services and facilities for crop management (e.g. harvesting contractors) to avoid excessive costs. We assessed preferred locations for economically viable energy crops in Scotland considering the locations of end markets in relation to viable growing areas for PECs.[20]. Insights from our rapid evidence assessment and stakeholder consultation were also considered, for example comments on economically viable transport distance.
Our analysis showed economically viable areas for PEC production bearing in mind future anticipated demand resulting from Scotland’s net zero ambitions, but only SRF could provide quantity needed, due to lack of availability of suitable land for SRC and miscanthus. As SRF is economically uncompetitive against current land-use, this suggests economic viability may be a barrier to PEC production increases even if suitable land within economically viable distance of end markets is available.
Proximity to users of biomass for energy
Biomass energy crops are bulky to transport and so haulage cost from the location where they are grown to where they are used is a factor which determines which growing locations are economically viable – a crop grown too far from its end destination will be prohibitively expensive to transport. It has been difficult to identify a specific economically viable distance in the available research. Stakeholder comments suggest that whilst 100km is a typical maximum distance to haul wood to a sawmill, a significantly lower distance is economic for biomass crops, as their value is lower than wood which will become sawn timber. In our economic analysis transport costs pre-farm gate e.g. for delivery of planting material are included, but haulage of the bioenergy crops to biomass plants has not been included in the costs as this will depend on the distance and whether the price paid to the farmer is at the farm gate or at delivery to the bioenergy plant. For the purposes of the analysis here, we assume a maximum viable distance of 100km, and consider a shorter 50km distance to reflect stakeholder feedback.
Proximity to existing biomass plants:
Biomass plants in Scotland were identified from DESNZ’ Renewable Energy Planning database which lists both existing and planned plants[21]. Existing sites vary in scale and use – some are generating power for the grid, others are located on industrial sites such as distilleries, sawmills and papermills supplying heat and power for the industry, whilst others are small supplying e.g. a hotel. Eight sites were selected from the list as being most likely to consider using PECs as a fuel (See Appendix J). Plant which are located on sites where there is already a ready supply of fuel (e.g. sawmills, paper and pulp) were excluded as were very small sites and sites which were not yet operational or under construction.
A buffer of 50km and 100km from these biomass plants has been applied in Figure 6-1, to show the potential geographical areas which could supply biomass markets in Scotland.
Figure 6-1: Biomass plant locations
Proximity to future BECCS facilities:
CCC[22] highlights that Scotland has very good potential for deploying Bioenergy with Carbon Capture and Storage (BECCS) due to its access to a potential CO2 storage site in the North Sea, along with its ability to produce domestic BECCS feedstocks. A pilot facility, the Acorn Transport and Storage Facility in Aberdeenshire looks set for further investment after the UK government announced in March 2023 that it considers this site to be one of the two best placed to deliver its objective of capturing 20-30 megatonnes of CO2 across the UK economy by 2030[23]. The proposed access points to this facility are via a feeder pipeline along Scotland’s east coast which starts at Bathgate and ends at St Fergus, with two injection points at Kirriemuir and Garlogie. Large scale BECCS plants for electricity, biomass gasification for hydrogen, or biofuel production[24] may be located in proximity to these access points to benefit from easy access to the pipeline. This study assesses how much land suitable for growing bioenergy crops is within 50km and 100km of these access points. This mapping is presented in Figure 6-2.
Kirriemuir
St. Fergus
Garlogie
Bathgate
Figure 6-2 Feeder pipeline locations and nearby land suitable for PECs
Table 6-1 shows the total potential PEC growing areas with these distances.
A previous CXC study (Meek et al, 2022) indicated that, bearing in mind land suitability, an estimated total of approximately 27,000 ha PECs[25]could be planted by 2030 and 38,000 by 2032; With this area of land, depending on the yields obtained for PECs and the efficiency of the power plant, PECs could provide feedstock for a BECCs power plant producing between 60 and 80 MWe. The data in Table 6-1 suggests that this land is available, within 50km of all proposed access points along the east coast feeder pipeline for SRC and Miscanthus, but this would require a large portion of the suitable land to be used. A larger land area which is suitable for growing SRF is available.
Table 6-1: Total potential PEC growing areas within 50km and 100km of potential BECCS sites, and existing biomass plant locations.
Feeder pipeline locations
Biomass plant locations
Within 50km
Within 100km
Within 50km
Within 100km
SRC
82,471 ha
161,016 ha
117,222 ha
225,013 ha
Miscanthus
8,224 ha
18,057 ha
18,280 ha
28,873 ha
SRF
551,303 ha
826,528 ha
555,193 ha
858,669 ha
Access to service and facilities for crop management, harvesting and processing.
Access to services and facilities for crop management harvesting and processing, such as local contractors with suitable equipment has been identified in the research and by stakeholders as a factor which would influence the suitability of growing areas for PACs. The evidence review did not provide information on the availability and access to these services in Scotland, or the speed with which services could develop if a growth in production were planned. Easy access should not be assumed, particularly given the shortage of forestry skills in Scotland and constraint on travel distance which influence the economic viability – access issues would need to be addressed before an area could be suitable for economically viable PEC growing.
Other location considerations
As is evident from the REA, biodiversity and other ecosystem services can impacted by PEC cultivation. Choice of crop, cultivation regime and location need to be carefully considered to optimise environmental benefits and avoid negative impacts. The impact is highly situation specific and could not be assessed in detail within scope of this research but should be considered carefully when selecting locations.
SWOT & PESTLE Analysis
This section provides analysis of the strengths and weaknesses of these crops, and the factors supporting or hindering uptake, drawing together the research findings. A PESTLE analysis was also carried to understand the potential enabling and preventative factors which could influence the economic viability of energy crops in Scotland. Further detailed SWOT and PESTLE analyses are available in Appendix I.
SWOT Analysis of energy crop economic potential
Table 7-1 presents SWOT analysis common to PECs assessed in this research. Further discussion of variations between Miscanthus, SRC and SRF is included in Section 9.
Table 7-1: Summary of strengths, weaknesses, opportunities and threats for PEC in Scotland.
Strengths
Weaknesses
Feasible growing areas including proximity to potential BECCS sites (varies by crop)
Low input & maintenance costs
Alternative markets beyond energy (e.g. Miscanthus for animal bedding; SRF grow on for other wood products)
Stable annual income if sequentially planted
Shading benefits for adjacent land
Cash flow- upfront cost to establish crops, and several years before first harvest income
Lack of specific subsidies / financial support for energy crops.
Need for specialist knowledge and equipment – access constraints
Lack of processing facilities
Biomass cost currently compares unfavourable to fossil fuels
Biomass for energy is a lower value crop than sawmill wood / biomass for other industries (such as bio-based plastics)[26]
Limits farmer land-use rotation choices
Costs of transport for bulky crop – constrains distance from end market
Shading disadvantage for adjacent crop.
Opportunities
Threats
Income diversification: potential additional revenue stream with limited workload after establishment.
To design PEC planting to deliver additional environmental benefits such as water management, biodiversity, soil health.
To improve farm energy security/costs by use of biomass on farms
To harness innovation pipeline and developing knowledge base to increase yields / cut costs (see Appendix H)
Potential competition between different Scottish users (e.g., on farm vs BECCS)
Public / NGO negative perceptions
Farmer/land-manager preferences for current land-use and perception of PECs as financially risky.
Limited geographical spread of contractors.
PESTLE Analysis
The PESTLE analysis considersthe political, economic, social technical, legal and environmental factors which currently enable or prevent energy crops becoming an economically viable prospect for farmers in Scotland. The summary PESTLE is set out in Table 7-2 below, discussion of the results follows in Section 9.
Table 7.2: Summary of PESTLE analysis for growing PECs in Scotland.
Enabling factors
Preventative factors
Political
Political support by Scottish / UK government –identified as critical to climate goals.
Uncertainty of specific policies/ government financial support.
Limited grant funding opportunities for farmers and land-managers.
Economic
Low input costs / labour costs once established.
Income diversification opportunity / additional income stream if planted on previous unproductive land.
Machinery innovation could cut costs of production.
Large initial investment and lack of cash flow in years before first harvest.
High production costs, compared to imported biomass.
Uncertain markets and market prices
Low profitability over whole crop lifetime.
Social
Potential for employment in contracting services (e.g. planting / harvesting).
Perception of PEC as financially risky.
Attitudes / preferences of farmers and land-manager – preferences for familiar farm enterprises.
Concerns about competition for land / resources e.g. livestock farmers concern about loss of local feed crops.
Moral concerns about PEC replacing other land-uses e.g. food crops.
Negative publicity about energy crops.
Age of farmers: older farmers may not be in business long-enough to see profits.
Technical
Potential to use existing harvesters for Miscanthus.
Production and harvesting technology improvements in the pipeline.
BECCS is an emerging technology – no current plants in Scotland.
Need for specialist machinery, especially for SRC/SRF, which is limited in Scotland.
Interdependence between producers and bioenergy plant: concurrent development of market and supply is challenging.
Legal
Long-term contracts between end users and farmers can give confidence for investments.
SRF results in legal land-use category change – reversion to farming may be prevented in future.
Some crops are subject to cultivation licences (e.g. Hemp, Eucalyptus).
Long-term land-use decisions difficult for tenant farmers.
Environmental
Desire for ecosystem services which some PECs could deliver e.g. flood control.
Agrochemical restrictions driving interest in low-input PECs
Potential to increase soil carbon
Biodiversity / habitat benefits in some circumstances, but some uncertainty
Concerns about biodiversity impacts of ‘monoculture’.
Environmental benefits depend on sustainable production methods.
Right crop – right land is critical: carbon stored in soils could be released by planting on peaty soils / uplands areas.
Limited suitable areas e.g. some reports state SRC cannot tolerate water-logged soils.
Winter hardiness of Miscanthus a constraint for Scotland.
Future climate change favour Miscanthus.
Discussion
The research and analysis show multiple positive and negative features of the PECs. The implications of these for economic viability of PECs in Scotland is discussed here.
Economic potential to farmers and land managers
Economic potential of PECs in Scotland for farmer and land managers
Overall, the economic analysis showed Miscanthus could be most profitable over the life cycle, but though SRC and SRF broadleaves appear to achieve lower profitability, there are larger areas suited to these crops and less uncertainty about their suitability to the Scottish climate.
Achievable biomass yields, which significantly influences economic viability, is still subject to some uncertainty as commercial growing and trials in Scotland are limited, particularly for SRF and Miscanthus. The analysis shows a significant difference between high, medium and low costs and income from the three PECs considered. It could be reasonably assumed that this level of uncertainty may lead to farmers and land-managers having low confidence to plant the crops. Forthcoming results of Scottish research trials and developments may improve confidence, for example Miscanthus varieties more suitable to Scotland’s climate are in development (see Appendix H) which could extend the range or improve yields in Scotland.
Equipment needs, and therefore costs and economic potential, vary for the different PECs:
Miscanthus can be harvested by typical harvesting equipment which an arable or mixed farmer would either own, or have easy access to via local contractors; whereas for SRC and SRF the equipment needs are more specialist, so requires significant investment or access to local contractors, which is currently constrained in Scotland.
The PESTLE analysis shows that, of the factors which are likely to prevent farmers and land-managers from currently viewing PECs as an attractive proposition and hinder the uptake across Scotland. The most important, are:
the low or negative income from the crops,
upfront investment requirement, and
uncertain market for the crops.
Stakeholder feedback suggested some approaches which may addressing these issues:
Financial support for farmers, land-managers and other necessary parts of the sector including to enable adoption of forthcoming innovations aimed at improving yields and cutting costs, such as new harvesting techniques and mobile machinery for processing materials on farms.
Fixed price and long-term contracts for future crops, at prices higher than production costs. However, given imported biomass and fossil fuels appear to be available at lower cost it is unlikely that end-users will find it feasible to offer attractively priced contracts.
Greater clarity over the likely environmental impacts in Scottish context – both local impacts such as on biodiversity and wider impacts for example indirect land-use change from competition for food / animal feed crops – and how to design of PEC planting in Scotland to maximise positive environmental benefits.
Locational and temporal issues
In terms of suitable and preferred locations for energy crop production in Scotland, as described in Section 6, the proximity to biomass markets (such as power plants) is a key determining factor. The research has shown that there are suitable growing regions, primarily for SRC and SRF within 50km to 100km of existing biomass plants, or potential sites for BECCS plants close to the proposed east coast feeder pipeline, which are likely to be the dominant market demand in a future, more mature biomass market aligned to the Scottish Governments climate ambition. There is some uncertainty about the economically viable distance to transport energy crops, with stakeholders suggesting it would be significantly less than the typical 100km for sawmill quality wood. The number of viable production areas with 50km of potential sites is lower, but they are most advantageous due to lower transport costs (and GHG emissions).
The study did not explore in detail the potential for on-farm use of biomass, but stakeholder consultation suggested this may be an economically viable alternative, particularly for farms not located close to a suitable biomass plant, and given the context of high energy costs. On farm use of PECs is not a negative emissions technology, as it is not feasible to apply carbon capture to small scale plants, but it would contribute to decarbonising agriculture if it replaced fossil fuel use for power and heating in farm buildings.
Looking ahead, if demand for biomass grows in Scotand, UK and elsewhere as countries expand BECCS capacity the market prices for PECs may change. Input costs can also vary significantly. It is beyond scope of this research to deliver a full analysis of future scenarios for the market, or local market dynamics related to specific BECCS sites, but it is clear from the range of profitability demonstrated in Section 5.1, that a range of scenarios should be planned for.
Interactions between PECs and adjacent land-use and wider landscapes and ecology was shown to be an important location factor to consider. Impacts could be beneficial, such as shading / shelter for livestock and to reduce wind exposure for adjacent crops, or could be negative depending on local landscape features, for example reduced yields in adjacent crops due to shading. Positive potential biodiversity impacts have been suggested by some stakeholders, such as habitat for birds, mammals and beneficial insects if edges between PEC and other land-use is maximised, but there was also concern about negative consequences of land-use change and monoculture PECs on biodiversity. Water management benefits also vary across the crops, and the lifecycle of the crops. The implication of the research is that the effective integration of PECs into natural landscapes and farming systems in Scotland to deliver maximum additional environmental benefits will require careful design in relation to the specific local environmental context.
A key issue for economic viability of PECs is the distribution of costs and income over time. Poor cashflow for farmers and land-managers is typical for PECs, because initial costs of establishment are not recouped until harvest after several years. The time from establishment to first harvest varies so the time where a farmer/ land-manager would likely experience cash flow challenges would also vary. The shortest time to first harvest was for Miscanthus, at around 2-3 years for full harvest with potentially a small harvest in the first year, SRC is typically 3 years for first harvest, and 6 years to first full harvest, and for SRF there is typically around 15 years till first harvest. Sequential planting can help create a more regular income because a portion of the crop would be ready for harvest each year. For SRC/ SRF this can be feasible if the harvesting equipment is already available on the farm, or the yearly harvest would be enough to warrant a visit from a contractor. For Miscanthus, there is an annual harvest once established so sequential planting of a portion of land intended for Miscanthus each year would allow for some of initial income to be used for subsequent planting reducing the size of initial outlay whilst increasing the area allocated to the crop over time.
Income diversification
Stakeholder comments suggest that the current levels of interest from farmers in diversification, including into crops with lower input costs and stable income, could be a significant enabler to the uptake of PECs. However, the economic analysis suggests that this would only be the case, if the core barriers around profitability, cashflow and financial risk were addressed.
Other factors influencing PEC uptake
The research found that farmer and land manager attitudes, habits, skills and perceptions, as well as those of the wider community are likely to be influential, alongside the economics, in determining the degree to which energy crops are adopted in Scotland. Low appetite for financial risk is a key preventative factor, with most farmers looking to reduce their exposure to risk and so only likely to be interested in energy crops if they are perceived as a low risk strategy in their own right, or a beneficial diversification of income as part of a wider business risk reduction strategy. The research suggests that, without clearer evidence of favourable market, price and productivity the current perception of these crops as relatively risky is unlikely to change. Concerns about competition with other crops, sustainability credentials, and public perception of the ‘morality’ of energy crops is also likely to influence farmers and land-manager attitudes. Alongside these factors, it was highlighted during the research that farmers often have a strong preference for their current farming enterprises and so may be reluctant to adopt new crops even if they appear financially advantageous and that a significantly higher financial return may be needed to persuade a shift to energy crops in these circumstances.
State of the evidence base and identification of any key gaps
The key gaps and debates in the literature were described in Section 4, and limitations in economic analysis in Section 5. The research shows a need for more robust evidence on potential yields, production costs and environmental impacts specifically for Scotland.
Quantification of potential wider farm benefits, such as shelter for livestock, and estimation of economic value of these benefits to farmers was not identified through this research, but could help create a fuller picture of the economic potential of energy crops for Scotland.
We found limited research on the risks for crop failure / poor productivity from pest, diseases, extreme weather which hampers full assessment of the financial risk exposure of farmers and land-managers associated with planting PECs.
This study has not included a detailed comparison of PECs for NETs with annual bioenergy crops and other bioenergy technologies, such as anaerobic digestion or smaller scale use of PECs on farms for direct energy generation. The REA and stakeholder feedback indicated potential for farmers to benefit from energy security and reduce energy costs if they were to utilise energy crops for their own energy generation. This study has not modelled the current economics of investment in relevant plant and ongoing cost: benefit of this scenario. This research would be potentially beneficial to understand how local small-scale use compares to larger scale use in NETs, and therefore fully understand the relative economic potential of PECs in Scotland.
The research found debates and discussions about how land should be used to fulfil societies various material needs (food, fuel, fibre etc.) and provide space for biodiversity and deliver other ecosystem services. To inform this debate various additional factors, beyond the scope of this research are relevant including the relative benefits of using land for PECs vs other types of renewable energy such as wind and solar energy. Stakeholders highlighted that solar, for example compares, well and there is growing interest in agrivoltaics – solar voltaic panels within agricultural land that may still retain some of its agricultural use such as livestock grazing.
Conclusions
Perennial energy crops have the potential to generate income for farmers and land-managers in Scotland.
However, income is likely to be lower than they could earn from other farm enterprises, such as lowland cattle and sheep and ‘mixed agriculture’, that are typical on the types of land which may be suitable.
The exception is where PEC profitability is compared to ‘general cropping: forage’ farming type (growing crops for animal consumption, usually on lower quality land) this activity typically makes a significant loss, so PECs compared very favourably in the analysis.
for PECs to be viewed as an attractive, economically viable option by farmers and land managers there is a need for greater confidence that it will deliver good economic returns. The high upfront establishment costs for perennial energy crops and low revenue potential are both likely to hinder uptake.
Profitability of perennial energy crops based on gross margin calculations
If costs and income were spread equally over the lifetime of the crop and compared, PECs are less profitable than current farming enterprises, except for ‘general cropping: forage’ which is not typically making a profit.
Of the three crops studied, Miscanthus showed the highest average gross margin at £382 per hectare per year but there are some potentially limiting factors:
uncertainty about achievable yields in the Scottish climate and on the grades of land above category 4.1 in the Land Capability for Agriculture in Scotland. If yields were lower, then profit may be lower.
Limited theoretical growing area in Scotland – much lower than for SRF or SRC based on analysis of land quality and characteristics and Scotland’s climate.
SRF and SRC showed lower profitability for farmers: £80 and £87 per hectare per year over their lifetime respectively for SRF: broadleaved and SRC, making them less attractive but there is more suitable land for growing these. SRF conifer would see a negative gross margin i.e., the production costs outweigh the value of the crop sold.
Potential opportunities
The research also identified some potential positive attributes of PECs which might encourage uptake – PECs could help diversify a business, creating additional income, without adding significant additional labour requirements or ongoing input costs – minimal management time and inputs are required once crops are established.
Potential barriers
Cash flow could pose a problem – the distribution of costs and income year-on-year for PECs is significantly different to typical farming activities which have an annual profit cycle. PECs need investment in site preparation and planting upfront, but income only arrives after first harvest several years later (2-3 years Miscanthus, 6 for SRC, 15 for SRF) and then only periodically after that.
Coupled with uncertainty about market demand and achievable crop sale prices, the need for upfront investment to establish PEC production, means farmers and land managers may view them as a risky proposition and be reluctant to grow them.
We identified other potential barriers to uptake, including farmer and land-manager unfamiliarity with PEC production, low appetite for risk, need for new skills, access to equipment and services, and concerns about community perception of land-use change and impacts on other agricultural production, e.g. available animal feed.
Enhancing economic potential and production of PECs
Potential approaches to improve economic potential in Scotland include:
financial incentives, such as government specific subsidies under future agricultural support,
risk reduction strategies such as secure, attractively-priced contracts with end markets, alongside expansion of the market.
Innovations to allow processing at the farm and to improve transportability of crops could also help to increase the economically viable travel distance.
Implications for wider Scottish economy:
Previous research suggests 38000 could be feasibly planted by 2032 (scenario one) and 90,000 by 2045 (scenario two).
We found that, if land to match this level of demand, was utilised for perennial energy crops (using the scenarios as defined in section 5.2), it would create a gain in gross margin of around £9.6 million (scenario 1) or a loss of around £9.5 million (scenario two) across the regions.
Economically viable production locations:
Economically viable production locations for PECs are influenced by multiple factors including proximity to markets (current biomass energy plants and potential future BECCS plants) and local enough access to services and facilities for crop management (e.g. harvesting contractors) to avoid excessive costs.
We identified suitable growing regions (some SRC/Miscanthus and most for SRF) within an economically viable transport distance to existing biomass plants and potential sites for BECCS near the proposed east coast carbon capture and storage feeder pipeline (assumed 50-100 km).
As SRF is economically uncompetitive against current land-use, this suggests economic viability may be a barrier to PEC production increases even if suitable land is available.
Potential further steps
Key debates and areas for further research include:
Considering more in-depth ‘whole farm’ economic analysis. This study focused on gross margin comparison, which is useful for comparing specific crops and farm enterprises, but has limitations in terms of how well it allows assessment of integration of energy crops into a whole farm business. This will vary farm to farm but could be explored through farm case studies. This could include considering a wider range of costs for farmers and that after initial set up the PECs would require less workload.
Comparing, the economic and environmental potential of using land for energy crops with utilising the same land for other renewable energy options (for example using the land for solar panels alongside grazing) and
Potential role for on-farm use of perennial energy crops.
Considering future biomass markets, including how future Greenhouse Gas Removal (GGR) schemes, global demand and demand from biotechnology sector may impact it.
Identifying how to make domestic biomass from energy crops a more attractive option than imports and a more profitable use of land, and on what basis this can be justified. For example, taking account of full LCA and rewarding greatest emission saving.
Considering in more detail the role of PECs in the context of how the agriculture sector is changing and how it may have to change to reduce GHG emissions.
Considering the value, including the financial value, of other benefits of energy crops, such as flood mitigation or animal shelter, relative to existing or potential alternative land-uses.
Exploring how PECs support/interact with tier 2 or 3 objectives of the ARP.
Considering the impact of subsidies.
References
Alexander, P., D. Moran, et al. (2014). “Estimating UK perennial energy crop supply using farm-scale models with spatially disaggregated data.” Global Change Biology Bioenergy 6(2): 142-155.
Alexander, P., Moran, D., Rounsevell, M.D., Hillier, J. and Smith, P., 2014. Cost and potential of carbon abatement from the UK perennial energy crop market. GCB Bioenergy, 6(2), pp.156-168.
Alexander, P., Moran, D. and Rounsevell, M.D., 2015. Evaluating potential policies for the UK perennial energy crop market to achieve carbon abatement and deliver a source of low carbon electricity. Biomass and Bioenergy, 82, pp.3-12.
Anejionu, O.C. and Woods, J., 2019. Preliminary farm-level estimation of 20-year impact of introduction of energy crops in conventional farms in the UK. Renewable and Sustainable Energy Reviews, 116, p.109407.
Berkley, N. A. J., Hanley, M. E., Boden, R., Owen, R. S., Holmes, J. H., Critchley, R. D., … Parmesan, C. (2018). Influence of bioenergy crops on pollinator activity varies with crop type and distance. GCB Bioenergy, 10(12), 960–971. https://doi.org/10.1111/gcbb.12565
Bocquého, G., 2017. Effects of liquidity constraints, risk and related time effects on the adoption of perennial energy crops. Handbook of Bioenergy Economics and Policy: Volume II: Modeling Land Use and Greenhouse Gas Implications, pp.373-399.
Bourke, D., Stanley, D., O’Rourke, E., Thompson, R., Carnus, T., Dauber, J., … Stout, J. (2014). Response of farmland biodiversity to the introduction of bioenergy crops: effects of local factors and surrounding landscape context. GCB Bioenergy, 6(3), 275–289. https://doi.org/10.1111/gcbb.12089
Brown, C., Bakam, I., Smith, P. and Matthews, R., 2016. An agent‐based modelling approach to evaluate factors influencing bioenergy crop adoption in north‐east Scotland. Global Change Biology Bioenergy, 8(1), pp.226-244.
Busch, G., 2017. A spatial explicit scenario method to support participative regional land-use decisions regarding economic and ecological options of short rotation coppice (SRC) for renewable energy production on arable land: case study application for the Göttingen district, Germany. Energy, Sustainability and Society, 7, pp.1-23.
Dandy, N., 2010. Stakeholder Perceptions of Short-rotation Forestry for energy.
Davies, I., 2020. Miscanthus: Can it tackle climate change and turn a profit? Farmers Weekly. 18 March 2020. [Date accessed 9 August 2023].
Dogbe, W. and Revoredo-Giha, C., 2022 Current and Potential Market Opportunities for Hempseed and Fibre in Scotland.Donnison, I. S. and M. D. Fraser (2016). “Diversification and use of bioenergy to maintain future grasslands.” Food and Energy Security 5(2): 67-75.
Glithero, N.J., Wilson, P. and Ramsden, S.J., 2013. Prospects for arable farm uptake of Short Rotation Coppice willow and Miscanthus in England. Applied energy, 107, pp.209-218.
Griffiths, N.A., Rau, B.M., Vaché, K.B., Starr, G., Bitew, M.M., Aubrey, D.P., Martin, J.A., Benton, E. and Jackson, C.R., 2019. Environmental effects of short‐rotation woody crops for bioenergy: What is and isn’t known. GCB Bioenergy, 11(4), pp.554-572.
Hastings, A., Mos, M., Yesufu, J.A., McCalmont, J., Schwarz, K., Shafei, R., Ashman, C., Nunn, C., Schuele, H., Cosentino, S. and Scalici, G., 2017. Economic and environmental assessment of seed and rhizome propagated Miscanthus in the UK. Frontiers in Plant Science, 8, p.1058.
Haszeldine, R., Cavanagh, A., Scott, V., Sohi, S., & Masek, O. (2019). Greenhouse Gas Removal Technologies – approaches and implementation pathways in Scotland. University of Edinburgh & Heriot Watt University 2019 on behalf of ClimateXChange. https://www.climatexchange.org.uk/media/3749/greenhouse-gas-removal-technologies.pdf
Holland, R. A., Eigenbrod, F., Muggeridge, A., Brown, G., Clarke, D., & Taylor, G. (2015). A synthesis of the ecosystem services impact of second generation bioenergy crop production. Renewable and Sustainable Energy Reviews, 46, 30-40.
Hudiburg, T.W., Davis, S.C., Parton, W. and Delucia, E.H., 2015. Bioenergy crop greenhouse gas mitigation potential under a range of management practices. Gcb Bioenergy, 7(2), pp.366-374
Kralik, T., Vavrova, K., Knapek, J. and Weger, J., 2022. Agroforestry systems as new strategy for bioenergy—Case example of Czech Republic. Energy Reports, 8, pp.519-525.
Leslie, Andrew, Mencuccini, Maurizio, Perks, Mike and Wilson, Edward (2019) A
review of the suitability of eucalypts for short rotation forestry for energy in the
UK. New Forests, 51 (1). pp. 1-19.
Liu, C.L.C., Kuchma, O. and Krutovsky, K.V., 2018. Mixed-species versus monocultures in plantation forestry: Development, benefits, ecosystem services and perspectives for the future. Global Ecology and conservation, 15, p.e00419
Low Carbon Contracts Company, 2022. Fuel Measurement and Sampling (FMS) Guidance. Available at https://lcc-web-production-eu-west-2-files20230703161747904200000001.s3.amazonaws.com/documents/FMS_Guidance_-_Version_2_February_2022.pdf
Martin, G., Ingvorsen, L., Willcocks, J., Wiltshire, J., Bates, J., Jenkins, B., Priestley, T., McKay, H. and Croxten, S., 2020. Evidence review: Perennial energy crops and their potential in Scotland.
McCalmont, J.P., Hastings, A., McNamara, N.P., Richter, G.M., Robson, P., Donnison, I.S. and Clifton‐Brown, J., 2017. Environmental costs and benefits of growing Miscanthus for bioenergy in the UK. Gcb Bioenergy, 9(3), pp.489-507.
Meek, D. Jenevezian, A. , Leishman, R., Odeh, N., and Bates, J. Ricardo Energy & Environment, 2022, Comparing Scottish bioenergy Supply and Demand in the context of Net-Zero targets.
Mola-Yudego, B., I. Dimitriou, et al. (2014). “A conceptual framework for the introduction of energy crops.” Renewable Energy 72: 29-38.
Morris, J. and Day, G., 2023. The Potential of Agroforestry for Bioenergy in the UK.
Ofgem, 2021. Sustainability Self-Reporting Guidance. Available at https://www.ofgem.gov.uk/sites/default/files/docs/2021/04/sustainability_self-reporting_guidance_final_2021.pdf
Olba-Zięty, E., Stolarski, M.J. and Krzyżaniak, M., 2021. Economic evaluation of the production of perennial crops for energy purposes—A review. Energies, 14(21), p.7147.
Ostwald, M., Jonsson, A., Wibeck, V. and Asplund, T., 2013. Mapping energy crop cultivation and identifying motivational factors among Swedish farmers. Biomass and Bioenergy, 50, pp.25-34.
Parratt, M. 2017, Short Rotation Forestry Trials in Scotland 2017 Report, Forest Research
Perrin, A., Wohlfahrt, J., Morandi, F., Østergård, H., Flatberg, T., De La Rua, C., Bjørkvoll, T. and Gabrielle, B., 2017. Integrated design and sustainable assessment of innovative biomass supply chains: A case-study on Miscanthus in France. Applied Energy, 204, pp.66-77.
Petrenko, C. and Searle, S., 2016. Assessing the profitability of growing dedicated energy versus food crops in four European countries. Proceedings of the Working paper, 14.
Ranacher, L., Pollakova, B., Schwarzbauer, P., Liebal, S., Weber, N. and Hesser, F., 2021. Farmers’ Willingness to Adopt Short Rotation Plantations on Marginal Lands: Qualitative Study About Incentives and Barriers in Slovakia. BioEnergy Research, 14, pp.357-373.
Scottish Government, 2021, Scotland’s Third Land-use Strategy 2021-2026
Schiberna, E., Borovics, A. and Benke, A., 2021. Economic modelling of poplar short rotation coppice plantations in Hungary. Forests, 12(5), p.623.
Shepherd, A., Clifton‐Brown, J., Kam, J., Buckby, S. and Hastings, A., 2020. Commercial experience with Miscanthus crops: Establishment, yields and environmental observations. GCB Bioenergy, 12(7), pp.510-523.
Shepherd, A., Littleton, E., Clifton‐Brown, J., Martin, M. and Hastings, A., 2020a. Projections of global and UK bioenergy potential from Miscanthus× giganteus—Feedstock yield, carbon cycling and electricity generation in the 21st century. GCB Bioenergy, 12(4), pp.287-305.
Spackman, P., 2012. Energy crops need support to fulfill potential. Farmers Weekly. 8 June 2012. [Date accessed 9 August 2023].
Thornley, P., 2006. Increasing biomass based power generation in the UK. Energy Policy, 34(15), pp.2087-2099.
Tullus, H., Tullus, A. and Rytter, L., 2013. Short-rotation forestry for supplying biomass for energy production. Forest bioenergy production: management, carbon sequestration and adaptation, pp.39-56.
Vanbeverena, S., & Ceulemansa, R. (2019). Biodiversity in short-rotation coppice. Renewable and Sustainable Energy Reviews, 111, 34-43.
Walle, I.V., Van Camp, N., Van de Casteele, L., Verheyen, K. and Lemeur, R., 2007. Short-rotation forestry of birch, maple, poplar and willow in Flanders (Belgium) I—Biomass production after 4 years of tree growth. Biomass and bioenergy, 31(5), pp.267-275.
Warren, C. R., 2014. “Scales of disconnection: mismatches shaping the geographies of emerging energy landscapes.” Moravian Geographical Reports 22(2): 7-14.
Warren, C.R., Burton, R., Buchanan, O. and Birnie, R.V., 2016. Limited adoption of short rotation coppice: The role of farmers’ socio-cultural identity in influencing practice. Journal of Rural Studies, 45, pp.175-183.
Whittaker, C., Hunt, J., Misselbrook, T. and Shield, I., 2016. How well does Miscanthus ensile for use in an anaerobic digestion plant? Biomass and Bioenergy, 88, pp.24-34.
Witzel, C.P. and Finger, R., 2016. Economic evaluation of Miscanthus production–A review. Renewable and Sustainable Energy Reviews, 53, pp.681-696.
Winkler, B., Mangold, A., von Cossel, M., Clifton-Brown, J., Pogrzeba, M., Lewandowski, I., Iqbal, Y. and Kiesel, A., 2020. Implementing Miscanthus into farming systems: A review of agronomic practices, capital and labour demand. Renewable and Sustainable Energy Reviews, 132, p.110053.
Zhang, B., Hastings, A., Clifton‐Brown, J.C., Jiang, D. and Faaij, A.P., 2020. Spatiotemporal assessment of farm‐gate production costs and economic potential of Miscanthus× giganteus, Panicum virgatum L., and Jatropha grown on marginal land in China. GCB Bioenergy, 12(5), pp.310-327.
Zimmermann, J., Styles, D., Hastings, A., Dauber, J. and Jones, M.B., 2014. Assessing the impact of within crop heterogeneity (‘patchiness’) in young Miscanthus× giganteus fields on economic feasibility and soil carbon sequestration. Gcb Bioenergy, 6(5), pp.566-576.
Appendix A: Policy Context for Energy Crops in Scotland
Climate Change Policy
The Update to the Climate Change Plan (CCPu)[27], published by the Scottish Government in December 2020, whilst focused on reducing emissions, identifies the need to also remove carbon dioxide from the atmosphere to compensate for residual emissions. It foresees a role for technologies to achieve a net reduction in emissions – often referred to as Negative Emissions technologies (NETs). It identifies several NETs pathways with potential in Scotland, including bioenergy with carbon capture and storage (BECCS). Climate Committee’s (CCC) 6th Carbon Budget sets out that achieving the required scale of BECCS will necessitate a significant increase in the domestic production of biomass feedstocks[28].
The CCC’s 2022 review of Scotland’s progress[29] highlighted that Scotland’s planned deployment of NETs was ambitious, comprising two thirds of UK government overall ambition for 2030, but also notes the advantage of Scotland’s large land area and potential to draw on substantial biomass stocks. It recommends consideration of the impacts and interactions that increased domestic biomass production could have on land use and agriculture. The Scottish Government has acknowledged that these targets can’t be met – the NETs feasibility study gives more realistic targets[30]. Failure to meet NETs targets for Scotland implies deeper emissions reductions in harder-to-decarbonise sectors, such as aviation and agriculture, and so it is critical to consider how farmers and land-managers can deliver the necessary biomass feedstocks. The CCPu includes a proposal to develop rural support policy to enable, encourage planting of biomass crops within broader measures on sustainable, low carbon farming[31]. The CCC recommends maintenance and enhancement of support for agroforestry[32], and a target of 5% trees on farmland by 2035.
Agricultural policy
Scottish Government’s Vision for Agriculture recognises the essential role agriculture has in delivering sustainable food production, climate adaptation and mitigation, biodiversity recovery and nature restoration and proposes that future subsidy support for agriculture will be split across unconditional support and support targeted to environmental outcomes, including low carbon farming and biodiversity The new Scottish Agriculture Bill as introduced to parliament on 28th September 2023 provides a replacement for the Common Agricultural Policy (CAP) and has been drafted to provide the required powers and framework to deliver the Vision for Agriculture. The bill would require Scottish Ministers to prepare a five-year Rural Support Plan for farming, forestry, and rural development. The Agricultural Reform Route Map (ruralpayments.org) sets out the milestones and timescales for change. The Agriculture Bill and Rural Support Plan will have implications for how economically viable it may be in future for farmers and land-managers to grow energy crops. Whilst the details are yet to be confirmed, it is clear that any expansion of perennial energy crops will need to take these policy developments into account.
Other key policies:
Principles of ‘just transition’ are defined in legislation[33] and Scotland’s draft ‘Energy Strategy and Just Transition Plan’[34] was published in January 2023. It describes Scotland’s aim to use bioenergy where it can best support Scotland’s Net Zero Journey, and aligns with and supports Scotland’s goals for protecting and restoring nature. It contains a commitment to review the potential to scale up domestic biomass supply chains. Bioenergy crops, if economically viable, could offer the agricultural sector a new income stream and support the rural economy, which would be consistent with the draft plan. The draft plan also includes a proposal to develop a strategic framework for the most appropriate use of finite bio-resources (published in a Bioenergy Action Plan), acknowledging the potential for competing demands on land and natural resources. CCPu also acknowledges the need for open a discussion on optimum land uses beyond just farming and food production to multi-faceted land use including forestry, peatland restoration and management and biomass production.
UK biomass policy context
The UK Government’s Department for Energy Security and Net Zero (DESNZ) published a Biomass Strategy in August 2023 which set out the Government’s view that well-regulated BECCS can deliver negative emissions and ensure positive outcomes for people, the environment, and the climate. It commits the UK Government to strengthen sustainability criteria and verification processes for biomass, acknowledging challenges with international supply chains, and creating a cross-sector sustainability framework for biomass (subject to consultation). The focus will be on addressing greenhouse gas emissions, indirect land-use change, and potentially soil carbon changes. The strategy anticipates a key role for both domestic and imported biomass use across the economy, on a limited timescale. It also sets out how the government is actively developing demand side policies to support emerging technologies such as BECCS and Greenhouse Gas Reduction (GGR) business models, for example the potential for a ‘Contracts for Difference’ (CfD)[35] approach. The strategy acknowledges that bioenergy policy involves a mix of reserved and non-reserved powers, and so as the Scottish Government develops its draft Bioenergy Policy Statement, Scotland has an opportunity to build on UK policies and develop policies appropriate for Scotland.
Appendix B: Introduction to Perennial Energy Crops
Introduction to Miscanthus
Miscanthus is a tall perennial grass with woody canes like bamboo, of East Asian Origin. The most common variety of Miscanthus grown is the sterile hybrid Miscanthus x giganteus (M. giganteus). Miscanthus is a renewable source of fibre which has a wide potential range of uses as biomass or fibre. Whilst Miscanthus can be grown in parts of Scotland, it is not currently grown at commercial scale and further trials are required to verify its potential future contribution (Meek et al., 2022). Nonetheless, Martin, et al 2020 found 51,800ha of land is theoretically suitable in Scotland to grow Miscanthus which could produce 2.59TWh/yr and 0.52Modt/yr.
To grow, the crop must be established by planting pieces of rhizome (underground plant stem capable of producing the shoot and root systems) which have been collected from fields where Miscanthus is already established[36]. Prior to planting, site preparation may typically involve breaking up compacted soil, removing weeds (using herbicides), ploughing to 30cm depth, then further levelling and soil cultivation to create a fine level soil to around 15cm[37]. Equipment which is typically available on an arable farm can be used for this site preparation and planting. Planting using specialist equipment achieves best results, but a potato planter could alternatively be used[38]. Biodegradable plastic film to prevent frost damage and retain moisture and fencing to prevent rabbits damage can improve success of crop establishment. Once planted, some gap filling might be needed (done manually) and chemical weed control in the first year or so. Fertilisers are not usually needed. After the first year the material is cut back and left in the field. In year 2, depending on the growth rate, there will be a small harvest, or another cut back. Once established a Miscanthus crop is harvested annually, usually in early spring when moisture content is lower, and can be productive for around 15 years. The material is baled, or sometime chipped, to enable easier transport and storage. Sometimes drying is required in storage (natural or mechanical ventilation). At the end of the crop lifetime, to revert the land to other uses, a herbicide is often used to kill Miscanthus shoots and rhizome, followed by ploughing.
Short Rotation Coppice (SRC) commonly consists of high-yielding varieties of either poplar or willow, densely planted on a piece of land. The solid, woody biomass provides a source of biofuel that is either used alone or combined with other fuels to power district heating systems and electric power generation stations[40],[41]. It was noted previously by Martin et al. (2020), that the production of energy crops in Scotland has in the past been limited, with only SRC currently grown at small commercial scale (250ha). There is greater potential for further SRC cultivation in Scotland provided that suitable land area is available.
Most types of land, except for heavy clay soils and water-logged land, are suitable for SRC. The initial steps to establishment include removing weeds using herbicide, ploughing to 30cm and further cultivation to 15cm. Rods or cuttings are planted with a specialist planter. Gap filling and protection using rabbit or deer fencing may also be needed. During the first year weed control using herbicides and control of plant diseases using pesticides may be needed. Once established, SRC plantations are typically harvested at 3-year intervals using a forage harvester with a specific cutting system, then chipped and stored outside on a concrete base or in the field. Plantations typically remain productive for 15-25 years[42]. After this, a new planting can be established, or the field reverted through a process that involves stump grinding and the application of herbicides to prevent regrowth.
Introduction to short rotation forestry
Short rotation forestry (SRF) involves planting relatively fast-growing tree species and harvesting them for biomass after around 15-20 years, which is much quicker than conventional forestry. Species can be coniferous (e.g., Sitka spruce, Douglas fir) or broadleaved (e.g., aspen, poplar, silver birch, downy birch, sycamore). SRF is not currently operated commercially in Scotland although there are some trial plots. Nonetheless 912,600 ha of suitable land is theoretically currently suitable for planting of SRF in Scotland (Martin et al., 2020). Limited, recent literature material and evidence was found in the REA relating to the economic potential of SRF in and around the UK.
Process steps are like conventional forestry: the plantation is grown from seedlings or cuttings, or sometimes direct seeding, into land prepared through steps such as drainage, ploughing, and fencing. Some weed control or replacement planting may be needed initially, but after this limited maintenance is required. All the trees in a growing area are harvested at the same time using specialist cutting equipment, then either cut into lengths and stacked to air dry ready for collection or chipped on site. With SRC the shorter rotation, and the higher planting density, reduces the potential for co-production of logs for sawmill timber[43]. After harvest the site can be cleared, using machinery and herbicides as per SRC and then replanted or reverted to other land-use. Alternatively new stems can be allowed to regrow for coppicing, or a single good stem selected to continue growing for harvest after 15-20 years. Broadleaved varieties tend to produce higher wood density which is advantageous for use as bioenergy.
Appendix C: Methodology to Rapid Evidence Review
The Rapid Evidence Assessment (REA) methodology used for this project aligns with NERC methodology[44] and comprised of the following steps.
Define the search strategy protocol, identify key search words or terms, define inclusion/exclusion criteria. A list of key words, terms and search strings was created and reviewed by Ricardo’s bioenergy and agriculture technical experts and the project steering group to direct the REA review to the most relevant sources. This list was and divided into six relevant categories ‘Energy Crops’; ‘Economic potential’; ‘Farm business and agronomic considerations’; ‘Preferred/feasible locations’; ‘Agricultural & land-use options’; ‘Other considerations e.g., just transition, decarbonisation’ to ensure that all appropriate aspects of the economic potential of energy crops were identified which supported the focus the review. Any literature that is considered out of scope based on our list of assumptions was excluded from the search. We also excluded literature that is older than 10 years, unless it was from a credible source and was the only piece of evidence available (particularly for data).
Searching for evidence and recording findings. Literature was searched using Google Scholar and Science Direct, utilising our accounts with Science Direct and Research Gate to access restricted pdfs where required. Grey literature, such as farming press and industry reports were used to provide examples and case studies of the economic potential of energy crops. In addition to the search engines, two existing evidence reviews, prepared by Ricardo were used to sources relevant literature: ‘Evidence review: Perennial energy crops and their potential in Scotland’ and ‘Evidence review: Increasing Sustainable Bioenergy Feedstocks Feasibility Study’. Academic paper ‘Greenhouse Gas Removal Technologies –approaches and implementation pathways in Scotland’ (Haszeldine et al, 2019) was also provided to us to supplement our evidence base. For each individual search a unique search reference was assigned, the date, search string used, total number of results found, and the total number of relevant papers found were recorded. Our search strings can be found in the table below.
Further economic potential (e.g., decarbonisation of agricultural practices and creation of new jobs)
A RAG (red, amber, green) rating was assigned to each source, based on the g criteria:
Description
Rating
Quality
Peer reviewed journal, sound data sources and methodology
Green
Government funded research reports, sound data sources and methodology
Green
Research funded by NGOs (e.g., AHDB), sound data sources and methodology
Amber
Work is unreliable because of unreliable data sources, or limited sources, or because the method is not robust
Red
Information from websites, blogs etc., of unknown quality
Red
Relevance
Timeframe: within last 10 years
Green
Timeframe: within last 20 years
Amber
Timeframe: older than 20 years
Red
Screening. Sources of evidence was then screened initially by title and then accepted papers were then screened again using the summary or abstract. Literature was screened for information on the following inclusion criteria:
SRC, SRF, Miscanthus (and hemp / alternatives if strong evidence to show economic viability)
Economic potential (positive and negative) of energy crops – qualitative and quantitative information
How farmers / land-managers are making decisions about which enterprises and land-uses to adopt and research which provides evidence of likely preferences and decision-making influences.
Agronomic or other considerations which would influence viability / adoption by farmers / land-managers.
Extract and appraise the evidence. The screening provided an organised list of papers which enabled evidence to be extracted directly from the literature into the report. Literature extracted also guided the internal workshop and supported information included in the SWOT and PESTLE tables.
Appendix D Evidence of positive economic potential
We found some evidence in literature that PECs can be profitable for farmers and land managers, but limited studies directly applicable to Scotland and to the current economic climate. The price of fuels and other agricultural inputs have been subject to significant rises and fluctuations since most studies were undertaken and studies were mostly in locations with different growing conditions to Scotland. Economic performance of biomass production is influenced by production costs, crop yields, crop price and end-use/market opportunities (Olba-Zięty et al., 2021).
Several studies comparing energy crops reported a high return per hectare for miscanthus, (Martin et al., 2020, Zhang et al, 2020). One reason for this is that miscanthus can produce high outputs from low inputs which is economically significant for farmers (Donnison and Fraser 2016), particularly in the current context of high agricultural input costs. Miscanthus is attractive as it requires few farm operations, has low labour needs, crop management is straightforward and existing farming machinery and skills can be utilised in its production (Shepherd et al., 2020a and Glithero et al 2013) thus improving its economic potential in comparison to annual crops (such as cereals) used for energy. Growers invest in miscanthus due to this low maintenance cost along with the low requirement for field operations (Shepherd et al., 2020). However, Mola-Yudego et al., (2014) in a Swedish study found SRC willow had the lowest production costs overall, compared with other energy crops (miscanthus, reed canary grass and triticale). The production costs, and therefore profit, will vary depending on equipment available on farm (Ostwald et al,2013a).
The tree species chosen for SRF influences plantation establishment costs and therefore enterprise profitability – costs vary between species: Hybrid Aspen requires a costly micro-propagation technique, and so is more costly to establish than Poplar (Tullus et al., 2013). The literature did not provide detailed information on how well-suited different species are to the Scottish climate and the expected yields of biomass in Scotland. Initial indications from trials currently underway in Scotland (Parratt, M, 2017) suggest Hybrid Apsen appears to have most potential, with common alder, silver birch and Sitka spruce having potential at some sites, but full assessment of biomass is not complete and economics are not assessed.
A farming press example of a grower for Terravesta, the major purchaser of Miscanthus in England (Davies, in Farmers Weekly, 2020), reported that for Miscanthus, an average net profit of £530.85/ha over a 15-year period based on a mature yield of 14/t/ha was achievable. Stakeholders interviewed for this study indicated that Miscanthus is still economically viable under this growing model in England, despite current economic conditions, but questioned whether this yield, which would be a key determinant of profit, is feasible in Scottish growing conditions.
Evidence for negative economic impacts
The most prominent evidence of negative economic impacts in the literature was the high upfront cost to establish PECs, lack of established markets, and the uncertainty over the stability of the long-term market (Martin et al., 2020 and Witzel and Finger 2016). Profitability and economic considerations for farmers are dominated by these costs, market dynamics and biomass yield (Zimmermann et al., 2014).
High establishment costs and uncertainties about the market, mean that farmers may perceive PECs as financially risky and are discouraged from growing them (Witzel and Finger 2016, Zimmermann et al., 2014, Hastings et al., 2017). Previous farm-scale modelling was conducted to improve the understanding of the potential economic PEC supply across the UK. The results concluded that without increases in market prices, SRC willow would likely only provide a small proportion of the UK’s PEC target (Alexander et al., 2014). Similar studies were not found for SRF and Miscanthus, and the economics will have changed since this study making it difficult to understand from the literature if this is still the case but it is clear market access and price is a key issue.
In relation to Scotland specifically, the research found that high initial capital investment and a delayed period of revenue are major factors that negatively influence economic potential of PECs. Farmers receive no income from crop sales in the first years after establishment of PECs leading to poor cash flow, which can be an obstacle preventing farmer uptake (Bocquého, 2017). This period before first crop sales varies: typically 2-3 years for miscanthus production (Martin et al. (2020), around 4 years for SRC (Warren, 2016), and 10-20 years for SRF (Martin et al., 2020, Tullus et al., 2013), meaning a farmer may be waiting several years before the crop breaks even, for example miscanthus typically breaks even after between 4 and 11 years (Martin et al 2020).
Economic potential of PECs, in comparison to other crops
The literature review did not provide clear evidence of how the three key PECs being studied here compare economically to other crops, annual crops and agricultural land-uses – some studies showed favourable comparison and others did not. Key studies are highlighted below, but limited insights can be gained on this question from the literature given the recent economic changes affecting agricultural costs and market prices. See Section 5 for a comparative analysis reflecting current economic situation. Petrenko and Searle (2016) found the profitability of miscanthus and SRC to be competitive, with oats in the south of England, and with oats and rye in Southern Germany and, but could not compete with wheat in Europe generally or typical arable rotations in France (Glithero et al., 2013). Lower input costs may mean that PECs are more competitive now, than arable crops which typically require high levels of expensive inputs (such as fuel, pesticides and fertiliser), but literature does not confirm this. Glithero et al (2013) showed miscanthus to have lower biomass production costs (calculated as cost per gigajoule of energy) in comparison to straw-based crops in England. Busch (2017), in Germany, found SRC to be financially superior when compared to three different crop rotation systems consisting of oilseed rape, wheat, barley, and maize crops, concluding that SRC can compete against annual crops provided proper site selection and a suitable market (in this case, wood chip production). Mola-Yudego et al., (2014) highlight research in Northern Ireland which showed similar gross margin to grain production, assuming average yields in both cases.
We did not find research which compared energy crop economics with livestock farming systems economics.
Influences on farmer and land-manager decisions on planting PECs
One of the main factors affecting the uptake of PEC is economic profitability (Olba-Zięty,2021). Appetite for and perception of financial risk, skills, attitudes and access to markets can also influence farmer and land-manager decisions about planting PECs. Evidence from the literature, and our research interviews with stakeholders suggests that even where PECs, or energy crops in general, can deliver positive economic results for farmers and land managers, this on its own is not always sufficient to convince them to start growing PECs. A choice-experiment study in Sweden, found that lower production costs can enable farmers to achieve higher profit from energy crops, in comparison the traditional crops, but that further compensation of up to 215 Euro per hectare would be needed to persuade a farmer to switch to SRC (Ostwald et al,2013a).
A study by Warren (2014) on farmers’ attitudes to PECs in south-west Scotland found that farmers perceived growing SRC to be ‘financially risky’. SRC production was associated with uncertain returns on harvested wood as prices can be volatile. A lack of access to local markets was also highlighted as a potential barrier to current market adoption by producers (Alexander et al., 2014).
Other economic features of PEC production which influence economic potential for farmers and land-managers in Scotland
Producing PECs has specific economic implications for growers which influence their economic potential and attractiveness. These include challenges: lack of flexibility of land-use, reduced market responsiveness; and opportunities for diversification alongside current farming enterprises.
Unlike with annual arable crops, miscanthus producers can’t maximise profitability by changing crop each year to react to market prices (Hastings et al. (2017). The implication of this, which was highlighted during stakeholder interviews, is that to view PECs as economically worthwhile, farmers need confidence that they can achieve an acceptable and secure market price into the future. Long term production contracts between private biomass processors/plants and farmers are an important consideration in managing financial risk for producers (Bocquého, 2017). Stakeholders highlighted that joined up contracts including harvesting and haulage services, currently being used for some crops, can also help reduce risk and simplify the economics for producers.
The literature review suggested that the way PECs are deployed on farms influences their economic potential. Integration of PECs alongside other enterprises and on land which is not performing well could be advantageous. Glithero et al., (2013) reported that when integrated as a diversification enterprise on-farm miscanthus can be highly competitive. Less productive land, for example poor agricultural land with insufficient returns for food crop, is suitable for miscanthus (Shepherd et al., 2020a), which implies it could provide an economic benefit if deployed on this type of land within a farm.
Brown et al., (2016) report that introducing SRC into traditional cropping systems allows producers to diversify their farming operation, which in turn enhances income, improves income security and reduces risk. Alexander and Moran., 2013, similarly found a portfolio of crops including conventional crops, alongside Miscanthus has been found to achieve a more stable income for farmers, and furthermore conclude that, as farms typically operate in a risk-averse manner, reduced risk is an important factor in farmer decision-making for PECs.
The economic potential of SRC is largely dependent on the establishment of strong markets and demand driven by power companies (Brown, 2016). In the UK, it is generally found that further development of energy cropping only occurs once a plant has been built and several farmers adopt SRC practices to supply crops for that plant (Alexander et al., 2015).
Opportunities to improve economic potential of PECs in Scotland
Cultivation techniques, crop variety choice and other technological developments can influence economic potential of PECs in Scotland and have potential to improve profitability for farmers and land managers in future. For example, the use of plastic mulch film to reduce establishment time can improve crop economics (Hastings et al. 2017). Introduction of new and seed propagated hybrids of Miscanthus alongside agronomic developments have been projected to significantly reduce the cost of Miscanthus production. Mobile briquetting of Miscanthus can also increase the economic potential of Miscanthus (Perrin et al., 2017). Through the Biomass Innovation Fund, £32 million of research funding was awarded to innovation projects across the UK to deliver ‘commercially viable innovations in biomass production. Several innovations have potential to improve yields and reduce production costs for Miscanthus in Scotland, including efficient and mobile harvesting equipment and development of new cultivars more suited to colder climates (see Appendix F).
The literature review and stakeholder interviews both highlighted some factors which can negatively affect the economics of PEC production, which if addressed are potential opportunities to improve economic performance. Gaps in the crop (patchiness) was a key factor reducing profitability of miscanthus in the UK, resulting in longer payback periods. Tackling this by addressing issues such as planting technique, bad rhizome quality, poor overwintering, or variations in the soil quality helps maximise crop yield and improve farmer income (Zimmermann et al., 2014). Ensuring access for harvesting equipment is essential for economics of SRF to be viable – ensuring areas planted are on slopes not more than around 20 degrees is important to ensure the economic benefits of mechanised harvesting can be accessed (Martin et al 2020). For SRF effective plantation establishment is important for the economics and general success of a SRF plantation, yet our research did not find clear consensus on how to achieve this: Tullus et al., 2013 found low planting density was preferred amongst producers to minimize establishment costs, although impact on yield is uncertain in the literature. Research also found that single species monocultures can offer greatest economic return by providing higher yields per hectare (Liu et al., 2018), highest yield are achieved on fertile soil (Tullus et al., 2013) or under intensive management systems, including weed control, fertilizer application and irrigation (Walle et al., 2007).
Evidence of potential for Scotland’s wider economy
There was limited research addressing the potential contribution to the wider Scottish economy and a just transition, but some opportunities and challenges can be inferred. These include sales for local energy generation and other industrial uses, employment opportunities in contract services, along with potential payments for environmental outcomes. The requirement for contractors and local services during annual Miscanthus harvesting presents employment opportunities (Martin et al., 2020), as does SRF planting and harvesting (Liu et al., 2018). Depending on the existing farm enterprises, and choice of PEC, the workload for PECs may fall at a different time of year to other peaks in labour demand, helping to spread labour requirement through the year and reduce overall labour requirement. This could make farming more economically viable on farms which rely on family labour or very small workforces and reduce seasonal labour demands.
In addition to being used as BECCS feedstock, PECs have other potential uses and markets. Miscanthus can be sold for animal bedding, thatching, paper production, horticulture, construction materials[45], and biodegradable plastics (Anejionu and Woods 2019). There has been research on using Miscanthus as a feedstock for fermentation to transport fuels or through anaerobic digestion (AD) to biogas (Witzel and Finger, 2016). Miscanthus for AD has been found to be uneconomical according to Whittaker et al.(2016). Our stakeholder interviews confirmed that farmers would benefit more from growing feedstocks tailored to AD if this is their desired market, yet Winkler et al. (2020) reported significant potential for additional income from biogas production.
SRF and SRC, (when processed into woodchips) can provide a fuel source for biomass boilers and CHP units on-farm and for local domestic or other use[46] (Spackman, 2012, Ranacher et al., 2021). This can be an alternative market to diversify income sources and also potentially save farmers money on their own energy bills. The literature did not provide details on the economic implications of this but the stakeholder interviews flagged that farmers are currently interested in exploring opportunities to cut energy bills. Miscanthus was also identified to be used in small scale CHP plants on-farms for heating buildings and for domestic uses such as wood burners[47].
Beyond selling the biomass from PECs as a product, the literature reviewed suggested the potential of PECs to deliver environmental and ecological benefits which could potentially be monetised. SRC and SRF are currently not eligible for carbon credits, and it is unlikely that PECs can provide evidenced carbon storage in biomass or soils in order to qualify under other certification schemes. There may be opportunities to gain economic benefit from flood protection and biodiversity benefits that some PECs can deliver – the research has not identified significant information on this.
Evidence of non-economic opportunities
Non-economic opportunities and benefits of PECs were identified during the research, including several relating to positive environmental outcomes such as reduced agro-chemical use and biodiversity. All three PECs investigated require less chemical inputs, and reduce soil and water pollution (McCalmont et al., 2017). They also sequester carbon, for example miscanthus has a carbon mitigation potential of 4.0–5.3 Mg C ha-1 yr-1 (Zimmermann et al., 2014). Conversion of agricultural land to SRC leads to a reduction in management intensity of the land, resulting in potential soil benefits (Schiberna et al., 2021). The impacts of SRF may be positive or negative depending on what the land was previously used for. Soil compaction and disturbance caused by the harvest of SRF can lead to erosion and a loss in soil organic matter (Martin et al., 2020). Impacts may be neutral or possibly negative if conversion of land is from pasture or native forest to SRF (Griffiths et al., 2019). However, if displacing arable production, SRF has been reported to improve soil stability (Martin et al., 2020) with the potential to have positive effects on carbon soil organic carbon, water retention and erosion rates (Griffiths et al., 2019). SRF can also help flood alleviation as a SRF plantation would slow the rate of water flow (Martin et al., 2020).
The opportunities for biodiversity improvements resulting from PECs vary depending on planting, prior land-use and landscape context. Miscanthus has been reported to have positive effects on biodiversity (Bourke et al 2014 and Berkley et al 2018) in comparison to arable cropping systems. Shepherd et al., 2020 found an abundance of wildlife in UK miscanthus fields which, apart from at harvest time is left undisturbed. However, the effects on biodiversity of large-scale plantations are unknown (Bourke et al 2014). The introduction of SRC sites within arable cropping systems has in some cases been found to enhance the presence of some pollinators (hoverflies, bumblebees and butterflies), which can benefit crop production. However, it should be noted that these benefits are highly context dependent (Berkley et al., 2018). Opportunities to increase bird populations and diversity is thought to increase if native species of SRF are introduced (Martin et al., 2020).
Challenges and deployment barriers
The research identified several non-economic challenges facing the production of PECs in Scotland, relating to skills, land-use commitment, compatibility with current culture and habits, farm businesses, perceived land suitability and environmental concerns. Deployment barriers for Miscanthus include the need for farmers to commit land for a long period of time, land quality, knowledge (Glithero et al 2013), profitability, time to financial return and social resistance relating to whether land should be used for energy or food production (Anejionu and Woods 2019). These barriers also apply largely to SRC and SRF: land committed towards SRC and SRF will be in production for several years and conversion back to arable and the removal of tree roots is challenging (Warren 2016). Additionally for SRF land conversion may be deemed irreversible as reversion to farming use may be prohibited by government regulations once SRF is planted, and the land will no longer be classed as agricultural.
Lack of access to specialist skills (including a shortage of trained foresters[48]) and to specialist contractors and machinery (e.g., for SRF mechanised planting machines was also identified as a barrier to deployment. The most likely cause of this is limited demand and a ‘lack of off the shelf machinery’[49]. Whilst this could be seen as an opportunity for development of new infrastructure and employment opportunities, it could currently also be seen as a practical constraint for many producers. The establishment of SRC requires new skills and different machinery compared to conventional cropping, this unfamiliarity and technical lack of knowledge prohibits adoption by producers (Warren, 2014). Stakeholders who we interviewed suggested that there is increased interest amongst farmers in diversification, but that appetite for change was tempered by concern about moving into unfamiliar activities which require new skills.
Culture and attitudes can be a barrier to PEC deployment. Warren et al. (2016) found Scottish farmers opposed SRC (willow) production because they considered it was not suitable for their current farming business or the land. Whilst fertile land is best for SRF production, a study conducted by Walle et al., 2007 found that farmers willing to introduce SRF, are not willing to do so on their ‘best agricultural soils’. Ranacher et al., 2021 found there is a gap in the available literature regarding farmers’ willingness to adopt short rotation plantations on less productive land. Another potential barrier which may prejudice farmers against SRC cultivation is the cultural separation of forestry and farming in Scotland – SRC has historically been viewed as a threat towards the socio-cultural identity of Scottish agriculture (Warren, 2014). In addition, an Environmental Impact Assessment – something which farmers may not be familiar with and is likely to incur costs – may be required[50] if converting agricultural land to forestry for SRF or SRC (Martin et al., 2020).
Concerns about biodiversity identified included, concern about SRF reducing the habitat for ground feeding birds and other ‘open land’ wildlife (Martin et al., 2020).The winterhardiness of miscanthus is considered a constraint for this crop in Scotland (Martin et al., 2020), and according to stakeholder may reduce achievable yields.
From a biofuel perspective, as with all PECs, it has been noted in the literature that energy generation from biomass is a potential source of direct and indirect emissions, despite carbon being captured during crop growth. Production, transport and processing are potential sources of direct emissions (Alexander et al., 2015). Considerations to limit such emissions, for example distance from farm to biomass plant, must therefore be taken into account. Indirect emissions related to land use change are more varied in the literature.It has been noted that the establishment of SRC on peat/high organic soils, found in the upland areas of Scotland, can potentially harm soil organic carbon (SOC) levels (Martin, 2020) . Existing sustainability criteria for the use of biomass to produce heat or electricity require that PECs are not grown on land that was peatland in January 2008, or of high biodiversity value, and that any change in SOC from cultivation of PECs is taken into account when checking that the electricity or heat produced meets the relevant GHG saving criteria (see e.g. Ofgem, 2018 and Ofgem, 2021, Low Carbon Contracts Company, 2022).
Other relevant crops and planting regimes
Aside from Miscanthus, SRC and SRF there are other potential energy crops – both perennial and annual crops – which can be used for bioenergy and which are potentially suitable for Scotland. The literature reviewed above mostly considered planting of PECs as replacement for arable crops . There is also literature to suggest integrating PECs alongside existing land-use may be feasible and potentially relevant for Scotland. These alternative crops and planting regimes are considered here. Note that relatively limited research was carried outon these as the PECs above were the core focus of this study.
Hemp
Hemp was once widely grown in Scotland and suits both the climate and growing conditions in the main agronomic areas especially parts of the Borders, East Lothian, Fife, Angus, Moray and the Black Isle. Hemp has a significant potential in carbon sequestration and there is evidence to demonstrate its suitability as a feedstock for bioenergy production therefore, bringing a new ‘cash-crop’ to Scotland which would also offer new job opportunities[51]. Dogbe and Revoredo-Giha., (2022) found through a farmer’s survey, that farmers identify diversification benefits i.e. planting hemp ‘as a safety net’ as a reason for producing hemp in Scotland. Biomass Connect technical article (2023), considering the UK as a whole, found hemp to have greater versatility and profitability than other biomass crops like Miscanthus, willow and poplar and high biomass yield (12-15t/ha of air-dried biomass). They also reported it to be an above-average energy crop for some biochemical-based biofuel production (in comparison to other similar yielding bioenergy crops)[52]. Hemp can also be used in bio-based building materials such as Hempcrete and textiles [53].
Hemp has the potential to provide high yields or returns with little or no pesticides and insecticides (Dogbe and Revoredo-Giha., 2022). It fits well into crop rotations with food and feed crops and helps improve soil structure and soil-borne pests. Constraints on producing hemp in Scotland includes the current lack of market as there are no large processing facilities in or near Scotland, strict regulations on growing hemp including, the need to obtain a costly license, and some reports of low profitability according to Scottish growers[54].
PECs in agroforestry systems,
Agroforestry is the planting of trees on farmland, alongside cropland or pastureland, usually in strips, clusters or scattered individual trees, that can be grazed or cultivated in between. The REA did not find specific studies focused on Scotland to show how PECs could be grown in agroforestry systems, but provided the design of agroforestry systems can allow for economically efficient planting, management and harvesting (i.e. still allow for machinery access), it could provide an advantageous model. Kralik et al., 2022[55] conducted a study to address the economic efficiency of agroforestry systems using SRC in comparison to conventional 4-year arable rotation, in Czechia. The results of this paper showed that the agroforestry system generate similar income and profits as the conventional annual crops when cultivating on appropriate sites and practicing good farming principles.
In terms of the scale of production which could be delivered through agroforestry, for the UK in general, Morris and Day (2023) estimated that 20% of UK farmland could transition to agroforestry by 2060. Utilising the aforementioned land area and yield data, the study observed three UK scenarios for SRC Willow. One scenario found where 30% of the yield arising from SRC Willow was used for bioenergy purpose and this would equate to 1.2 million tonnes of domestic wood fuel and therefore contribute significantly towards bioenergy needs and net zero.
Appendix E Methodology for economic analysis
Farm scale economic analysis
Calculating the gross margins for bioenergy crops
Step 1: Calculating the costs for the activities for the different types of bioenergy crops
Miscanthus, willow short rotation coppice (SRC), and short rotation forestry are the energy crops for which there is information that lets us build a baseline model that takes into consideration the different costs involved in the production process of these crops. We conducted an extensive literature review of the growing cycle for different crops, identifying the different steps for growing each of the crops and identifying the costs to undertake those actions. The costs used in our analysis are based on the costs that were used in the Sustainable Bioenergy Feedstocks Feasibility Study report for the Department for Business, Energy and Industrial Strategy (BEIS) published in 2021. This report carried out an extensive review of the available information for different types of bioenergy crops. Information was obtained through a literature review, which was supplemented by interviews with a range of key stakeholders, and expert insight from the project team. In addition, insights were gained through a review of development of SRC in Sweden, which has the largest planted area of SRC in the EU. A list of organisations consulted during the stakeholder analysis is given in appendix 2 of the Feedstocks Innovation Study report.
The three scenarios identified in the Feedstocks Innovation Study (low, medium and high-cost scenarios) were used in the analysis. This allows for some variation in factors that affect costs in agriculture and establish hypothetical scenarios that capture different combinations of costs. In the following sections, an overview of the actions and the costs are included for each of the three bioenergy crops;
Site preparation / land preparation (including from different prior land-uses where data is available)
Establishment / planting
Crop management costs e.g., during initial growth
Harvesting
Reversion (where relevant)
For information on the assumptions on the costs please see the Feedstock Innovation Study.
Miscanthus
For Miscanthus, the cost of production is made up from a number of elements that will be grouped in four phases. The phases for growing Miscanthus are:
Site preparation
Planting
Harvesting
Reversion
Figure B‑1 shows an example timeline of the Miscanthus growth cycle.
Figure B‑2 Growing cycle for Miscanthus
Year -1
Year 0
Year 1
Year 2
Every 3 years
Jan
Existing crop
Site preparation
Dormancy/Cut back
Dormancy
Harvest
Feb
Mar
Apr
Planting
Growth
Growth
Growth
May
Jun
Gap filling
Jul
Growth
Aug
Site preparation
Sep
Oct
Nov
Senescence
Senescence
Senescence/ Harvest
Senescence
Dec
Table B‑1 shows all the input costs for Miscanthus used in this study taken from the Feedstocks Innovation Study adjusted to 2023 prices using the latest GDP deflators[56]. As well as adjusting for inflation, fertiliser costs have been increased using the latest data from AHDB on fertiliser prices[57]. Using this data, costs for fertilisers were adjusted by comparing the average annual increase in fertilisers from 2019 to 2023.
Table B‑1 Input costs for Miscanthus (2023 prices)
Broad action category
Cost element
Unit
Lower
Medium
Higher
Site preparation
Professional costs 1 (Advice on Environmental Impact Assessment)
£/ha
0
120
120
Professional costs 2 (Advice on agronomy)
£/ha
0
0
28
Soil sampling
£/ha
7
7
7
Land rent equivalent
£/ha
0
0
0
Clearance & ploughing
£/ha
89
97
106
Total herbicide / insecticide + application 1
£/ha
57
57
69
Miscellaneous / risk to allow for unforeseen issues in land preparation
£/ha
0
61
180
Planting
Power harrow
£/ha
57
68
68
Pest control incl. rabbit fencing
£/ha
0
0
341
Rhizomes, planting, rolling
£/ha
1533
1987
2271
Fertiliser + application 1
£/ha
18
61
67
Total herbicide + application 2
£/ha
57
66
69
Weed/spray
£/ha
84
93
102
Miscellaneous / risk to allow for unforeseen issues during planting
£/ha
0
57
142
Harvesting
Mowing / cutting
£/ha
79
85
97
Baling (at £12/wet tonne)
£/t
12
14
17
Loading, stacking, storage (at £2/wet tonne)
£/t
2
2
5
Fertiliser + application 2
£/ha
25
157
229
Miscellaneous / risk 2 to allow for unforeseen issues during havesting
£/ha
0
0
102
Reversion
Reversion costs (herbicide + plough)
£/ha
145
153
174
Overall Total
2143
3025
4105
The broad action category: site preparation category includes costs of establishment. The establishment phase involves preparing the soil for the new crops, acquiring all the plant material, weed control, and planting the crops. In the production phase, the crops are matured and harvested throughout the years. This is the longest phase as it repeats for every harvest and includes all processes related to harvesting and regrowing the crop. The third phase will be reversion, when the plant material is removed, and the field is made available for a new crop (see Figure 13‑1).
There are variabilities and uncertainties related to estimating the production costs for each crop. These may arise for a variety of reasons such as:
Differences in soil type and/or condition
Differences in climate
Differences in farming practices across different companies/farms
Differences in end-product requirements/specifications.
In the establishment phase, the first lifecycle stage of Miscanthus, the field is taken care of and prepared for plantation. In our model, we have done this in year -1, with year 0 being the reference year for the plantation of the crops. In year -1, the land is prepared for the plantation of the crops in year 0. Several factors affect the cost of planting such as the site, soil type, and drainage. We have incorporated this variance into our model by modelling for different cost scenarios to reflect different possible cost combinations.
In the high-end cost scenario, we have included a possible pest-control component, such as rabbit-fencing to protect the crops. If needed, the pest control section could possibly be a major cost factor.
A couple of years after planting the Miscanthus crops, the first harvest happens. This first harvest marks the beginning of the production phase, which happens every year for the next 18 years. In the production phase, all steps related to harvesting the Miscanthus yield take place. These include mowing/cutting the plant, baling the harvest, and loading it to be further processed or sold. A margin for miscellaneous costs has also been included in the high-cost scenario. At the end of the crop’s life cycle, the reversion process happens to make the land suitable for other crops.
SRC: In this study, we have considered short-rotation coppice such as poplar and willow, two species which can be used for energy generation. Similar to Miscanthus, we have considered different costing phases that are involved in the process of growing SRC. However, given the differences there are between growing these crops and Miscanthus, the processes will be different, meaning that costs will also differ from Miscanthus. We have considered the following phases in the SRC production process:
Pre-planting/land preparation
Planting
Post-planting
Harvesting
Reversion
The same as Miscanthus, the costs have been taken from the Feedstocks Innovation Study adjusted for inflation and the fertiliser costs adjusted as explained in the Miscanthus method section (see Figure B‑2).
Figure B‑2 Growing cycle for SRC
Year -1
Year 0
Year 1
Year 2
Every 3 years
Jan
Existing crop
Site preparation
Dormancy/Cut back
Dormancy
Harvest
Feb
Mar
Apr
Planting
Growth
Growth
Growth
May
Jun
Gap filling
Jul
Growth
Aug
Site preparation
Sep
Oct
Nov
Senescence
Senescence
Senescence/ Harvest
Senescence
Dec
Table B‑2 Range of production costs for SRC (2023 prices)
Broad action category
Cost element
Unit
Lower
Medium
Higher
Pre-planting/land preparation
Professional costs 1 for EIA advice
£/ha
0
127
127
Professional costs 2 for agronomy advice
£/ha
0
28
28
Soil sampling and testing 1
£/ha
7
7
7
Soil sampling and testing 2
£/ha
7
7
7
Land rent equivalent
£/ha
0
0
0
Total herbicide plus application 1
£/ha
57
57
60
Land prep (ploughing)
£/ha
89
97
106
Land prep (power harrow)
£/ha
61
69
75
Land prep (miscellaneous / risks)
£/ha
34
68
103
Pest protection (rabbit fencing)
£/ha
0
341
341
Fertiliser + application 1
£/ha
18
112
164
Planting
Plant material
£/ha
1107
1249
1419
Planting
£/ha
454
454
511
Fertiliser + application 2
£/ha
18
112
164
Total herbicide plus application 2
£/ha
57
57
60
Post-planting
Herbicide / weed / spray 1
£/ha
84
93
93
Gapping up
£/ha
15
17
19
Cutback / mowing
£/ha
51
57
62
Harvesting and storage
Harvesting, handling and storage
£/ha
710
823
852
Fertiliser + application 3
£/ha
18
112
164
Herbicide / weed / spray 2
£/ha
84
102
102
Other annual costs
Miscellaneous / risks
£/ha
11
23
34
Reversion costs
£/ha
341
341
511
Overall Total
£/ha
3,242
4,301
4,911
In the pre-planting stage, the land is prepared for growing the SRC crop. Similar to Miscanthus, in the land preparation stage different steps to prepare the land such as soil sampling and testing, ploughing, and power harrow take place. We have modelled these to happen in year -1, with year 0 being the year in which planting takes place. Heavier or more compacted soils will require additional ploughing and sub-soiling compared to lighter costs. Multiple herbicide applications may be needed depending on the specific circumstances. A rabbit fence or other forms of pest control might be needed.
In the planting phase, costs for the plant material and other costs involved in the planting process (such as labour costs and fuel costs) are taken into consideration as well as the costs for soil fertilisation and herbicide application. Fertiliser will be applied either by the farmer or a contractor after planting in and around the plants. Fertiliser could be a purchased product or sewage sludge (if permitted) which comes at zero cost.
In the post-planting phase, the farmer maintains the plants to ensure the plants are healthy and the soil usage is being optimised. At the end of third year when the leaves have fallen, the farmer will apply herbicide and cut back the crop to encourage the plant to grow more stems and fill any gaps in the crop with new, larger size rods which can compete with the already established plants which have just been cut back. In this phase, the farmer also cuts the emerging shoots to encourage more shoots per plant.
Once the plants are ready for harvest, the harvesting process begins. We have combined all the different costs (machinery, labour, fuel, handling, storage, etc) into a single category as there would be too much granularity if we considered them separately. After each harvest, the application of fertiliser and weed/spraying takes place. We have also allowed for possible miscellaneous costs which could affect the final cost of this process.
Short Rotation Forestry (SRF)
Two scenarios have been defined for SRF:
SRF conifer scenario
SRF broadleaved scenario
As with Miscanthus and SRC the costs for SRF have been taken from the Sustainable Bioenergy Feedstocks Feasibility Study report for the Department for Business, Energy and Industrial Strategy (BEIS) published in 2021. The costs have been adjusted for inflation to 2023 prices using the latest GDP deflators[58].
A low, medium and high scenario for both SRF broadleaved and SRF conifer are included.
For the SRF broadleaved scenario, the costs are based on fast growing native broadleaves on medium quality land in lowlands, grown without thinning on a 15- to 20-year rotation and harvested conventionally as pole length or shortwood. The lower cost outcome uses fast growing poplar on farmland, whereas the medium and higher cost outcomes use birch in forest conditions. For more information on the costs please see the Feasibility Study. Details on the costs can be found in Table 13‑4. For the SRF conifer scenario, the costs are on the basis on a fast-growing conifer species (e.g., Sitka Spruce) on medium quality land, grown without thinning on a 15 to 20-year rotation and harvested conventionally as pole length or shortwood. The lower cost outcome assumes new planting, whereas the medium and higher cost outcome assume restocking in forest conditions. For all costs, please see Table B‑5.
Table B‑3 Range of production costs for broadleaved short rotation (2023 prices)
Broad action category
Cost element
Unit
Lower
Medium
Higher
Ground preparation
Deer fencing
£/ha
0
727
965
Rabbit control
£/ha
0
79
119
Spirals
£/ha
710
0
0
Draining
£/ha
0
45
85
Cultivation
£/ha
51
170
369
Planting
Plant supply
£/ha
1079
937
1516
Planting, restock
£/ha
0
250
443
Planting, New
£/ha
97
0
0
Beat up, Labour & plants
£/ha
125
392
766
Establishment and maintenance
Top up Spray (Hylobius)
£/ha
0
0
0
Weeding
£/ha
199
352
505
Cleaning/respacing
£/ha
0
0
51
General maintenance
£/ha
182
250
312
Forest-scale operations
£/ha
51
62
91
Management overhead
£/ha
0
0
0
Land rent equivalent
£/ha
0
149
206
Harvesting
Thinning
£/ha
0
0
0
Clearfell
£/odt
5
7
8
Residue removal
£/ha
0
0
0
Comminution (chipping)
£/odt
3
6
9
Reversion
Reversion
£/ha
1136
1419
1817
Overall Total
£/ha
3628
4833
7246
Table B4 Range of production costs for conifer short rotation (2023 prices)
Broad action category
Cost element
Unit
Lower
Medium
Higher
Deer fencing
£/ha
0
290
647
Rabbit control
£/ha
0
0
0
Spirals
£/ha
0
0
0
Draining
£/ha
0
45
85
Cultivation
£/ha
170
250
466
Planting
Plant supply
£/ha
676
738
1022
Planting, restock
£/ha
0
227
312
Planting, New
£/ha
153
0
0
Beat up, Labour & plants
£/ha
193
386
562
Establishment and maintenance
Top up Spray (Hylobius)
£/ha
0
102
261
Weeding
£/ha
165
324
432
Cleaning/respacing
£/ha
0
79
119
General maintenance
£/ha
182
250
312
Forest-scale operations
£/ha
51
62
91
Management overhead
£/ha
0
0
0
Harvesting
Thinning
£/ha
0
0
0
Clearfell
£/odt
5
7
8
Residue removal
£/ha
0
0
0
Comminution (chipping)
£/odt
3
6
9
Reversion
Reversion
£/ha
1136
1419
1817
Overall Total
£/ha
2700
4180
6135
Step 2: Calculating the output (yield and price)
Miscanthus
Data for yields in Scotland were obtained from the Scottish farm management handbook. Similar to what has been done in the costing section, different scenarios have been considered in order to account for possible variance in yields. 12 ODT, 14 ODT and 15 ODT were used for the low, medium and high scenario, respectively. ODT/ha stands for Oven dry tonne per hectare and corresponds to the total amount of above-ground living organic matter produced in a single hectare. Harvesting takes place in year 3 and is harvested on annual basis. Pricing data for Miscanthus was obtained from the John Nix pocketbook, £95, £97, £98 £/odt for the lower, medium and higher scenario, respectively (adjusted from 2021 to 2023 prices using the latest GDP deflators). This value is taken from the value that is offered to farmers from Terravesta. There are penalties if the crop is out of specification and bonuses available of £2/tonne if bales have been stored in a barn.
SRC
SRC is harvested with 2–3-year intervals and similar to Miscanthus, yields can vary for a wide range of reasons such as site conditions, type of planting method, years since planting, crop type, orography, and weather conditions. The yields used in the analysis come from the official statistics published by Defra which looks at Plant biomass: Miscanthus, short rotation coppice and straw[59]. These are 24, 35, 45 odt/ha, respectively. In the analysis, fluctuations in the yield of SRC have been included (Table ‑6).
Table B5 SRC rotation used in analysis if assuming fluctuations take place
Year
Units
Lower
Medium
Higher
Year 1
odt/ha
Year 2
odt/ha
Year 3
odt/ha
20
29
38
Year 4
odt/ha
Year 5
odt/ha
Year 6
odt/ha
26
38
49
Year 7
odt/ha
Year 8
odt/ha
Year 9
odt/ha
26
38
49
Year 10
odt/ha
Year 11
odt/ha
Year 12
odt/ha
26
38
49
Year 13
odt/ha
Year 14
odt/ha
Year 15
odt/ha
25
35
46
Year 16
odt/ha
Year 17
odt/ha
Year 18
odt/ha
23
33
43
Year 19
odt/ha
Year 20
odt/ha
Year 21
odt/ha
21
31
40
For the price of SRC, the value used in the latest John Nixs Pocketbook (2022) has been used. Adjusted to 2023 prices this is £59 per odt. This figure is based on what a grower in Cumbria could get.
SRF
SRF is harvested at 15-year intervals for both conifer (sikca spruce) and broadleaved (silver birch). The yield estimates were taken from the Feedstock Innovation Study. The price for both types of SRF were taken from a stakeholder from Scottish Forestry, which estimated that the payment for SRF that had been stacked and cut would be between £50 to £64.
Step 3: Calculating the gross margin
To calculate the gross margins for the bioenergy crops, firstly the costs were placed over the lifetime of the crop. For example, clearance and ploughing costs for Miscanthus were included in the first year (-1). The accompanying spreadsheet shows how all the costs are spread over the lifecycle of the crop. The costs were then taken away from the output estimates to calculate the gross margins over the lifecycle of the crop.
To calculate the gross margins for all the farm types used in the analysis the latest data from the Scotland farm business survey[60] was used using data from the years 2016 to 2022. An average over these years was used to take account of variability in agricultural costs and outputs. To get to the £ per hectare value, using the time series data from 2016, total average output for each of the farm types was divided by the average size of the farm. For variable costs, total average inputs – other fixed costs were taken away from the total average inputs to get to the variable costs. This was then converted to per hectare values. For the general cropping, forage category data was taken from the latest census[61] for the output data and the costs were taken from the farm management handbook[62].
Table C: Breakdown of costs and outputs used for gross margin calculations (average data from 6 years from 2016-17 to 2021-22 from Scottish Farm Business Income Survey)
Type of farm
Lowland Sheep & Cattle
Mixed
Performance band
Lower 25%
Average
Upper 25%
Lower 25%
Average
Upper 25%
Total crop output
10,516
22,962
48,895
73,507
102,314
180,117
Total livestock output
74,755
126,232
304,160
72,675
104,739
165,523
Miscellaneous output
7,184
8,973
11,508
13,028
20,741
50,036
Total average output
92,455
158,167
364,563
159,210
227,793
395,676
Crop expenses
15,097
20,175
38,586
37,388
45,197
67,023
Livestock expenses
42,485
62,298
142,947
41,068
52,412
73,146
Other fixed costs
92,125
91,391
151,465
133,423
146,043
208,434
Total average inputs
149,707
173,864
332,999
211,879
243,652
348,603
Total average inputs – other fixed costs
57,582
82,473
181,534
78,457
97,609
140,169
Table D: General cropping – forage gross margin calculation data
Gross margin calculation: Average total cost per annum – forage output = gross margin
Figure A: Excerpt from Scottish Farm Mangement Handbook showing data used in the calculations in Table D above.
Comparing bioenergy crops to existing land-use economics: three scenarios
Bioenergy energy crop scenarios
For the low scenario, high costs were compared with lower output. For the medium scenario, medium costs were compared with medium output. For the high scenario, low costs were compared with high output.
Farm scenarios
For the different farm income scenarios, the farm business income definitions were used from the Scotland farm business survey. For low this uses the lower 25% percentile for that farm category, for medium the average percentile was used and for the higher, the upper 25% percentile was used.
Yearly average gross margins for each of the bioenergy crops and farm types
To calculate the yearly average gross margins for each of the bioenergy crop and the farm type scenarios a discount rate was applied to future years. The discount rate applied is the standard discount rate recommended by the green book[65]. The Green Book recommends that costs and benefits occurring in the first 30 years of a programme, project or policy be discounted at an annual rate of 3.5%, and recommends a schedule of declining discount rates thereafter. A discount rate is applied as it is assumed that people prefer to receive financial outputs now rather then in the future.
Assessment of implications for Scotland’s rural economy
Using the geo-spatial mapping data from the previous project, which identified land that was theoretically suitable for PEC production considering land capability, slope, and climate (Martin et al, 2020), percentages of the land that could be converted to bioenergy crops were derived for each of the regions. This percentage was then applied to the land area estimated to be in each farm type in the region, to derive the land are potentially suitable for PECs by farm type. The land area in each farm type in each region was estimated by combining data on crop areas in each region with estimates of the percentge of crop area at the Scottish level which occurs in each each farm type.
A previous CXC study (Meek et al, 2022) indicated that, bearing in mind land suitability, an estimated total of approximately 27,000 ha PECs could be planted by 2030, 38,000 by 2032 and 90,250 hectares by 2045. Two scenarios were then constructed to see what land transitions could meet these areas of PECS. Using information on the gross margins for the three farm types of interest and the gross margins for the PECs, the economic impact of each land use change can be ranked.
Table E Change in gross margin (£/ha) in transitioning to PECs
SRF
SRC
Miscanthus
Non-LFA Cattle & Sheep
-£414
-£347
-£52
Mixed holdings
-£577
-£511
-£215
General cropping
£1,009
£1,076
£1,371
These rankings were used to guide how much of the potential land suitable for PECs in each farm type was assumed to be converted, with more land converted for more economically beneficial transitions. Care was also taken, particularly in Scenario 2, where high levels of trnaition are needed to meet the higher PEC target area, that levels of overall change were not too high. This resulted in the assumed changes shown in the Tables below
Table F Assumed changes in land use Scenario 1
Percentage of suitable land assumed converted to PECs
Ha converted to PECs
Non-LFA Cattle & Sheep
Mixed Holdings
General Cropping, Forage
Non-LFA Cattle & Sheep
Mixed Holdings
General Cropping, Forage
Total area
PEC
ha
ha
ha
ha
SRF
15%
66%
9,928
–
8,977
18,905
SRC
15%
66%
7,578
–
5,258
12,836
Miscanthus
30%
100%
3,790
–
1,352
5,142
Total land are converted
21,296
–
15,587
36,883
Percentage of total land in farm type converted
20%
0%
1.1%
2.1%
Table G Assumed changes in land use Scenario 2
Percentage of suitable land assumed converted to PECs
Ha converted to PECs
PEC
Non-LFA Cattle & Sheep
Mixed Holdings
General Cropping, Forage
Non-LFA Cattle & Sheep
Mixed Holdings
General Cropping, Forage
Total area
ha
ha
ha
ha
SRF
30%
50%
75%
19,857
13,873
10,201
43,931
SRC
30%
50%
75%
15,156
10,078
5,975
31,209
Miscanthus
60%
100%
100%
7,580
4,770
1,352
13,701
Total land are converted
21,296
–
15,587
42,592
Percentage of total land in farm type converted
40%
9%
1.3%
5.0%
The Potential change in farm income due to change in gross margin was calculated by multiplying the change in gross margin from each transition in Tables E, with the areas in transition in Tables F and G. This was done on a regional basis.
The estimated shortfall in crop production from a shift to PECs, was calculated by using data on the areas of crop land in each farm type and the areas converted to PECs to calculate lost areas of crop production. These were then multiplied by typical crop yields[66]. This was all done at a regional level. Estimate the change in livestock production that might come from the shift to PECs would require a more detailed analysis than was possible in this study.
Appendix F: Mapping outputs from 2020 project
A previous CXC Project (Martin et al, 2020) used geo-spatial mapping to identify suitable areas of land in Scotland for growing PECs. The project focused on land capability of grades; 4.1, 4.2, 5.1, 5.2, 5.3 and 6.1, which are typically suitable for mixed agriculture, improved grassland and high-quality rough grazing [67], and assessed what area of these grades where suitable for SRC and Miscanthus growth which limited the potential production area. For SRF the assessment also included land capability for agriculture grades F1, F2, F3, F4 and F5.
Figure C-1: Distribution of suitable land available for Short Rotation Forestry
Figure C-2: Distribution of suitable land available for Short Rotation Coppice
Figure C-3: Distribution of suitable land available for Miscanthus
Data attributions
The data used in the bioenergy crop growth analysis was downloaded from multiple sources. In order to comply with their licences, as well as to acknowledge the use of the data, attributions for each data source is provided in Table C-1. In all cases these attributions are those directly required by the data licence or metadata.
Table C-1: Data attributions
Dataset name and data source
Data attribution
James Hutton Institute: Land Capability for Agriculture, 1:250,000
James Hutton Institute: Land Capability for Agriculture, 1:250,000 copyright and database right The James Hutton Institute 1980. Used with permission of The James Hutton Institute. All rights reserved.
Any public sector information contained in these data is licensed under the Open Government Licence v.2.0
James Hutton Institute: Land Capability for Forestry, 1:250,000
James Hutton Institute: Land Capability for Forestry, 1:250,000 copyright and database right The James Hutton Institute 1980. Used with permission of The James Hutton Institute. All rights reserved.
Any public sector information contained in these data is licensed under the Open Government Licence v.2.0
Ordnance Survey: Terrain 50 50m resolution digital elevation model
Centre for Ecology and Hydrology: Gridded Estimates of Areal Rainfall (GEAR)
Tanguy, M.; Dixon, H.; Prosdocimi, I.; Morris, D.G.; Keller, V.D.J. (2019). Gridded estimates of daily and monthly areal rainfall for the United Kingdom (1890-2017) [CEH-GEAR]. NERC Environmental Information Data Centre. https://doi.org/10.5285/ee9ab43d-a4fe-4e73-afd5-cd4fc4c82556
Centre for Ecology and Hydrology: Climate Hydrology and Ecology Research Support System (CHESS)
Martinez-de la Torre, A.; Blyth, E.M.; Robinson, E.L. (2018). Water, carbon and energy fluxes simulation for Great Britain using the JULES Land Surface Model and the Climate Hydrology and Ecology research Support System meteorology dataset (1961-2015) [CHESS-land]. NERC Environmental Information Data Centre. https://doi.org/10.5285/c76096d6-45d4-4a69-a310-4c67f8dcf096
James Hutton Institute: National Soils of Scotland, 1:250,000
James Hutton Institute: National Soils of Scotland, 1:250,000 copyright and database right The James Hutton Institute 2019. Used with permission of The James Hutton Institute. All rights reserved.
Any public sector information contained in these data is licensed under the Open Government Licence v.2.0
Scottish Natural Heritage: Carbon and Peatland Map 2016.
Contains public sector information licensed under the Open Government Licence v3.0.
Forestry Commission: National Forestry Inventory Woodland Scotland 2017
Contains Forestry Commission information licensed under the Open Government License v3.0.
Scottish Natural Heritage: National Parks, National Scenic Areas, Country Parks etc.
Contains public sector information licensed under the Open Government Licence v3.0.
Scottish Natural Heritage: World Heritage Sites, Battlefields, Conservation Areas etc.
Contains public sector information licensed under the Open Government Licence v3.0.
Scottish Natural Heritage: Ramsar, SAC, SPA, SSSI etc.
Contains public sector information licensed under the Open Government Licence v3.0.
AppendixG: Methology for geospatial analysis of agricultural land use change
Geospatial analysis
To calculate the current land area available for change to bioenergy cropping, based on the locations from the previous CXC project, geospatial analysis was completed. The percentage of the total land area suitable for bioenergy growth in each agricultural region was calculated and applied to the total hectarage of the the agricultural land used within the land capability categories. This was then divided into three main farm types: Non-LFA cattle and sheep, Mixed holdings, General cropping – forage. This presented a total hectarage by agricultural region and farm type that could be converted to SRC, Miscanthus and SRF. This data was used in economic calculations to present the change in economic potential for the three farm types under a land use change to bioenergy crops. Details of sources used are presented in Table D-1.
Hectarage of barley (spring and winter), stockfeeding crops (maize and lupin) and grass (under 5 years old, and 5 years old and over) used to calculate the current land usage within the Scottish agricultural regions.
N/A
Table 17 Livestock by Region (Number of heads) Dataset
Data used to calculate the percentage split of the number of animals using grass (hay and silage) within Scotland.
Assumption that beef and dairy cattle will consume similar feed amounts each day, supported by review or recommended dry matter intake by online sources.
Table 1 Crops and grass area, hay and silage production, 2010 to 2020
Agricultural Statistics: Results of December 2020 Agricultural Survey
Data used to calculate the percentage of barley produced in Scotland used for animal feed.
Assumed that all barley produced for animal feed is produced in land capability categories 3.3-5.3, in line with the areas selected for potential growth of SRC and Miscanthus.
Land capability – agriculture
James Hutton Institute: Land Capability for Agriculture, 1:250,000
Dataset used to compare the land capability categories against the potential growth area of SRC and Miscanthus to calculate the percentage of land area for bioenergy growth applied in calculations.
Land capability – forestry
James Hutton Institute: Land Capability for Forestry, 1:250,000
Dataset used to compare the land capability categories against the potential growth area of SRF to calculate the percentage of land area for bioenergy growth applied in calculations.
Percentage of crops by farm type
Technical knowledge
Division of crops between farm types used to split the total hectarage of crops into three main farm type categories: Non-LFA cattle and sheep, Mixed holdings, General cropping – forage for economic farm level analysis.
Assumptions have been made on the percentage split of the crops focused within the mixed agriculture and improved grassland land capability categories, based on the removal of total crops used for other farm types (e.g. specialist dairy and non-animal feed cropping categories – general cropping and specialist cereals).
Appendix H: Stakeholder engagement methodology and key findings
In addition to the rapid evidence assessment and economic analysis, we conducted stakeholder engagement with a robust representative sample of stakeholders from across the Scottish agricultural network to provide input into the project. The engagement was conducted in two stages:
Topic expert research interviews: eight semi-structured interviews of approx. one hr were carried out as part of the evidence gathering process. Interviewees were sent a briefing of key areas of enquiry prior to their interview to aid their preparation. Ricardo recorded each discussion as meeting recording, transcript and attendee notes.
Stakeholder workshop: Stakeholder input was sought to scrutinise findings and ensure the SWOT and PESTLE are as complete and robust as possible. This engagement was delivered through a one hour structured on-line meeting held on the 16th October 2023 with a combination of stakeholders who had already contributed to individual interviews and representatives of wider organisation and businesses. Initial finding were presented by the project team and comment on accuracy, completeness and additional considerations sought throughout. Following the meeting, the presentation and list of questions (below) was sent to all attendees with an invitation for follow up comment.
Insights were gained into:
What influences farmer and land-manager decisions on energy cropping.
Wider concerns or questions about potential implications.
Benefits and disadvantages of energy crops.
Opportunities to drive greater uptake.
Insights in economic aspects and state of knowledge on this for Scotland in particular.
Feedback reflected some of the points of discussion and debate that were identified in the REA such as questions over what land is suitable and how best to use land given Scotland’s climate targets and other priorities, and debate over yields, prices and how to ensure wider environmental benefits from energy crops, and to what extent this is possible in Scotland.
The insights from this stakeholder engagement have been integrated into Section 4 Evidence Base and Section 7 SWOT & PESTLE analysis.
Summary of questions posed to stakeholders during the engagement element of the project:
General:
Do you think there are opportunities for farmers and land managers in Scotland to benefit from producing perennial energy crops?
If so, which crops, locations and circumstances do you think could be most economically viable, and why?
How could we improve our costings and economic assumptions to make them more reflective of the reality of the Scottish context?
What economic and other considerations would most influence farmers’ and land-managers’ decision to start producing energy crops?
What are the most significant potential benefits and challenges at a wider economy scale?
Economic analysis at farm scale
How could we improve our costings and economic assumptions to make them more reflective of the reality of the Scottish context?
Would you suggest any adjustments to our costs?
Would you suggest any adjustment to our yield or prices?
Are the rotation lengths appropriate?
Preferred locations
How is best to select preferred biomass locations? E.g. based on areas in proximity to market usage? Or based on land with best production potential?
Are there any existing or proposed large-scale biomass plants in Scotland?
What is a maximum travel distance from farm to plant?
Are there any key biomass planting / harvesting contractors in Scotland? If so, where?
Output of Stakeholder Engagement
The output of the stakeholder interviews included suggestions for data and information sources to support the economic analysis. Stakeholders also provided commentary on the opportunities and challenges of perennial energy crop production in Scotland; this is summarized below:
Miscanthus
Short Rotation Coppice
Short Rotation Forestry
Low input & maintenance costs
Use existing harvester (maize harvester)
Alternative markets (eg bedding)
Earlier harvest income than SRC/SRF & annual harvest
Knowledge base/innovation pipeline
Harvest contractor employment
Soil health
Sequential planting to allow harvest every year (albeit small volumes)
Opportunity to improve efficiency with modern machinery
Potential for biodiversity net gain / natural capital payments
Soil health / shelter benefits for other enterprises on farm.
No costs whilst growing
Alternative markets (for same diameter wood/ maybe to grow on)
Suits wider range of conditions
Potential community involvement
Shelter for livestock / crops
Poor cashflow
Miscanthus
Short Rotation Coppice
Short Rotation Forestry
Upfront cost: 2-3yrs to harvest
Winter hardiness challenge (although new cultivars being developed)
Director of International Land Use Study Centre – James Hutton Institute
NatureScot
AHDB
Scottish Land and Estates
Appendix I: Biomass Feedstock Innovation Funding in the UK
There is currently significant investment in innovation to increase the production of sustainable domestic biomass, including the Biomass Feedstocks Innovation Programme[68], which is funding innovative ideas that address barriers to biomass feedstock production across the UK. It is supporting projects those seeking to improve productivity through breeding, planting, cultivating and harvesting. Summaries of the 12 funded projects, taken from the GOV.UK programme page, are given below[69].
Led by UK Centre for Ecology & Hydrology. The Biomass Connect Phase 2 project will create a demonstration and knowledge sharing platform to showcase best practice and innovations in land-based biomass feedstock production.
Project BIOFORCE (BIOmass FORestry CrEation): Creating geospatial data systems to upscale national forestry-based biomass production.
Led by Verna Earth Solutions Ltd (formerly Forest Creation Partners Limited). Project BIOFORCE will create and demonstrate new, upgraded versions of Forest Research’s industry-standard Ecological Site Classification (ESC) tool, and Verna’s successful ForestFounder system.
Transforming UK offshore marine algae biomass production
Led by SeaGrown Limited. Scarborough-based SeaGrown operates a 25-hectare offshore seaweed farm in the North Sea off the Yorkshire Coast. This project seeks to apply SeaGrown’s experience in pioneering this new sector to create an innovative, automated end-to-end seaweed farming system.
EnviroCrops – Perennial Energy Crops Decision Support System (PEC-DSS)
Led by Agri Food and Biosciences Institute (AFBI).The EnviroCrops web app is envisaged as a central source of impartial information in an easy to access, free or low-cost, user-friendly format, that will enable farmers, land managers and consultants to make an informed decision about planting biomass crops.
Miscanspeed – accelerating Miscanthus breeding using genomic selection.
Led by Aberystwyth University. The aim of this project is to demonstrate the application of genomic selection (GS) in accelerating the breeding of high yielding, resilient Miscanthus varieties for the UK.
Technologies to enhance the multiplication and propagation of energy crops (TEMPEC)
Led by New Energy Farms EU Limited. The project objectives are to increase the number of energy grass varieties that are available, increase yield and develop agronomic improvements to multiplying and planting energy crops.
Optimising Miscanthus Establishment through improved mechanisation and data capture to meet Net Zero targets (OMENZ)
Led by Terravesta Farms Ltd. The project will utilise the Terravesta Harvest Hub platform to integrate data collected from all stages of our establishment pipeline alongside their existing harvest and growth data. Through data integration with the current supply chain, the OMENZ team will gain insights into long term crop performance and improve the entire Miscanthus biomass supply chain, benefiting both growers and end-users.
Demonstration of on-farm pelletisation technology.
Led by White Horse Energy Ltd in developing and constructing a robust mobile pelletiser enabling farms to process a range of feedstocks, enabling domestic biomass pellets to displace imported pellets in the UK energy supply mix.
Teesdale Moorland Biomass Project
Led by Teesdale Environmental Consulting Ltd (TEC Ltd). The Teesdale Moorland Biomass Project aims to utilise existing managed heather moort and harvest commercially viable biomass products from naturally generated moorland crops that are currently burned in situ as part of annual land management practices.
Taeda Tech Project – Soilless cultivation for rapid biomass feedstock production
Led by University of Surrey. The project uses novel aeroponic technology to rapidly cultivate Short Rotation Coppice (SRC) willow cuttings which can be planted into the field for bioenergy.
Net Zero Willow
Led by Rickerby Estates Ltd. The team is developing innovations aimed at revolutionising the industry and maximising marginal gains through more efficient machinery.
Accelerating Willow Breeding and Deployment
Led by Rothamsted Research. The Accelerating Willow Breeding and Deployment (AWBD) project will accelerate the breeding of SRC willow and generate information to guide the intelligent deployment of current varieties.
Appendix J: SWOT and PESTLE Analysis: Detailed Results
The SWOT analysis assessed the current economic potential for perennial energy crops for farmers and land-managers in Scotland, looking at strengths, weaknesses, opportunities, and threats (SWOT) to provide a simplified picture and more clarity of what would be needed in order for these crops to be an attractive proposition economically, whilst also considering the other factors which farmers and land-managers would be likely to consider alongside the economics. The SWOT tables below are grouped according to the following categorisations:
Perennial energy grasses (primarily Miscanthus);
Short rotation coppice (primarily Willow);
Short rotation forestry (including broadleaved; conifer)
Table G1. SWOT table covering Perennial energy grasses, focused on Miscanthus.
Strengths
Weaknesses
Can harvest with maize harvester – farmer / contractor will have this (but not many people grow maize in Scotland).
Alternative markets e.g. bedding provides more security for farmers to encourage adoption.
Early harvest, better cashflow for farmers – 3yrs to first harvest (but some small harvest in first year)
Knowledge gaps – not flagged in research.
Limited input needs – lower costs
Upfront investment; delay in income (2-3yrs)
Winter hardiness (Scotland);
Gap in support e.g. grants (energy crop scheme for establishment grants in early 2000s) – nothing right now.
Limited market right now, uncertainty for future market.
Higher yield than SRC
Doesn’t respond to N fertilizer – limited opportunity to boost yield
Not frost tolerant – less suited to Scotland. But there are more frost hardy cultivars being developed.
Opportunities
Threats
To incentivise with grants, as there are none right now;
Employment opportunity in harvesting contracting.
Biodegradable film mulch – can boost economic performance; other innovations under biomass feedstock – opportunity to take these up (e.g. hybrid varieties which are more
Grassland that is becoming unprofitable – could be used.
Loss of carbon stock through land-use change (eg. if convert grassland)
Challenges in sourcing high-quality planting stock (esp. if there is uptake in planting)
Table G2. SWOT table covering Short Rotation Coppice
Strengths
Weaknesses
Sequential planting; allows harvest every year. But limits economics with small amounts.
Farmers consider financially risky; low selling price; high cost of harvest.
Low selling price / high harvest costs.
Single market for energy
Focused on a small number of species – more data needed on e.g. aspen
Concern re. removal of flexibility of land use in a rotation
Challenges around growth area (willow won’t grow well everywhere)
Opportunities
Threats
Modern machinery can improve efficiency.
Breeding to achieve higher yields happening.
Opportunities for biodiversity net gain and natural capital
Additional benefits of woodland habitat linkage
Benefits as a neighbour crop for shelter
Soil health benefits of willow?
Purification of contaminated soils? (willow)
Variable yield / uncertainty over lifecycle.
Risks as a neighbour crop for shading
Risks of pest (rust) for SRC willow
Table G3. SWOT table covering Short Rotation Forestry
Strengths
Weaknesses
No costs whilst growing – to harvest point.
Alternative markets potentially for same small diameter wood.
Wider range of growing conditions
Longer growing period before harvest.
Need to replant after harvest.
Loss of ‘agriculture’ classification as land and resulting loss of farm subsidy payment.
Less research: only the Forest Research plots – a few years ago, but not yet got full result.
Storage / transport: particularly for SRF in research (check)
Concern re. removal of flexibility of land use in a rotation
Opportunities
Threats
Variable yield / uncertainty over lifecycle.
Community-scale growth plans and ownership: potential economic driver for socio-economic regeneration
Biodiversity/conservation/amenity value
Grazing options on planted land and animal welfare benefits
Benefits as a neighbour crop for shelter
Options for diversification/flexibility through growing on to larger trees for other uses (e.g. timber)
Competition for output for other (possible more profitable) wood uses, such as timber
Risks as a neighbour crop for shading
PESTLE Analysis of economic potential of energy crops in Scotland
Energy crops are subject to a range of enabling and preventative factors which would influence the benefits and potential uptake of the crops in Scotland. A political, economic, social, technical, legal, and environmental (PESTLE) analysis was therefore undertaken to assess the potential to…increase economic viability and uptake of energy crops in Scotland This assessment was produced following the SWOT analysis to incorporate the strengths and opportunities of each energy crops (and more generally) identified in the SWOT.
Table G4. Summary PESTLE Analysis: enabling and preventative factors for economically viable energy crops in Scotland
The combination of high production costs, particularly the upfront investments uncertain policies and uncertain market prices for future harvests discourage farmers from growing SRC plants. (Zięty et al, 2022)
ENABLER
BARRIER
Political
Uncertain policies /lack of political support for key energy crops over multiple governments (Zięty et al, 2022, Davies et al, 2020) For example, the Energy Crops Scheme which provided establishment grants was withdrawn in 2013, and despite strong lobbying, Defra had resisted allowing Miscanthus to be counted as an ecological focus area (EFA) under greening.
Lack of specific grant funding available to help pay for establishment Miscanthus (Davies 2020).
The combination of high production costs and uncertain policies as well as the prices of the products discourage farmers from growing SRC plants. (Zięty et al, 2022)
Economic
Miscanthus- ‘high return per hectare’ (Martin et al., 2020 D1)
Yield and sale price are biggest contributing factors to achieving good economics (Martin et al., 2020 D1)
Farmers currently growing a bioenergy crop also had a higher average income compared to their nongrowing counterparts. (Brown et al 2016 D2)
Establishment grants and cash advance systems are widespread and efficient ways of limiting liquidity constraints (Bocquého, G., 2017 D3)
profitability was the main reason for growing these crops (Glithero et al., 2013)
Large initial investment and no income for 2-3 years (Miscanthus), 4-5 years (SRC), (10-20 years) SRF (Martin et al., 2020 D1)
SRF – Poor cash flow (Martin et al., 2020 D1)
Uncertain profitability in comparison to land-uses that are better known (Martin et al., 2020 D1)
Many farmers regard SRC willow as a financially risky (Warren et al., 2016 D2)
There are no stable markets for Miscanthus biomass and relevant applications are low-value (Lewandowski, I., J. Clifton-Brown, et al. 2016).
Social
Miscanthus- planting and annual harvesting will require supportive contractor and other local employment services. (Martin et al., 2020 D1)
Local economic activity related to employment opportunities. Local employment at conversion plant and associated activities (Thornley, P., 2006.)
SRF -Negative publicity regarding the benefits of energy crops (Martin et al., 2020 D1)
SRF- Objections to planning applications for biomass power stations leads to limited feedstock market and demand (Martin et al., 2020 D1)
Attitudes can take longer to change than awareness (Brown et al 2016 D2)
Farmers cited a range of ‘moral’ (e.g. should not be using land for energy crops when there is a shortage of food), land quality, knowledge, profit and current farming practice comments as reasons for not growing DECs (Glithero et al., 2013)
Technical
The energy crop market displays path dependence, arising from the reinforcement of the location of plant construction and energy crop selection, based on the locations of the previous plants and energy crops. Once a plant has been built at a location, and a number of farmers have adopted to produce supply for that plant, that area is more likely to be selected for further plant development, and associated energy crop growth (Alexander et al 2015 D14).
SRC- modern machinery, with high efficiency, working in fields with a larger area, reduces costs significantly (Kwaśniewski et al 2021 D17)
SRF-Limited specialist machinery for SRF management (Martin et al., 2020 D1)
need for smaller harvest equipment adapted to small-and-medium-scale area plantations of SRWC (Savoie et al 2013 B)
SRC – technical lack of knowledge (Wolbert-Haverkamp, M. and Musshoff, O., 2014).
Legal
Private long-term production contracts between farmers and biomass processors can act as a risk barrier (Bocquého, G., 2017 D3)
SRF-Irreversible land conversion- Reversion to farming use may not be allowed once SRF is planted as deemed change of use (Martin et al., 2020 D1)
Long-term contracts and legal restrictions may become obstacles in the establishment of SRC (Long-termland contracts, which are essential for establishing SRC plantations, are one of the biggest obstacles for farmers engaging in SRC projects. Consequently, annual payments are an important compensation ) (Fürtner et al 2022 D9)
Environmental
careful allocation of perennial cropping systems into a cropland could produce positive impacts on climate, water, and biodiversity (foster multiple ecosystem services and mitigate ecosystem disservices (Anejionu, O.C. and Woods, J., 2019 D3)
long term weed control (Glithero et al., 2013)
The second-generation bioenergy crop Miscanthus almost always has a smaller environmental footprint than first generation annual bioenergy ones (Hastings et al., 2017).
SRC- Establishment on high organic/peaty soils (upland areas) potentially detrimental to soil carbon levels, soil damage and erosion. (Martin et al., 2020 D1)
SRC-cannot be planted on land with soils that are water-logged (Martin et al., 2020 D1)
Miscanthus-Winterhardiness of Miscanthus is a major constraint (can halt growth, causing diminished achievable yield) (Martin et al., 2020 D1)
Current varieties of Miscanthus are constrained by climate to the south and south east of Scotland (Martin et al., 2020 D1)
Miscanthus- have lower or similar SOC (soil carbon stocks) when compared to grassland controls (Holder et al., 2019 D1)
Direct emissions can occur in the production, transport, handling and processing, while indirect emissions are associated with land use change potentially causing SOC changes (Alexander et al., 2015 D14).
The response to climate change scenarios further favours Miscanthus, suggesting that Miscanthus supply increases under future climate, while SRC willow supply is expected to reduce (Alexander, P., D. Moran, et al. 2014)
large-scale bioenergy production and associated additional demand for irrigation may further intensify existing pressures on water resources (Popp et al 2011)
The reduction of management intensity originating from converting agricultural land use to SRC cultivation results in additional environmental benefits, especially in soil protection and the enhancement of soil life (Schiberna et al., 2021 D9)
Appendix K: Biomass plants included for proximity analysis
Operator
Site Name
Installed Capacity (MWel)
CHP
Development Status
RWE
Markinch Biomass CHP Plant
65.00
Yes
Operational
E.ON
Stevens Croft
50.40
No
Operational
SIMEC/ Liberty House
Liberty Steel Dalzell
17.00
Operational
Norbord (West Fraser)
Cowie Biomass Facility
15.00
No
Operational
EPR Scotland
Westfield Biomass Power Station
12.50
No
Operational
Speyside Renewable Energy Partnership
Speyside Biomass CHP Plant
12.50
Yes
Operational
Scottish Bio-Power
Rothes Bio-Plant
8.30
Yes
Operational
University of St Andrews
Sustainable Power and Research Campus
6.50
Yes
Operational
How to cite this publication: Dowson, F., Leake, A., Harpham, L., Willcocks, J., Peters, E., David, T., Bates, T., Wood, C. (2024). ‘Economic potential of energy crops in Scotland’, ClimateXChange. http://dx.doi.org/10.7488/era/5478
While every effort is made to ensure the information in this report is accurate, no legal responsibility is accepted for any errors, omissions or misleading statements. The views expressed represent those of the author(s), and do not necessarily represent those of the host institutions or funders.
Defined as land which was primary forest, designated for nature protection, highly biodiverse grassland (except where harvesting is necessary to maintain grassland status), peatland, continuously forested, wetland in or after 2008. ↑
Based on a meta-analysis of 45 studies on transition to energy crops from ‘marginal’ land. ↑
Definition of marginal land may not be applicable to Scotland. ↑
Gross margin in agricultural costings is typically defined as ‘Output from the enterprise less the Variable Costs, including the allocated variable costs of grass and other forage’ ↑
Defined in the Scottish Farm business income survey as “Farms with no enterprise contributing more than two-thirds of their total standard output” – typically including livestock and crops, including animal fodder. An average income ↑
The general cropping, forage category has only one scenario due to the data coming from the Scottish Government Census data which doesn’t provide a low, medium and high scenario and the cost data coming form the Farm Management Handbook 2023/2024 ↑
Gross margin is farm income from a specific production enterprise, e,g, crop or livestock minus costs directly associated with production of that output, but excluding ‘fixed costs’ such as costs associated with farm buildings, general labour and finance costs. Further detail available in: Appendix E Methodology for economic analysis. ↑
The transition of a large land area – scenario 2 – to PECs creates a loss because of the assumptions within our study – we assumed that land which is more economically advantageous for PECs would be converted preferentially, so a larger portion of land transitioned in scenario 1 would make a profit from the transition to PECs, whereas in scenario 2 a large area of land which would make a loss from the transition was included, and so resulted in a total loss on balance. ↑
This study focused mostly on Miscanthus and SRC, but has been used as a best estimate here to give some basis for understanding how potential demand for bioenergy crops could evolve in future to meet Scottish Government NETs ambition. ↑
This refers to the percentage of all Non-LFA Cattle and Sheep land in Scotland – suitable and not suitable for PECs. ↑
Methodology and maps of potential production areas of the three crops produced within the previous project are in Appendix F. ↑
These three types of BECCS (Bioenergy with Carbon Capture and Storage) were identified in CCPu, along with BECCS in industry, as potential options for Scotland. ↑
This study focused mostly on Miscanthus and SRC, but has been used as a best estimate here to give some basis for understanding how potential demand for bioenergy crops could evolve in future to meet Scottish Government NETs ambition. ↑
Agroforestry is the practice of planting trees, usually to produce a crop of food or wood products, on farmland in combination with arable or livestock farming, often in small patches or strips with fields. ↑
The just transition principles are defined in the Scottish legislation as:
‘the importance of taking action to reduce net Scottish emissions of greenhouse gases in a way which:
a) supports environmentally and socially sustainable jobs,
b) supports low-carbon investment and infrastructure,
c) develops and maintains social consensus through engagement with workers, trade unions, communities, non-governmental organisations, representatives of the interests of business and industry and such other persons as the Scottish Ministers consider appropriate,
d) creates decent, fair and high-value work in a way which does not negatively affect the current workforce and overall economy,
e) contributes to resource efficient and sustainable economic approaches which help to address inequality and poverty.’↑
A Contract for Difference (CfD) is a private law contract between a low carbon electricity generator and the Low Carbon Contracts Company (LCCC), a government-owned company. Contracts for Difference – GOV.UK (www.gov.uk)↑
Energy crops need support to fulfil potential – Farmers Weekly↑
DEFRA Area of crops grown for bioenergy in England and the UK Area of crops grown for bioenergy in England and the UK: 2008-2014 – GOV.UK (www.gov.uk) ↑
Dependent on size of planting area and location in relation to National Scenic Areas and other sensitive areas – latest guidance available from Forestry Scotland. Scottish Forestry – Environmental Impact Assessments↑